HP Compaq 8300 Specifications

HP Compaq Business PC Maintenance
and Service Guide
Elite 8300 Series Convertible Minitower
Elite 8300 Series Microtower
Elite 8300 Series Small Form Factor
Elite 8300 Series Ultra-Slim Desktop
© Copyright 2012 Hewlett-Packard
Development Company, L.P. The
information contained herein is subject to
change without notice.
Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Vista are
either trademarks or registered trademarks
of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
The only warranties for HP products and
services are set forth in the express
warranty statements accompanying such
products and services. Nothing herein
should be construed as constituting an
additional warranty. HP shall not be liable
for technical or editorial errors or omissions
contained herein.
This document contains proprietary
information that is protected by copyright.
No part of this document may be
photocopied, reproduced, or translated to
another language without the prior written
consent of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Second Edition (December 2012)
First Edition (May 2012)
Document Part Number: 690355-002
About This Book
WARNING! Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in bodily
harm or loss of life.
CAUTION: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in
damage to equipment or loss of information.
NOTE:
Text set off in this manner provides important supplemental information.
iii
iv
About This Book
Table of contents
1 Product Features ............................................................................................................................................ 1
Standard Configuration Features ......................................................................................................... 1
Convertible Minitower (CMT) Front Panel Components ....................................................................... 3
Microtower (MT) Front Panel Components .......................................................................................... 4
Small Form Factor (SFF) Front Panel Components ............................................................................. 5
Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Front Panel Components ......................................................................... 6
Convertible Minitower (CMT) Rear Panel Components ....................................................................... 7
Microtower (MT) Rear Panel Components ........................................................................................... 8
Small Form Factor (SFF) Rear Panel Components ............................................................................. 9
Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Rear Panel Components ........................................................................ 10
Serial Number Location ...................................................................................................................... 11
2 Activating and Customizing the Software .................................................................................................. 13
Activating and customizing the software in Windows 7 ...................................................................... 13
Activating the Windows operating system ......................................................................... 13
Downloading Windows 7 updates ...................................................................................... 14
Installing or upgrading device drivers ................................................................................ 14
Customizing the monitor display ........................................................................................ 14
Activating and customizing the software in Windows 8 ...................................................................... 14
Activating the Windows Operating System ........................................................................ 14
Downloading Windows 8 updates ...................................................................................... 15
Customizing the monitor display ........................................................................................ 15
3 Computer Setup (F10) Utility ....................................................................................................................... 16
Computer Setup (F10) Utilities ........................................................................................................... 16
Using Computer Setup (F10) Utilities ................................................................................ 17
Computer Setup—File ....................................................................................................... 18
Computer Setup—Storage ................................................................................................ 19
Computer Setup—Security ................................................................................................ 22
Computer Setup—Power ................................................................................................... 27
Computer Setup—Advanced ............................................................................................. 28
v
Recovering the Configuration Settings ............................................................................................... 30
4 Illustrated parts catalog ............................................................................................................................... 31
Convertible minitower (CMT) chassis spare parts .............................................................................. 31
Computer system components .......................................................................................... 31
Cables ................................................................................................................................ 33
Misc parts .......................................................................................................................... 34
Drives ................................................................................................................................. 35
Misc boards ....................................................................................................................... 36
Sequential part number listing ........................................................................................... 36
Microtower (MT) chassis spare parts ................................................................................................. 40
Computer major components ............................................................................................ 40
Cables ................................................................................................................................ 42
Misc parts .......................................................................................................................... 43
Drives ................................................................................................................................. 44
Misc boards ....................................................................................................................... 45
Sequential part number listing ........................................................................................... 45
Small Form Factor (SFF) chassis spare parts .................................................................................... 49
Computer major components ............................................................................................ 49
Cables ................................................................................................................................ 51
Misc parts .......................................................................................................................... 52
Drives ................................................................................................................................. 54
Misc boards ....................................................................................................................... 54
Sequential part number listing ........................................................................................... 55
Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) chassis spare parts ................................................................................ 58
Computer major components ............................................................................................ 58
Cables ................................................................................................................................ 59
Misc parts .......................................................................................................................... 60
Drives ................................................................................................................................. 62
Misc boards ....................................................................................................................... 62
Sequential part number listing ........................................................................................... 62
5 Routine Care, SATA Drive Guidelines, and Disassembly Preparation .................................................... 66
Electrostatic Discharge Information .................................................................................................... 66
Generating Static ............................................................................................................... 66
Preventing Electrostatic Damage to Equipment ................................................................ 67
Personal Grounding Methods and Equipment ................................................................... 67
Grounding the Work Area .................................................................................................. 68
Recommended Materials and Equipment .......................................................................... 68
Operating Guidelines .......................................................................................................................... 69
Routine Care ...................................................................................................................................... 69
vi
General Cleaning Safety Precautions ................................................................................ 69
Cleaning the Computer Case ............................................................................................ 69
Cleaning the Keyboard ...................................................................................................... 70
Cleaning the Monitor .......................................................................................................... 70
Cleaning the Mouse ........................................................................................................... 71
Service Considerations ...................................................................................................................... 71
Power Supply Fan ............................................................................................................. 71
Tools and Software Requirements .................................................................................... 71
Screws ............................................................................................................................... 71
Cables and Connectors ..................................................................................................... 72
Hard Drives ........................................................................................................................ 72
Lithium Coin Cell Battery ................................................................................................... 72
SATA Hard Drives .............................................................................................................................. 73
SATA Hard Drive Cables .................................................................................................................... 73
SATA Data Cable .............................................................................................................. 73
SMART ATA Drives ............................................................................................................................ 73
Cable Management ............................................................................................................................ 73
6 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis ..................................... 75
Preparation for Disassembly .............................................................................................................. 75
Access Panel ...................................................................................................................................... 76
Front Bezel ......................................................................................................................................... 77
Front Bezel Security ........................................................................................................................... 78
Bezel Blanks ....................................................................................................................................... 80
System Board Connections ................................................................................................................ 81
Memory .............................................................................................................................................. 82
DIMMs ............................................................................................................................... 82
DDR3-SDRAM DIMMs ...................................................................................................... 82
Populating DIMM Sockets ................................................................................................. 83
Installing DIMMs ................................................................................................................ 84
Expansion Card .................................................................................................................................. 85
Drives ................................................................................................................................................. 89
Drive Positions ................................................................................................................... 90
Removing a Drive from a Drive Bay .................................................................................. 91
Installing Drives ................................................................................................................. 95
Installing a 5.25-inch Drive into a Drive Bay ..................................................... 97
Installing a Hard Drive into an Internal Drive Bay ............................................. 99
Hood Sensor .................................................................................................................................... 104
Front I/O, USB Assembly ................................................................................................................. 105
Power Switch Assembly ................................................................................................................... 107
Speaker ............................................................................................................................................ 108
vii
Rear Chassis Fan ............................................................................................................................. 109
Fan sink ............................................................................................................................................ 110
Processor ......................................................................................................................................... 112
Power Supply ................................................................................................................................... 115
System Board ................................................................................................................................... 116
Changing from a Minitower to a Desktop Configuration ................................................................... 117
Changing from a Desktop to a Minitower Configuration ................................................................... 119
7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Microtower (MT) Chassis ........................................................ 122
Preparation for Disassembly ............................................................................................................ 122
Computer Access Panel ................................................................................................................... 123
Front Bezel ....................................................................................................................................... 124
Front Bezel Security ......................................................................................................................... 125
Bezel Blanks ..................................................................................................................................... 127
Memory ............................................................................................................................................ 128
DIMMs ............................................................................................................................. 128
DDR3-SDRAM DIMMs .................................................................................................... 128
Populating DIMM Sockets ............................................................................................... 128
Installing DIMMs .............................................................................................................. 129
Expansion Cards .............................................................................................................................. 130
System Board Connections .............................................................................................................. 136
Drives ............................................................................................................................................... 138
Drive Positions ................................................................................................................. 140
Removing a 5.25-inch or 3.5-inch Drive from a Drive Bay ............................................... 140
Installing a 5.25-inch or 3.5-inch Drive into a Drive Bay .................................................. 142
Removing a Hard Drive from a Drive Bay ........................................................................ 144
Installing a Hard Drive into an Internal Drive Bay ............................................................ 144
Front Fan Assembly ......................................................................................................................... 147
Front I/O Assembly ........................................................................................................................... 149
Power Switch/LED Assembly ........................................................................................................... 150
Heat sink .......................................................................................................................................... 151
Processor ......................................................................................................................................... 153
Speaker ............................................................................................................................................ 156
Rear Chassis Fan ............................................................................................................................. 157
Power Supply ................................................................................................................................... 159
System Board ................................................................................................................................... 161
8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis .......................................... 163
Preparation for Disassembly ............................................................................................................ 163
Access Panel .................................................................................................................................... 164
Front Bezel ....................................................................................................................................... 165
viii
Front Bezel Security ......................................................................................................................... 166
Bezel Blanks ..................................................................................................................................... 168
Memory ............................................................................................................................................ 169
DIMMs ............................................................................................................................. 169
DDR3-SDRAM DIMMs .................................................................................................... 169
Populating DIMM Sockets ............................................................................................... 169
Installing DIMMs .............................................................................................................. 170
Expansion Card ................................................................................................................................ 172
System Board Connections .............................................................................................................. 177
Drives ............................................................................................................................................... 178
Drive Positions ................................................................................................................. 178
Installing and Removing Drives ....................................................................................... 179
Removing a 5.25-inch Drive from a Drive Bay ................................................ 180
Installing a 5.25-inch Drive into a Drive Bay ................................................... 181
Removing a 3.5-inch Drive from a Drive Bay .................................................. 184
Installing a 3.5-inch Drive into a Drive Bay ..................................................... 185
Removing and Replacing the Primary 3.5-inch Internal Hard Drive ................ 187
Fan duct ........................................................................................................................................... 190
Front Fan Assembly ......................................................................................................................... 191
Hood Sensor .................................................................................................................................... 193
Front I/O, Power Switch Assembly ................................................................................................... 194
Speaker ............................................................................................................................................ 196
Heat sink .......................................................................................................................................... 197
Processor ......................................................................................................................................... 198
Power Supply ................................................................................................................................... 202
System Board ................................................................................................................................... 204
Using the Small Form Factor Computer in a Tower Orientation ...................................................... 206
9 Removal and Replacement Procedures Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis ...................................... 207
Preparation for Disassembly ............................................................................................................ 207
Access Panel .................................................................................................................................... 208
Front Bezel ....................................................................................................................................... 209
Front Bezel Security ......................................................................................................................... 210
Bezel Blank ...................................................................................................................................... 212
System Board Connections .............................................................................................................. 213
Memory ............................................................................................................................................ 214
SODIMMs ........................................................................................................................ 214
DDR3-SDRAM SODIMMs ............................................................................................... 214
Populating SODIMM Sockets .......................................................................................... 215
Installing SODIMMs ......................................................................................................... 216
Front Fan .......................................................................................................................................... 218
ix
Optical Drive ..................................................................................................................................... 219
Removing the Optical Drive ............................................................................................. 219
Preparing the New Optical Drive ..................................................................................... 220
Installing the New Optical Drive ....................................................................................... 221
Hard Drive ........................................................................................................................................ 222
Optical Drive Rail .............................................................................................................................. 227
Card Reader ..................................................................................................................................... 228
Speaker ............................................................................................................................................ 230
Heat sink .......................................................................................................................................... 231
Processor ......................................................................................................................................... 233
WLAN Module .................................................................................................................................. 236
Hood Sensor .................................................................................................................................... 238
Graphics Board ................................................................................................................................ 239
System Board ................................................................................................................................... 241
Rear Fan .......................................................................................................................................... 243
Antennas .......................................................................................................................................... 244
Changing from Desktop to Tower Configuration .............................................................................. 248
Port Cover ........................................................................................................................................ 249
Power Supply, External .................................................................................................................... 250
10 Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics .................................................................................................... 251
Safety and Comfort .......................................................................................................................... 251
Before You Call for Technical Support ............................................................................................. 251
Helpful Hints ..................................................................................................................................... 252
Solving General Problems ................................................................................................................ 254
Solving Power Problems .................................................................................................................. 258
Solving Hard Drive Problems ........................................................................................................... 260
Solving Media Card Reader Problems ............................................................................................. 263
Solving Display Problems ................................................................................................................. 265
Solving Audio Problems ................................................................................................................... 270
Solving Printer Problems .................................................................................................................. 272
Solving Keyboard and Mouse Problems .......................................................................................... 274
Solving Hardware Installation Problems ........................................................................................... 276
Solving Network Problems ............................................................................................................... 278
Solving Memory Problems ............................................................................................................... 281
Solving Processor Problems ............................................................................................................ 283
Solving CD-ROM and DVD Problems .............................................................................................. 283
Solving USB Flash Drive Problems .................................................................................................. 285
Solving Front Panel Component Problems ...................................................................................... 287
Solving Internet Access Problems .................................................................................................... 287
Solving Software Problems .............................................................................................................. 289
x
Contacting Customer Support .......................................................................................................... 291
11 POST Error Messages .............................................................................................................................. 292
POST Numeric Codes and Text Messages ..................................................................................... 293
Interpreting POST Diagnostic Front Panel LEDs and Audible Codes .............................................. 301
12 Password Security and Resetting CMOS ............................................................................................... 305
Resetting the Password Jumper ...................................................................................................... 306
Clearing and Resetting the CMOS ................................................................................................... 307
13 HP PC Hardware Diagnostics .................................................................................................................. 309
Why run HP PC Hardware Diagnostics – UEFI ................................................................................ 309
How to access and run HP PC Hardware Diagnostics - UEFI ......................................................... 309
Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics to a USB device .......................................................... 310
14 Backup and Recovery .............................................................................................................................. 311
Restoring and recovering in Windows 7 ........................................................................................... 311
System Restore ............................................................................................................... 311
System Recovery ............................................................................................................. 311
System Recovery when Windows is responding ............................................ 312
System Recovery when Windows is not responding ...................................... 313
System recovery using recovery media .......................................................... 313
Creating recovery media ................................................................ 314
Using recovery media ..................................................................... 315
Backup and recovery in Windows 8 ................................................................................................. 316
Backing up your information ............................................................................................ 316
Performing a system recovery ......................................................................................... 317
Using the Windows recovery tools .................................................................. 317
Using f11 recovery tools .................................................................................. 318
Using Windows 8 operating system media (purchased separately) ............... 318
Appendix A Battery Replacement ................................................................................................................ 319
Appendix B Removing and Replacing a Removable 3.5-inch SATA Hard Drive ..................................... 322
Appendix C Unlocking the Smart Cover Lock ............................................................................................ 327
Smart Cover FailSafe Key ................................................................................................................ 327
Using the Smart Cover FailSafe Key to Remove the Smart Cover Lock ......................................... 328
xi
Appendix D Power Cord Set Requirements ................................................................................................ 330
General Requirements ..................................................................................................................... 330
Japanese Power Cord Requirements .............................................................................................. 330
Country-Specific Requirements ........................................................................................................ 331
Appendix E Specifications ............................................................................................................................ 332
CMT Specifications .......................................................................................................................... 332
MT Specifications ............................................................................................................................. 333
SFF Specifications ........................................................................................................................... 335
USDT Specifications ........................................................................................................................ 336
Index ................................................................................................................................................................. 337
xii
1
Product Features
Standard Configuration Features
Features may vary depending on the model. For a complete listing of the hardware and software
installed in the computer, run the diagnostic utility (included on some computer models only).
Figure 1-1 Convertible Minitower Configuration
NOTE: The HP Compaq Convertible Minitower computer can be easily converted to a desktop. For
more information, see Changing from a Minitower to a Desktop Configuration on page 117 in this
guide.
Figure 1-2 Microtower Configuration
Standard Configuration Features
1
Figure 1-3 Small Form Factor Configuration
NOTE: The Small Form Factor computer can also be used in a tower orientation. For more
information, see Using the Small Form Factor Computer in a Tower Orientation on page 206 in this
guide.
Figure 1-4 Ultra-Slim Desktop Configuration
2
Chapter 1 Product Features
Convertible Minitower (CMT) Front Panel Components
Drive configuration may vary by model. Some models have a bezel blank covering one or more drive
bays.
Figure 1-5 Front Panel Components
Table 1-1 Front Panel Components
1
5.25-inch Optical Drives
5
Microphone/Headphone Connector
2
5.25-inch Media Card Reader (optional)
6
Power On Light
3
Dual-State Power Button
7
Headphone Connector
4
Hard Drive Activity Light
8
USB (Universal Serial Bus) Ports
NOTE: When a device is plugged into the Microphone/Headphone Connector, a dialog box will pop up asking if
you want to use the connector for a microphone Line-In device or a headphone. You can reconfigure the
connector at any time by double-clicking the Realtek HD Audio Manager icon in the Windows taskbar.
NOTE: The Power On Light is normally green when the power is on. If it is flashing red, there is a problem with
the computer and it is displaying a diagnostic code. Refer to Interpreting POST Diagnostic Front Panel LEDs and
Audible Codes on page 301 to interpret the code.
Convertible Minitower (CMT) Front Panel Components
3
Microtower (MT) Front Panel Components
Drive configuration may vary by model. Some models have a bezel blank covering one or more drive
bays.
Table 1-2 Front Panel Components
1
5.25-inch Optical Drives
5
3.5-inch Media Card Reader (optional)
2
Hard Drive Activity Light
6
Dual-State Power Button
3
Microphone/Headphone Connector
7
Power On Light
4
USB (Universal Serial Bus) 2.0 Ports
8
Headphone Connector
NOTE: When a device is plugged into the Microphone/Headphone Connector, a dialog box will pop up asking if
you want to use the connector for a microphone Line-In device or a headphone. You can reconfigure the
connector at any time by double-clicking the Realtek HD Audio Manager icon in the Windows taskbar.
NOTE: The Power On Light is normally green when the power is on. If it is flashing red, there is a problem with
the computer and it is displaying a diagnostic code. Refer to Interpreting POST Diagnostic Front Panel LEDs and
Audible Codes on page 301 to interpret the code.
4
Chapter 1 Product Features
Small Form Factor (SFF) Front Panel Components
Drive configuration may vary by model. Some models have a bezel blank covering one or more drive
bays.
Figure 1-6 Front Panel Components
Table 1-3 Front Panel Components
1
5.25-inch Optical Drive
5
Microphone/Headphone Connector
2
Dual-State Power Button
6
3.5-inch Media Card Reader (optional)
3
Power On Light
7
Hard Drive Activity Light
4
USB (Universal Serial Bus) Ports
8
Headphone Connector
NOTE: When a device is plugged into the Microphone/Headphone Connector, a dialog box will pop up asking if
you want to use the connector for a microphone Line-In device or a headphone. You can reconfigure the
connector at any time by double-clicking the Realtek HD Audio Manager icon in the Windows taskbar.
NOTE: The Power On Light is normally green when the power is on. If it is flashing red, there is a problem with
the computer and it is displaying a diagnostic code. Refer toInterpreting POST Diagnostic Front Panel LEDs and
Audible Codes on page 301 to interpret the code.
Small Form Factor (SFF) Front Panel Components
5
Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Front Panel Components
Drive configuration may vary by model. Some models have a bezel blank covering the optical drive
bay.
Figure 1-7 Front Panel Components
Table 1-4 Front Panel Components
1
Optical Drive
5
Microphone/Headphone Connector
2
Power On Light
6
USB (Universal Serial Bus) Ports
3
SD Media Card Reader (optional)
7
Hard Drive Activity Light
4
Headphone Connector
8
Dual-State Power Button
NOTE: When a device is plugged into the Microphone/Headphone Connector, a dialog box will pop up asking if
you want to use the connector for a microphone Line-In device or a headphone. You can reconfigure the
connector at any time by double-clicking the Realtek HD Audio Manager icon in the Windows taskbar.
NOTE: The Power On Light is normally green when the power is on. If it is flashing red, there is a problem with
the computer and it is displaying a diagnostic code. Refer to Interpreting POST Diagnostic Front Panel LEDs and
Audible Codes on page 301 to interpret the code.
6
Chapter 1 Product Features
Convertible Minitower (CMT) Rear Panel Components
Figure 1-8 Rear Panel Components
Table 1-5 Rear Panel Components
1
Power Cord Connector
7
Line-Out Connector for powered audio
devices (green)
2
PS/2 Keyboard Connector (purple)
8
Line-In Audio Connector (blue)
3
VGA Monitor Connector
9
PS/2 Mouse Connector (green)
4
DisplayPort Monitor Connector
10
Serial Connector
5
USB 2.0 ports (black)
11
RJ-45 Network Connector
6
USB 3.0 ports (blue)
NOTE: USB 3.0 ports are blue; USB 2.0 ports are black.
An optional second serial port and an optional parallel port are available from HP.
When a device is plugged into the blue Line-In Audio Connector, a dialog box will pop up asking if you want to use
the connector for a line-in device or a microphone. You can reconfigure the connector at any time by doubleclicking the Realtek HD Audio Manager icon in the Windows taskbar.
The monitor connectors on the system board are inactive when a graphics card is installed in the computer.
If a graphics card is installed into one of the system board slots, the connectors on the graphics card and the
system board may be used at the same time. Some settings may need to be changed in Computer Setup to use
both connectors.
Convertible Minitower (CMT) Rear Panel Components
7
Microtower (MT) Rear Panel Components
Figure 1-9 Rear Panel Components
Table 1-6 Rear Panel Components
1
Power Cord Connector
6
Line-Out Connector for powered audio
devices (green)
2
Line-In Audio Connector (blue)
7
PS/2 Keyboard Connector (purple)
3
PS/2 Mouse Connector (green)
8
VGA Monitor Connector
4
Serial Connector
9
DisplayPort Monitor Connector
5
RJ-45 Network Connector
10
USB 3.0 ports (blue)
11
USB 2.0 ports (black)
NOTE: USB 3.0 ports are blue; USB 2.0 ports are black.
An optional second serial port and an optional parallel port are available from HP.
When a device is plugged into the blue Line-In Audio Connector, a dialog box will pop up asking if you want to use
the connector for a line-in device or a microphone. You can reconfigure the connector at any time by doubleclicking the Realtek HD Audio Manager icon in the Windows taskbar.
The monitor connectors on the system board are inactive when a graphics card is installed in the computer.
If a graphics card is installed into one of the motherboard slots, the connectors on the graphics card and the
system board may be used at the same time. Some settings may need to be changed in Computer Setup to use
both connectors.
8
Chapter 1 Product Features
Small Form Factor (SFF) Rear Panel Components
Figure 1-10 Rear Panel Components
1
RJ-45 Network Connector
7
DisplayPort Monitor Connector
2
Serial Connector
8
VGA Monitor Connector
3
PS/2 Mouse Connector (green)
9
PS/2 Keyboard Connector (purple)
4
Power Cord Connector
10
Line-Out Connector for powered audio
devices (green)
5
USB 2.0 ports (black)
11
Line-In Audio Connector (blue)
6
USB 3.0 ports (blue)
NOTE: USB 3.0 ports are blue; USB 2.0 ports are black.
An optional second serial port and an optional parallel port are available from HP.
When a device is plugged into the blue Line-In Audio Connector, a dialog box will pop up asking if you want to use
the connector for a line-in device or a microphone. You can reconfigure the connector at any time by doubleclicking the Realtek HD Audio Manager icon in the Windows taskbar.
The monitor connectors on the system board are inactive when a graphics card is installed in the computer.
If a graphics card is installed into one of the motherboard slots, the connectors on the graphics card and the
system board may be used at the same time. Some settings may need to be changed in Computer Setup to use
both connectors.
Small Form Factor (SFF) Rear Panel Components
9
Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Rear Panel Components
Figure 1-11 Rear Panel Components
Table 1-7 Rear Panel Components
1
Line-Out Connector for powered audio
devices (green)
6
VGA Monitor Connector
2
DisplayPort Monitor Connectors
7
Power Cord Connector
3
USB 3.0 ports (blue)
8
Line-In Audio Connector (blue)
4
USB 2.0 ports (black)
9
RJ-45 Network Connector
5
PS/2 Keyboard Connector (purple)
10
PS/2 Mouse Connector (green)
NOTE: USB 3.0 ports are blue; USB 2.0 ports are black.
If an MXM graphics card is installed, all three monitor ports are active. The integrated graphics operate
DisplayPort2 (top port). The MXM/ATI drivers operate DisplayPort1 (bottom port) and VGA. If the integrated
graphics are disabled in the BIOS settings, DisplayPort2 (top port) will not be active.
If an MXM graphics card is not installed, all three monitor ports are driven by the integrated graphics on the Intel
3rd Generation configurations. On some models, all three monitor ports are active but there are some limitations.
For example, if a DisplayPort to DVI or HDMI adapter is installed, the VGA port will not be active. On other models,
only one DisplayPort can be active. Either DisplayPort will function, but only one can be used.
When a DisplayPort to single-link DVI or DisplayPort to HDMI adapter is installed, the VGA port will not be active.
This is because when one of the above adapters is used, it is not considered a true DisplayPort and will function as
the other type of port. This is not an issue with a DisplayPort to dual-link DVI adapter.
When a device is plugged into the blue Line-In Audio Connector, a dialog box will pop up asking if you want to use
the connector for a line-in device or a microphone. You can reconfigure the connector at any time by doubleclicking the Realtek HD Audio Manager icon in the Windows taskbar.
10
Chapter 1 Product Features
Serial Number Location
Each computer has a unique serial number and a product ID number that are located on the top
cover of the computer. Keep these numbers available for use when contacting customer service for
assistance.
Figure 1-12 Convertible Minitower Serial Number and Product ID Location
Figure 1-13 Microtower Serial Number and Product ID Location
Serial Number Location
11
Figure 1-14 Small Form Factor Serial Number and Product ID Location
Figure 1-15 Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Serial Number and Product ID Location
12
Chapter 1 Product Features
2
Activating and Customizing the
Software
NOTE:
This chapter provides information for both Windows 7 and Windows 8.
Activating and customizing the software in Windows 7
If your computer was not shipped with a Windows® operating system, some portions of this
documentation do not apply. Additional information is available in online help after you activate the
operating system.
CAUTION: Do not add optional hardware or third-party devices to the computer until the operating
system is successfully activated. Doing so may cause errors and prevent the operating system from
installing properly.
NOTE: Be sure there is a 10.2 cm (4 inch) clearance at the back of the unit and above the monitor
to permit the required airflow.
Activating the Windows operating system
The first time you turn on the computer, the operating system is set up and activated automatically.
This process takes about 5 to 10 minutes. Carefully read and follow the instructions on the screen to
complete the activation.
We recommend that you register your computer with HP during operating system setup so you can
receive important software updates, facilitate support questions, and sign up for special offers.
CAUTION: After the activation process has begun, DO NOT TURN OFF THE COMPUTER UNTIL
THE PROCESS IS COMPLETE. Turning off the computer during the activation process may damage
the software that runs the computer or prevent its proper installation.
NOTE: If the computer shipped with more than one operating system language on the hard drive,
the activation process could take up to 60 minutes.
Activating and customizing the software in Windows 7
13
Downloading Windows 7 updates
Microsoft may release updates to the operating system. To help keep the computer running optimally,
HP recommends checking for the latest updates during the initial installation and periodically
throughout the life of the computer.
1.
To set up your Internet connection, click Start > Internet Explorer and follow the instructions on
the screen.
2.
After an Internet connection has been established, click the Start > All Programs > Windows
Update.
3.
Run Windows Update monthly thereafter.
Installing or upgrading device drivers
When installing optional hardware devices after the operating system installation is complete, you
must also install the drivers for each of the devices.
In Windows 7, if prompted for the i386 directory, replace the path specification with C:\i386, or use
the Browse button in the dialog box to locate the i386 folder. This action points the operating system
to the appropriate drivers.
Obtain the latest support software, including support software for the operating system, from
http://www.hp.com/support. Select your country and language, select Download drivers and
software (and firmware), enter the model number of the computer, and press Enter.
Customizing the monitor display
If you wish, you can select or change the monitor refresh rates, screen resolution, color settings, font
sizes, and power management settings.
For more information, refer to the online documentation provided with the graphics controller utility or
the documentation that came with your monitor.
Right-click on the Windows desktop, then click Personalize to change display settings.
Activating and customizing the software in Windows 8
Additional information is available in online help after you activate the operating system.
NOTE: Be sure there is a 10.2 cm (4 inch) clearance at the back of the unit and above the monitor
to permit the required airflow.
Activating the Windows Operating System
The first time you turn on the computer, the operating system is set up and activated automatically.
This process takes about 5 to 10 minutes. Carefully read and follow the instructions on the screen to
complete the activation.
We recommend that you register your computer with HP during operating system set up so you can
receive important software updates, facilitate support questions, and sign up for special offers. You
can also register your computer with HP using the Register with HP app on the Start screen.
14
Chapter 2 Activating and Customizing the Software
CAUTION: After the activation process has begun, DO NOT TURN OFF THE COMPUTER UNTIL
THE PROCESS IS COMPLETE. Turning off the computer during the activation process may damage
the software that runs the computer or prevent its proper installation.
Downloading Windows 8 updates
Microsoft may release updates to the operating system. To help keep the computer running optimally,
HP recommends checking for the latest updates during the initial installation and periodically
throughout the life of the computer.
Run Windows Update as soon as possible after you set up your computer.
1.
Point to the upper-right or lower-right corner of the Start screen to display the charms.
2.
Click Settings > Change PC Settings > Windows Update.
3.
Run Windows Update monthly thereafter.
Customizing the monitor display
You can customize display settings for Windows 8 separately for the Start screen and the Desktop.
To customize the Start screen:
1.
Point to the upper-right or lower-right corner of the Start screen to display the charms.
2.
Click Settings > Change PC Settings.
3.
Click Personalize to change the display settings.
To customize the Desktop:
1.
Click the Desktop app on the Start screen.
2.
Right-click on the desktop, and then click Personalize to change display settings.
Activating and customizing the software in Windows 8
15
3
Computer Setup (F10) Utility
Computer Setup (F10) Utilities
Use Computer Setup (F10) Utility to do the following:
16
●
Change factory default settings.
●
Set the system date and time.
●
Set, view, change, or verify the system configuration, including settings for processor, graphics,
memory, audio, storage, communications, and input devices.
●
Modify the boot order of bootable devices such as hard drives, optical drives, or USB flash
media devices.
●
Enable Quick Boot, which is faster than Full Boot but does not run all of the diagnostic tests run
during a Full Boot. You can set the system to:
❑
always Quick Boot (default);
❑
periodically Full Boot (from every 1 to 30 days); or
❑
always Full Boot.
●
Select Post Messages Enabled or Disabled to change the display status of Power-On Self-Test
(POST) messages. Post Messages Disabled suppresses most POST messages, such as
memory count, product name, and other non-error text messages. If a POST error occurs, the
error is displayed regardless of the mode selected. To manually switch to Post Messages
Enabled during POST, press any key (except F1 through F12).
●
Establish an Ownership Tag, the text of which is displayed each time the system is turned on or
restarted.
●
Enter the Asset Tag or property identification number assigned by the company to this computer.
●
Enable the power-on password prompt during system restarts (warm boots) as well as during
power-on.
●
Establish a setup password that controls access to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility and the
settings described in this section.
●
Secure integrated I/O functionality, including the serial, USB, or parallel ports, audio, or
embedded NIC, so that they cannot be used until they are unsecured.
●
Enable or disable removable media boot ability.
Chapter 3 Computer Setup (F10) Utility
●
Solve system configuration errors detected but not automatically fixed during the Power-On SelfTest (POST).
●
Replicate the system setup by saving system configuration information on a USB device and
restoring it on one or more computers.
●
Execute self-tests on a specified ATA hard drive (when supported by drive).
●
Enable or disable DriveLock security (when supported by drive).
Using Computer Setup (F10) Utilities
Computer Setup can be accessed only by turning the computer on or restarting the system.
To access the Computer Setup Utilities menu, complete the following steps:
1.
Turn on or restart the computer.
2.
Repeatedly press F10 when the monitor light turns green to access the utility.
You can also press Esc to a menu that allows you to access different options available at
startup, including the Computer Setup utility.
NOTE: If you do not press F10 at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and
again repeatedly press F10 when the monitor light turns green to access the utility.
3.
A choice of five headings appears in the Computer Setup Utilities menu: File, Storage, Security,
Power, and Advanced.
4.
Use the arrow (left and right) keys to select the appropriate heading. Use the arrow (up and
down) keys to select the option you want, then press Enter. To return to the Computer Setup
Utilities menu, press Esc.
5.
To apply and save changes, select File > Save Changes and Exit.
●
If you have made changes that you do not want applied, select Ignore Changes and Exit.
●
To reset to factory settings or previously saved default settings (some models), select
Apply Defaults and Exit. This option will restore the original factory system defaults.
NOTE: Not all settings shown in the following sections are available for all models
CAUTION: Do NOT turn the computer power OFF while the BIOS is saving the Computer Setup
(F10) changes because the CMOS could become corrupted. It is safe to turn off the computer only
after exiting the F10 Setup screen.
Table 3-1 Computer Setup (F10) Utility
Heading
Table
File
Computer Setup—File on page 18
Storage
Computer Setup—Storage on page 19
Security
Computer Setup—Security on page 22
Power
Computer Setup—Power on page 27
Advanced
Computer Setup—Advanced on page 28
Computer Setup (F10) Utilities
17
Computer Setup—File
NOTE: Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware
configuration.
Table 3-2 Computer Setup—File
Option
Description
System Information
Lists:
●
Product name
●
SKU number
●
Processor type/speed/stepping
●
Cache size (L1/L2/L3) (dual core processors have this listed twice)
●
Installed memory size/speed, number of channels (single or dual) (if applicable)
●
Integrated MAC address for embedded, enabled NIC (if applicable)
●
System BIOS (includes family name and version)
●
Chassis serial number
●
Asset tracking number
●
ME firmware version
●
ME Management mode
About
Displays copyright notice.
Set Time and Date
Allows you to set system time and date.
Flash System ROM
Allows you to update the system ROM with a BIOS image file located on removable media.
Replicated Setup
Save to Removable Media
Saves system configuration to a formatted USB flash media device.
Restore from Removable Media
Restores system configuration from a USB flash media device.
Default Setup
Save Current Settings as Default
Saves the current system configuration settings as the default.
Restore Factory Settings as Default
Restores the factory system configuration settings as the default.
18
Apply Defaults and
Exit
Applies the currently selected default settings and clears any established passwords.
Ignore Changes
and Exit
Exits Computer Setup without applying or saving any changes.
Save Changes and
Exit
Saves changes to system configuration or default settings and exits Computer Setup.
Chapter 3 Computer Setup (F10) Utility
Computer Setup—Storage
NOTE: Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware
configuration.
Table 3-3 Computer Setup—Storage
Option
Description
Device Configuration
Lists all installed BIOS-controlled storage devices.
When a device is selected, detailed information and options are displayed. The following options
may be presented:
●
Hard Disk: Size, model, firmware version, serial number, connector color.
Translation mode (ATA disks only)
Lets you select the translation mode to be used for the device. This enables the BIOS to
access disks partitioned and formatted on other systems and may be necessary for users of
older versions of UNIX (e.g., SCO UNIX version 3.2). Options are Automatic, Bit-Shift,
LBA Assisted, User, and Off.
Available only when the drive translation mode is set to User, allows you to specify the
parameters (logical cylinders, heads, and sectors per track) used by the BIOS to translate
disk I/O requests (from the operating system or an application) into terms the hard drive can
accept. Logical cylinders may not exceed 1024. The number of heads may not exceed 256.
The number of sectors per track may not exceed 63.
CAUTION: Ordinarily, the translation mode selected automatically by the BIOS should not
be changed. If the selected translation mode is not compatible with the translation mode that
was active when the disk was partitioned and formatted, the data on the disk will be
inaccessible.
●
CD-ROM: Model, firmware version, serial number, connector color (not included for USB CDROM).
●
SSD Life Used
NOTE: Displays for solid-state drives.
●
SMART (ATA disks only)
●
Diskette: Model and firmware version.
NOTE: Displays for USB diskette drives.
●
Default Values (ATA disks only)
See Translation Mode above for details.
SATA Defaults
Computer Setup (F10) Utilities
19
Table 3-3 Computer Setup—Storage (continued)
Storage Options
eSATA Port
Allows you to set a SATA port as an eSATA port for use with an external drive. Default is enabled.
This setting affects only the port with the black connector, labeled as eSATA on the system board.
This port should have the eSATA back panel connector attached to use eSATA drives. For more
information, see the eSATA white paper at www.hp.com.
SATA Emulation
Allows you to choose how the SATA controller and devices are accessed by the operating
system. There are three supported options: IDE, RAID, and AHCI (default).
CAUTION: SATA emulation changes may prevent access to existing hard drive data and
degrade or corrupt established volumes.
IDE - This is the most backwards-compatible setting of the three options. Operating systems
usually do not require additional driver support in IDE mode.
RAID - Allows DOS and boot access to RAID volumes. Use this mode with the RAID device driver
loaded in the operating system to take advantage of RAID features.
AHCI (default option) - Allows operating systems with AHCI device drivers loaded to take
advantage of more advanced features of the SATA controller.
NOTE: The RAID/AHCI device driver must be installed prior to attempting to boot from a RAID/
AHCI volume. If you attempt to boot from a RAID/AHCI volume without the required device driver
installed, the system will crash (blue screen). RAID volumes may become corrupted if they are
booted to after disabling RAID.
Removable Media Boot
Enables/disables ability to boot the system from removable media. Default is enabled.
Max eSATA Speed
Allows you to choose 1.5 Gbps or 3.0 Gpbs as the maximum eSATA speed. By default, the speed
is limited to 1.5 Gbps for maximum reliability.
CAUTION: Consult your eSATA drive and cable manufacturer before enabling 3.0 Gpbs speed.
Some drive and cable combinations may not run reliably at 3.0 Gpbs.
20
Chapter 3 Computer Setup (F10) Utility
Table 3-3 Computer Setup—Storage (continued)
DPS Self-Test
Allows you to execute self-tests on ATA hard drives capable of performing the Drive Protection
System (DPS) self-tests.
NOTE: This selection will only appear when at least one drive capable of performing the DPS
self-tests is attached to the system.
Boot Order
Allows you to:
●
EFI Boot Sources: Specify the order in which EFI boot sources (such as a internal hard
drive, USB hard drive, USB optical drive, or internal optical drive) are checked for a bootable
operating system image. Each device on the list may be individually excluded from or
included for consideration as a bootable operating system source.
EFI boot sources always have precedence over legacy boot sources.
●
Legacy Boot Sources: Specify the order in which legacy boot sources (such as a network
interface card, internal hard drive, USB optical drive, or internal optical drive) are checked for
a bootable operating system image. Each device on the list may be individually excluded
from or included for consideration as a bootable operating system source.
Specify the order of attached hard drives. The first hard drive in the order will have priority in
the boot sequence and will be recognized as drive C (if any devices are attached).
NOTE: To drag a device to a preferred place, press Enter. To remove the device from
consideration as a bootable device, press F5.
You can use F5 to disable individual boot items, as well as disable EFI boot and/or legacy boot.
NOTE: MS-DOS drive lettering assignments may not apply after a non-MS-DOS operating
system has started.
Shortcut to Temporarily Override Boot Order
To boot one time from a device other than the default device specified in Boot Order, restart the
computer and press Esc (to access the boot menu) and then F9 (Boot Order), or only F9 (skipping
the boot menu) when the monitor light turns green. After POST is completed, a list of bootable
devices is displayed. Use the arrow keys to select the preferred bootable device and press Enter.
The computer then boots from the selected non-default device for this one time.
Computer Setup (F10) Utilities
21
Computer Setup—Security
NOTE: Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware
configuration.
Table 3-4 Computer Setup—Security
Option
Description
Setup Password
Allows you to set and enable a setup (administrator) password.
NOTE: If the setup password is set, it is required to change Computer Setup options, flash the
ROM, and make changes to certain plug and play settings under Windows.
Power-On Password
Allows you to set and enable a power-on password. The power-on password prompt appears
after a power cycle or reboot. If the user does not enter the correct power-on password, the unit
will not boot.
Password Options
Allows you to enable/disable:
(This selection appears
only if a power-on
password or setup
password is set.)
●
Lock Legacy Resources (determines whether or not Windows Device Manager is allowed to
change resource settings for serial and parallel ports).
●
Stringent security (enabling the stringent password disables the ability to reset the password
by moving the jumper on the system board). Default is disabled.
CAUTION: If you enable the stringent security feature and you forget the setup password
or the power-on password, the computer is inaccessible and can no longer be used.
If you lose or forget the password, the system board must be replaced. This scenario is not
covered under warranty.
To prevent the computer from becoming permanently unusable, record your configured
setup password or power-on password in a safe place away from your computer. Without
these passwords, the computer cannot be unlocked.
Smart Cover
●
Setup Browse Mode (appears if a setup password is set) (allows viewing, but not changing,
the F10 Setup Options without entering setup password). Default is enabled.
●
Password prompt on F9 & F12 (requires setup password to use these boot functions).
Default is enabled.
●
Network Server Mode. Default is disabled.
Allows you to:
●
Lock/unlock the Cover Lock.
●
Set the Cover Removal Sensor to Disable/Notify User/Setup Password.
NOTE: Notify User alerts the user that the sensor has detected that the cover has been
removed. Setup Password requires that the setup password be entered to boot the computer if
the sensor detects that the cover has been removed.
22
Chapter 3 Computer Setup (F10) Utility
Table 3-4 Computer Setup—Security (continued)
Device Security
Allows you to set Device Available/Device Hidden (default is Device Available) for:
●
Embedded security device
●
System audio
●
USB controller (varies by model)
●
Network controller
NOTE: You must disable AMT before trying to hide the network controller.
USB Security
●
Serial port
●
Parallel port
●
SATA ports (varies by model)
Allows you to set Enabled/Disabled (default is Enabled) for:
●
Front USB Ports
●
Rear USB Ports
●
Accessory USB Ports
Slot Security
Allows you to disable any PCI or PCI Express slot. Default is enabled.
Network Boot
Enables/disables the computer’s ability to boot from an operating system installed on a network
server. (Feature available on NIC models only; the network controller must be either a PCI
expansion card or embedded on the system board.) Default is enabled.
System IDs
Allows you to set:
●
Asset tag (18-byte identifier), a property identification number assigned by the company to
the computer.
●
Ownership tag (80-byte identifier) displayed during POST.
●
Universal Unique Identifier (UUID) number. The UUID can only be updated if the current
chassis serial number is invalid. (These ID numbers are normally set in the factory and are
used to uniquely identify the system.)
●
Keyboard locale setting for System ID entry.
Computer Setup (F10) Utilities
23
Table 3-4 Computer Setup—Security (continued)
Master Boot Record
Security
Enables/disables Master Boot Record (MBR) security.
The MBR contains information needed to successfully boot from a disk and to access the data
stored on the disk. Master Boot Record Security may prevent unintentional or malicious changes
to the MBR, such as those caused by some viruses or by the incorrect use of certain disk utilities.
It also allows you to recover the "last known good" MBR, should changes to the MBR be detected
when the system is restarted.
When MBR Security is enabled, the BIOS prevents any changes being made to the MBR of the
current bootable disk while in MS-DOS or Windows Safe Mode.
NOTE: Most operating systems control access to the MBR of the current bootable disk; the
BIOS cannot prevent changes that may occur while the operating system is running.
Restores the backup Master Boot Record to the current bootable disk. Default is disabled.
Only appears if all of the following conditions are true:
●
MBR security is enabled
●
A backup copy of the MBR has been previously saved
●
The current bootable disk is the same disk from which the backup copy was saved
CAUTION: Restoring a previously saved MBR after a disk utility or operating system has
modified the MBR, may cause the data on the disk to become inaccessible. Only restore a
previously saved MBR if you are confident that the current bootable disk's MBR has been
corrupted or infected with a virus.
24
Chapter 3 Computer Setup (F10) Utility
Table 3-4 Computer Setup—Security (continued)
System Security
(these options are
hardware dependent)
Data Execution Prevention (enable/disable) - Helps prevent operating system security breaches.
Default is enabled.
SVM CPU Virtualization (enable/disable). Controls the virtualization features of the processor.
Changing this setting requires turning the computer off and then back on. Default is disabled.
Virtualization Technology (VTx) (enable/disable) - Controls the virtualization features of the
processor. Changing this setting requires turning the computer off and then back on. Default is
disabled.
Virtualization Technology Directed I/O (VTd) (enable/disable) - Controls virtualization DMA
remapping features of the chipset. Changing this setting requires turning the computer off and
then back on. Default is disabled.
Trusted Execution Technology (enable/disable) - Controls the underlying processor and chipset
features needed to support a virtual appliance. Changing this setting requires turning the
computer off and then back on. Default is disabled. To enable this feature you must enable the
following features:
●
Embedded Security Device Support
●
Virtualization Technology
●
Virtualization Technology Directed I/O
Embedded Security Device (enable/disable) - Permits activation and deactivation of the
Embedded Security Device.
NOTE: To configure the Embedded Security Device, a Setup password must be set.
●
Reset to Factory Settings (Do not reset/Reset) - Resetting to factory defaults will erase all
security keys and leave the device in a disabled state. Changing this setting requires that
you restart the computer. Default is Do not reset.
CAUTION: The embedded security device is a critical component of many security
schemes. Erasing the security keys will prevent access to data protected by the Embedded
Security Device. Choosing Reset to Factory Settings may result in significant data loss.
●
System Security
(continued)
Measure boot variables/devices to PCR1 - Typically, the computer measures the boot path
and saves collected metrics to PCR5 (a register in the Embedded Security Device). Bitlocker
tracks changes to any of these metrics, and forces the user to re-authenticate if it detects
any changes. Enabling this feature lets you set Bitlocker to ignore detected changes to boot
path metrics, thereby avoiding re-authentication issues associated with USB keys inserted in
a port. Default is enabled.
OS management of Embedded Security Device (enable/disable) - This option allows the user to
limit OS control of the Embedded Security Device. Default is enabled. This option is automatically
disabled if Trusted Execution Technology is enabled.
●
Reset of Embedded Security Device through OS (enable/disable) - This option allows the
user to limit the operating system ability to request a Reset to Factory Settings of the
Embedded Security Device. Default is disabled.
NOTE: To enable this option, a Setup password must be set.
●
No PPI provisioning (Windows 8 only) - This option lets you set Windows 8 to bypass the PPI
(Physical Presence Interface) requirement and directly enable and take ownership of the
TPM on first boot. You cannot change this setting after TPM is owned/initialized, unless the
TPM is reset. Default is disabled for non-Windows 8 systems, and enabled for Windows 8.
●
Allow PPI policy to be changed by OS. Enabling this option allows the operating system to
execute TPM operations without Physical Presence Interface. Default is disabled.
NOTE: To enable this option, a Setup password must be set.
Computer Setup (F10) Utilities
25
Table 3-4 Computer Setup—Security (continued)
DriveLock Security
Allows you to assign or modify a master or user password for hard drives. When this feature is
enabled, the user is prompted to provide one of the DriveLock passwords during POST. If neither
is successfully entered, the hard drive will remain inaccessible until one of the passwords is
successfully provided during a subsequent cold-boot sequence.
NOTE: This selection will only appear when at least one drive that supports the DriveLock
feature is attached to the system.
Secure Boot
Configuration
This is a feature of Windows 8.
●
Legacy Support—Enable/Disable. Allows you to turn off all legacy support on the computer,
including booting to DOS, running legacy graphics cards, booting to legacy devices, and so
on. If set to disable, legacy boot options in Storage > Boot Order are not displayed. Default
is enabled.
●
Secure Boot—Enable/Disable. Allows you to make sure an operating system is legitimate
before booting to it, making Windows resistant to malicious modification from preboot to full
OS booting, preventing firmware attacks. UEFI and Windows Secure Boot only allow code
signed by pre-approved digital certificates to run during the firmware and OS boot process.
Default is disabled, except for Windows 8 systems which have this setting enabled. Secure
Boot enabled also sets Legacy Support to disabled.
●
Key Management—This option lets you manage the custom key settings.
●
◦
Clear Secure Boot Keys—Don't Clear/Clear. Allows you to delete any previously loaded
custom boot keys. Default is Don't Clear.
◦
Key Ownership—HP Keys/Custom Keys. Selecting Custom Mode allows you to modify
the contents of the secure boot signature databases and the platform key (PK) that
verifies kernels during system start up, allowing you to use alternative operating
systems. Selecting HP Keys causes the computer boot using the preloaded HP-specific
boot keys. Default is HP Keys.
Fast Boot—Enable/Disable. Fast boot disables the ability to interrupt boot, such as pressing f
keys to access items before the operating system loads. Default is disabled.
NOTE: If Windows 8 detects a serious error, it will interrupt the boot process automatically
and display advanced boot options.
From Windows 8, you can press Shift and select Restart to access the screen that lets you
boot to a device or troubleshoot your computer.
26
Chapter 3 Computer Setup (F10) Utility
Computer Setup—Power
NOTE: Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware
configuration.
Table 3-5 Computer Setup—Power
Option
Description
OS Power
Management
●
Idle Power Savings—Extended/Normal. Allows certain operating systems to decrease the
processors power consumption when the processor is idle. Default is extended.
●
Runtime Power Management— Enable/Disable. Allows certain operating systems to reduce
processor voltage and frequency when the current software load does not require the full
capabilities of the processor. Default is enabled.
●
Unique Sleep State Blink Rates—Enable/Disable. This feature is designed to provide a
visual indication of what sleep state the system is in. Each sleep state has a unique blink
pattern. Default is disabled.
NOTE: For Windows 8 systems with Fast Boot support, a normal shutdown goes to the S4
state, not the S5 state.
Hardware Power
Management
◦
S0 (On) = Solid green LED.
◦
S3 (Stand By)= 3 blinks at 1Hz (50% duty cycle) followed by a pause of 2 seconds
(green LED) — repeated cycles of 3 blinks and a pause.
◦
S4 (Hibernation)= 4 blinks at 1Hz (50% duty cycle) followed by a pause of 2 seconds
(green LED) — repeated cycles of 4 blinks and a pause.
◦
S5 (Soft Off) = LED is off.
SATA Power Management – Enables or disables SATA bus and/or device power management.
Default is enabled.
S5 Maximum Power Savings – Turns off power to all nonessential hardware when system is off to
meet EUP Lot 6 requirement of less than 0.5 Watt power usage. Default is disabled.
PCI Express x16 Slot 1 – Sets Active State Power Management (ASPM) of the bus. ASPM lets
you set lower power modes that activate when the bus is not being used. Options are Disabled,
LOs, L1, LOs and L1. Default is ASPM Disabled.
PCI Express x1 Slot 1 – Sets Active State Power Management (ASPM) of the bus. ASPM lets you
set lower power modes that activate when the bus is not being used. Options are Disabled, LOs,
L1, LOs and L1. Default is ASPM Disabled.
Network Controller – Sets ASPM of the bus. ASPM lets you set lower power modes that activate
when the bus is not being used. Options are Disabled, LOs, L1, LOs and L1. Default is ASPM
Disabled.
USB 3.0 Controller – Sets ASPM of the bus. ASPM lets you set lower power modes that activate
when the bus is not being used. Options are Disabled, LOs, L1, LOs and L1. Default is ASPM
Disabled.
Thermal
Fan idle mode—This bar graph controls the minimum permitted fan speed.
NOTE: This setting only changes the minimum fan speed. The fans are still automatically
controlled.
Computer Setup (F10) Utilities
27
Computer Setup—Advanced
NOTE: Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware
configuration.
Table 3-6 Computer Setup—Advanced (for advanced users)
Option
Heading
Power-On Options
Allows you to set:
●
POST mode (QuickBoot, Clear Memory, FullBoot, or FullBoot Every x Days).
◦
QuickBoot (default) = Do not clear memory or perform a memory test.
◦
FullBoot = Memory test (count) on cold boot. Clears memory on all boots.
◦
Clear Memory = No memory count on cold boot. Clears memory on all boots.
◦
FullBoot Every x Days = Memory count on 1st cold boot on or after the xth day. No
more memory counts until 1st cold boot on or after x days. Clears memory on all boots.
●
POST messages (enable/disable). Enabling this feature will cause the system to display
POST error messages, which are error messages displayed on the monitor during the Power
On Self Test if the BIOS encounters some kind of problem while starting the PC. A POST
error message will only display on screen if the computer is capable of booting this far. If the
POST detects an error before this point, a beep code is generated instead. Default is
disabled.
●
Press the ESC key for Startup Menu (Enable/Disable). This feature controls the display of
the text “Press the ESC key for Startup Menu” during POST. This text does not display on
Windows 8 systems with Fast Boot support. Other text also will not display (for example,
Ownership Tag). Default is enabled.
●
Option ROM Prompt (enable/disable). Enabling this feature will cause the system to display
a message before loading option ROMs. Default is enabled.
●
After Power Loss (off/on/previous state). Default is Power off. Setting this option to:
◦
Power off—causes the computer to remain powered off when power is restored.
◦
Power on—causes the computer to power on automatically as soon as power is
restored.
◦
Previous state—causes the computer to power on automatically as soon as power is
restored, if it was on when power was lost.
NOTE: If you turn off power to the computer using the switch on a power strip, you will not be
able to use the suspend/sleep feature or the Remote Management features.
28
●
POST Delay (in seconds). Enabling this feature will add a user-specified delay to the POST
process. This delay is sometimes needed for hard disks on some PCI cards that spin up very
slowly, so slowly that they are not ready to boot by the time POST is finished. The POST
delay also gives you more time to select F10 to enter Computer (F10) Setup. Default is
None.
●
Remote Wakeup Boot Source (remote server/local hard drive). Default is Local hard drive.
●
Factory Recovery Boot Support (Enable/Disable). Provides the ability for the BIOS to redirect
the boot to the recovery partition on the user hard drive, if present. Some versions of the
recovery software honor the F11 key press even when this feature is disabled by the BIOS.
Default is disabled.
●
Bypass F1 Prompt on Configuration Changes (Enable/Disable). Allows you to set the
computer not to confirm when changes were made. Default is disabled.
Chapter 3 Computer Setup (F10) Utility
Table 3-6 Computer Setup—Advanced (for advanced users) (continued)
BIOS Power-On
Allows you to set the computer to turn on automatically at a time you specify.
Onboard Devices
Allows you to set resources for or disable Legacy devices.
Select the Legacy device's IRQ, DMA, and I/O Range. The settings may not take effect for all
operating systems. To hide a device from the operating system, see Security > Device Security.
Bus Options
Device Options
Allows you to enable or disable:
●
PCI SERR# Generation. Default is enabled.
●
PCI VGA Palette Snooping, which sets the VGA palette snooping bit in PCI configuration
space; only needed when more than one graphics controller is installed. Default is disabled.
Allows you to set:
●
Printer mode (Bi-Directional, EPP + ECP, Output Only). ECP = Enhanced Capabilities Port,
EPP = Enhanced Parallel Port. Default is EPP+ECP.
●
Num Lock State at Power-On (off/on). Default is off.
●
Integrated Video (enable/disable). Use this option to disable the integrated video controller
when another video controller is present in the system. Default is enabled.
●
Integrated Graphics (Auto/Disable/Force) Use this option to manage integrated (UMA)
graphics memory allocation. The value you choose is allocated permanently to graphics and
is unavailable to the operating system. For example, if you set this value to 512M on a
system with 2 GB of RAM, the system always allocates 512 MB for graphics and the other
1.5 GB for use by the BIOS and operating system. Default is Auto which sets memory
allocation to 512 MB.
If you select Force, the UMA Frame Buffer Size option displays, which lets you set the UMA
memory size allocation between 32 MB and 1 GB.
●
Internal Speaker (does not affect external speakers). Default is enabled.
●
NIC PXE Option ROM Download (PXE, iSCSI, disabled). The BIOS contains an embedded
NIC option ROM to allow the unit to boot through the network to a PXE server. This is
typically used to download a corporate image to a hard drive. The NIC option ROM takes up
memory space below 1MB commonly referred to as DOS Compatibility Hole (DCH) space.
This space is limited. This F10 option will allow users to disable the downloading of this
embedded NIC option ROM thus giving more DCH space for additional PCI cards which may
need option ROM space. The default will be to have the NIC option-ROM-enabled. Default is
PXE.
●
SATA RAID Option ROM Download (enable/disable). The BIOS contains an embedded
SATA RAID option ROM for RAID support. This can be temporarily disabled to save DCH
space. Note that with the option ROM disabled, users will be unable to boot to hard drives in
the system while running in RAID mode. Default is disabled.
●
Multi-Processor (enable/disable). Use this option to disable multi-processor support under
the OS. Default is enabled.
●
Hyper threading (enable/disable). Use this option to disable processor hyper-threading.
●
Turbo Mode (enable/disable). Allows you to enable and disable the Intel Turbo Mode feature,
which allows one core of the system to run at a higher than standard frequency and power if
other cores are idle. Default is enabled.
Computer Setup (F10) Utilities
29
Table 3-6 Computer Setup—Advanced (for advanced users) (continued)
VGA Configuration
Displayed only if there is an add-in video card in the system. Allows you to specify which VGA
controller will be the “boot” or primary VGA controller.
AMT Configuration
Allows you to set:
●
AMT (enable/disable). Allows you to enable or disable functions of the embedded
Management Engine (ME) such as Active Management Technology (AMT). If set to disable,
the Management Engine is set to a temporarily disabled state and will not provide functions
beyond necessary system configuration. Default is enabled.
●
Unconfigure AMT/ME (enable/disable). Allows you to unconfigure any provisioned
management settings for AMT. The AMT settings are restored to factory defaults. This
feature should be used with caution as AMT will not be able to provide any set AMT
management functions once unconfigured. Default is disabled.
●
Hide Unconfigure ME Confirmation Prompt (enable/disable). Allows you to set the system to
not display the confirmation to unconfigure ME.
●
Watchdog Timer (enable/disable). Allows you to set amount of time for a operating system
and BIOS watchdog alert to be sent if the timers are not deactivated. BIOS watchdog is
deactivated by BIOS and would indicate that a halt occurred during execution if the alert is
sent to the management console. An operating system alert is deactivated by the operating
system image and would indicate that a hang occurred during its initialization. Default is
enabled.
Recovering the Configuration Settings
This method of recovery requires that you first perform the Save to Removable Media command
with the Computer Setup (F10) Utility before Restore is needed. (See Computer Setup—File
on page 18 in the Computer Setup—File table.)
NOTE: It is recommended that you save any modified computer configuration settings to a USB
flash media device and save the device for possible future use.
To restore the configuration, insert the USB flash media device with the saved configuration and
perform the Restore from Removable Media command with the Computer Setup (F10) Utility. (See
Computer Setup—File on page 18 in the Computer Setup—File table.)
30
Chapter 3 Computer Setup (F10) Utility
4
Illustrated parts catalog
This chapter provides spare part information for all chassis.
Convertible minitower (CMT) chassis spare parts
Computer system components
Convertible minitower (CMT) chassis spare parts
31
Item
Description
Spare part number
(1)
Access panel
646819-001
(2)
Front bezel
(3)
(4)
For use in 8300 models
689380-001
For use in 8380 models
689381-001
Bezel blank (5.25-inch, optical drive; not illustrated)
570838-001
Bezel blank (3.5-inch; not illustrated)
583653-001
Power supply
320W, 90% efficient
613764-001
320W, standard
613765-001
System board (includes replacement thermal material)
For use in models without Windows 8
657096-001
For use in models with Windows 8 Standard
657096-501
For use in models with Windows 8 Professional
657096-601
Memory modules (PC3-12800, 1666-MHz; not illustrated)
8-GB
689375-001
4-GB
671613-001
2-GB
671612-001
Processors (include replacement thermal material; not illustrated)
32
Intel Core i7 3770 (3.4-GHz, 8-MB L3 cache)
688164-001
Intel Core i5 3570 (3.4-GHz, 6-MB L3 cache)
688162-001
Intel Core i5 3470 (3.2-GHz, 6-MB L3 cache)
687943-001
Intel Core i3 2130 (3.4-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
665120-001
Intel Core i3 2120 (3.3-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
638629-001
Intel Pentium G870 (3.1-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
691936-001
Intel Pentium G860 (3.0-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
665123-001
Intel Pentium G640 (2.8-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
691935-001
Chapter 4 Illustrated parts catalog
Cables
Item
Description
Spare part number
(1)
Power switch/LED assembly
646820-001
(2)
SATA optical drive power cable
646832-001
(3)
Front I/O assembly
646821-001
(4)
SATA hard drive power cable
646831-001
SATA cable, 18 inch, 1 straight end, 1 angled end (not illustrated)
639958-001
SATA cable, 17.7 inch, 2 straight ends (not illustrated)
639959-001
DMS-59 to dual VGA cable
463023-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to VGA
603250-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to DVI
484156-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to HDMI
617450-001
DisplayPort cable
487562-001
Convertible minitower (CMT) chassis spare parts
33
Misc parts
Item
Description
Spare part number
(1)
Fan sink (includes replacement thermal material)
643907-001
(2)
Chassis fan, (92 mm x 92 mm)
643908-001
(3)
Printer port
638817-001
(4)
Solenoid lock
641498-001
(5)
Hood sensor
638816-001
(6)
Speaker
645330-001
(7)
Clamp lock, includes universal cable (plate not included; not illustrated)
508987-001
Serial port, PCI card (not illustrated)
638815-001
2.5-in drive adapter (not illustrated)
586721-001
Grommet, hard drive isolation, blue (not illustrated)
594220-001
Card reader, 22-in-1 (not illustrated)
636166-001
USB powered speakers (not illustrated)
636917-001
Hard drive conversion bracket
397117-001
Mouse (not illustrated)
34
Chapter 4 Illustrated parts catalog
Item
Description
Spare part number
PS2, optical, jack black
537748-001
USB, HP Elite
674318-001
Washable
619580-001
Wireless, HP Elite
674317-001
USB, optical, jack black
537749-001
eSATA port assembly, PCI card (not illustrated)
645558-001
Antenna for use with 538048-001 (not illustrated)
583345-001
HP Business Digital Headset (not illustrated)
642738-001
External USB Webcam (not illustrated)
609252-001
Foot kit
370708-001
Keyboard (not illustrated)
PS/2 (standard)
537745-xx1
PS/2 (Windows 8)
701428-xx1
USB, basic (standard)
537746-xx1
USB, basic (Windows 8)
701424-xx1
USB, silver/black (Windows 8)
701429-xx1
USB, wireless (standard)
674314-xx1
USB, wireless (Windows 8)
701426-xx1
Washable (standard)
613125-xx1
Washable (Windows 8)
700510-xx1
Smart card (standard)
631411-xx4
Smart card (Windows 8)
701427-xx1
USB, hub
631913-xx1
Drives
Description
Spare part number
Hard drive
1-TB, 7200-rpm
636930-001
500-GB, 7200-rpm
636929-001
250-GB, 7200-rpm
636927-001
256-GB Solid-state Drive (SSD), self-encrypting (SED), SATA 6.0
680020-001
180-GB Solid-state Drive (SSD), SATA 6.0
696622-001
160-GB Solid-state Drive (SSD), SATA 3.0
646809-001
Convertible minitower (CMT) chassis spare parts
35
Description
Spare part number
128-GB Solid-state Drive (SSD), SATA 2.0
665961-001
120-GB Solid-state Drive (SSD), SATA 2.0
661841-001
20-GB Solid-state Drive (SSD), SATA
683305-001
Optical drive
Blu-ray BD-RW SuperMulti DL Drive
656792-001
16X SATA DVD±RW drive
660408-001
16X SATA DVD-ROM drive
581599-001
Grommet, hard drive isolation, blue
594220-001
NOTE:
2.5-inch solid-state drives require an adapter for installation.
Misc boards
Description
Spare part number
nVidia Quadro NVS310 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
680653-001
nVidia Quadro NVS300 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
632486-001
AMD Radeon HD7450 PCIe x16 graphics card, 1 GB
682411-001
AMD Radeon HD6350 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
637995-001
AMD FirePro 2270 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512-MB
637213-001
HP FireWire / IEEE 1394a PCIe x1 Card
637591-001
Intel PRO/1000CT2 NIC, includes bracket
635523-001
HP WLAN 802.11 g/n 1x2 PCIe NIC
538048-001
Sequential part number listing
36
Spare part
number
Description
370708-001
Foot kit
397117-001
Hard drive conversion bracket
463023-001
DMS-59 to dual VGA cable
484156-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to DVI
487562-001
DisplayPort cable
508987-001
Clamp lock, includes universal cable (plate not included)
537745-xx1
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in models without Windows 8
537746-xx1
USB basic keyboard for use in models without Windows 8
Chapter 4 Illustrated parts catalog
Spare part
number
Description
537748-001
Mouse, PS2, optical, jack black
537749-001
Mouse, USB, optical, jack black
538048-001
HP WLAN 802.11 g/n 1x2 PCIe NIC
570838-001
Bezel black, optical drive, 5.25-inch
581599-001
16X SATA DVD-ROM drive
583345-001
Antenna (WLAN)
583653-001
Bezel blank, 3.5-inch
586721-001
Drive adapter, 2.5-inch
594220-001
Grommet, hard drive isolation, blue
603250-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to VGA
609252-001
External USB webcam
613125-xx1
Washable keyboard for use in models without Windows 8
613764-001
320W, 90% efficient
613765-001
320W, standard
617450-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to HDMI
619580-001
Mouse, washable
631411-xx4
Smart card keyboard for use in models without Windows 8
631913-xx1
Keyboard, USB hub for use in models without Windows 8
632486-001
nVidia Quadro NVS300 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
635523-001
Intel PRO/1000CT2 NIC, includes bracket
636166-001
Card reader, 22-in-1
636917-001
USB powered speakers
636927-001
250-GB, 7200-rpm hard drive
636929-001
500-GB, 7200-rpm hard drive
636930-001
1-TB, 7200-rpm hard drive
637213-001
AMD FirePro 2270 512-MB PCIe x16 graphics card
637591-001
HP FireWire / IEEE 1394a PCIe x1 card
637995-001
AMD Radeon HD6350 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
638629-001
Intel Core i3 2120 (3.3-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
638815-001
Serial port PCI card
638816-001
Hood sensor
638817-001
Printer port, PCI card
639958-001
SATA cable, 18 inch, 1 straight end, 1 angled end
641498-001
Solenoid lock
Convertible minitower (CMT) chassis spare parts
37
38
Spare part
number
Description
642738-001
HP Business Digital Headset
643907-001
Fan sink (includes replacement thermal material)
643908-001
Chassis fan
645330-001
Speaker
645558-001
eSATA port assembly, PCI card
646809-001
160-GB Solid-state drive, SATA 3.0
646819-001
Access panel
646820-001
Power switch/LED with holder
646821-001
Front I/O assembly
646831-001
Hard drive power cable
646832-001
SATA optical drive power cable
656792-001
Blu-ray BD-RW SuperMulti DL Drive
657096-001
System board for use in models without Windows 8 (includes replacement thermal material)
657096-501
System board for use in models with Windows 8 Standard
657096-601
System board for use in models with Windows 8 Professional
660408-001
16X SATA DVD±RW drive
661841-001
120-GB Solid-state drive, SATA 2.0
665120-001
Intel Core i3 2130 (3.4-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
665123-001
Intel Pentium G860 (3.0-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
665961-001
128-GB Solid-state drive, SATA 2.0
671612-001
Memory module, 2-GB, PC3 12800, CL11)
671613-001
Memory module, 4-GB, PC3 10600, 1333-MH
674314-xx1
Keyboard, wireless for use in models without Windows 8
674317-001
Mouse, wireless, HP Elite
674318-001
Mouse, USB, HP Elite
680020-001
256-GB Solid-state drive, self-encrypting (SED), SATA 6.0
680653-001
nVidia Quadro NVS310 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
682411-001
AMD Radeon HD7450 PCIe x16 graphics card, 1 GB
683305-001
20-GB Solid-state drive, SATA
687943-001
Intel Core i5 3470 (3.2-GHz, 6-MB L3 cache)
688162-001
Intel Core i5 3570 (3.4-GHz, 6-MB L3 cache)
688164-001
Intel Core i7 3770 (3.4-GHz, 8-MB L3 cache)
689375-001
Memory module, 8-GB, PC3 12800, CL11
689380-001
Front bezel for use in 8300 models
Chapter 4 Illustrated parts catalog
Spare part
number
Description
689381-001
Front bezel for use in 8380 models
691935-001
Intel Pentium G640 (2.8-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
691936-001
Intel Pentium G870 (3.1-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
696622-001
180-GB Solid-state drive (SSD), SATA 6.0
700510-xx1
Keyboard, washable, for use in models with Windows 8
701424-xx1
Keyboard, USB, black, for use in models with Windows 8
701426-xx1
Keyboard, wireless, for use in models with Windows 8
701427-xx1
Keyboard, smart card, for use in models with Windows 8
701428-xx1
Keyboard, PS/2, for use in models with Windows 8
701429-xx1
Keyboard, USB, silver/black, for use in models with Windows 8
Convertible minitower (CMT) chassis spare parts
39
Microtower (MT) chassis spare parts
Computer major components
Item
Description
(1)
Front bezel
For use in all countries and regions except China
689377-001
For use in China
689378-001
Bezel blank (optical drive; not illustrated)
570838-001
Bezel blank (3.5-inch; not illustrated)
583653-001
(2)
Access panel
646825-001
(3)
Power supply
320W, 90% efficient
40
Spare part number
Chapter 4 Illustrated parts catalog
613764-001
Item
(4)
Description
Spare part number
320W, standard
613765-001
System board (includes replacement thermal material)
For use in models without Windows 8
657094-001
For use in models with Windows 8 Standard
657094-501
For use in models with Windows 8 Professional
657094-601
Memory modules (PC3-12800, 1666-MHz; not illustrated)
8-GB
689375-001
4-GB
671613-001
2-GB
671612-001
Processors (include replacement thermal material; not illustrated)
Intel Core i7 3770 (3.4-GHz, 8-MB L3 cache)
688164-001
Intel Core i5 3570 (3.4-GHz, 6-MB L3 cache)
688162-001
Intel Core i5 3470 (3.2-GHz, 6-MB L3 cache)
687943-001
Intel Core i3 2130 (3.4-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
665120-001
Intel Core i3 2120 (3.3-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
638629-001
Intel Pentium G870 (3.1-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
691936-001
Intel Pentium G860 (3.0-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
665123-001
Intel Pentium G640 (2.8-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
691935-001
Microtower (MT) chassis spare parts
41
Cables
42
Item
Description
Spare part number
(1)
Front I/O assembly
646827-001
(2)
SATA optical drive power cable
646834-001
(3)
SATA hard drive power cable
646833-001
(4)
Power switch/LED assembly
646828-001
(5)
SATA cable, 18 inch, 1 straight end, 1 angled end
639958-001
(6)
SATA cable, 17.7 inch, 2 straight ends
639959-001
SATA cable, 18 inch, 1 straight end, 1 angled end (labeled; not illustrated)
646830-001
DMS-59 to dual VGA cable
463023-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to VGA
603250-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to DVI
484156-001
Chapter 4 Illustrated parts catalog
Item
Description
Spare part number
Adapter, DisplayPort to HDMI
617450-001
DisplayPort cable
487562-001
Item
Description
Spare part number
(1)
Heat sink (includes replacement thermal material)
645326-001
(2)
Fan with guard
585884-001
(3)
Hood sensor
638816-001
(4)
Speaker
645330-001
(5)
Solenoid lock
641498-001
(6)
Printer port, PCI card (not illustrated)
638817-001
(7)
Clamp lock, includes universal cable (plate not included; not illustrated)
508987-001
Rear chassis fan
636922-001
Hard drive conversion bracket (not illustrated)
397117-001
Misc parts
Microtower (MT) chassis spare parts
43
Item
Description
Spare part number
Serial port, PCI card (not illustrated)
638815-001
2.5-in drive adapter (not illustrated)
586721-001
Grommet, hard drive isolation, blue (not illustrated)
594220-001
Card reader, 22-in-1 (not illustrated)
636166-001
USB powered speakers (not illustrated)
636917-001
Mouse (not illustrated)
PS2, optical, jack black
537748-001
USB, HP Elite
674318-001
Washable
619580-001
Wireless, HP Elite
674317-001
USB, optical, jack black
537749-001
eSATA port assembly, PCI card (not illustrated)
645558-001
Antenna (WLAN; not illustrated)
583345-001
HP Business Digital Headset (not illustrated)
642738-001
External USB Webcam (not illustrated)
609252-001
Foot kit
370708-001
Keyboard (not illustrated)
PS/2 (standard)
537745-xx1
PS/2 (Windows 8)
701428-xx1
USB, basic (standard)
537746-xx1
USB, basic (Windows 8)
701424-xx1
USB, silver/black (Windows 8)
701429-xx1
USB, wireless (standard)
674314-xx1
USB, wireless (Windows 8)
701426-xx1
Washable (standard)
613125-xx1
Washable (Windows 8)
700510-xx1
Smart card (standard)
631411-xx4
Smart card (Windows 8)
701427-xx1
USB, hub
631913-xx1
Drives
Description
Hard drive
44
Chapter 4 Illustrated parts catalog
Spare part number
Description
Spare part number
1-TB, 7200-rpm
636930-001
500-GB, 7200-rpm
636929-001
250-GB, 7200-rpm
636927-001
256-GB Solid-state Drive (SSD), self-encrypting (SED), SATA 6.0
680020-001
180-GB Solid-state Drive (SSD), SATA 6.0
696622-001
160-GB Solid-state Drive (SSD), SATA 3.0
646809-001
128-GB Solid-state Drive (SSD), SATA 2.0
665961-001
120-GB Solid-state Drive (SSD), SATA 2.0
661841-001
20-GB Solid-state Drive (SSD), SATA
683305-001
Optical drive
Blu-ray BD-RW SuperMulti DL Drive
656792-001
16X SATA DVD±RW drive
660408-001
16X SATA DVD-ROM drive
581599-001
Grommet, hard drive isolation, blue
594220-001
NOTE:
2.5-inch solid-state drives require an adapter for installation.
Misc boards
Description
Spare part number
nVidia Quadro NVS310 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
680653-001
nVidia Quadro NVS300 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
632486-001
AMD Radeon HD7450 PCIe x16 graphics card, 1 GB
682411-001
AMD Radeon HD6350 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
637995-001
HP FireWire / IEEE 1394a PCIe x1 Card
637591-001
AMD FirePro 2270 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
637213-001
Intel PRO/1000CT2 NIC, includes bracket
635523-001
HP WLAN 802.11 g/n 1x2 PCIe NIC
538048-001
Sequential part number listing
Spare part
number
Description
370708-001
Foot kit
397117-001
Hard drive conversion bracket
Microtower (MT) chassis spare parts
45
46
Spare part
number
Description
463023-001
DMS-59 to dual VGA cable
484156-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to DVI
487562-001
DisplayPort cable
508987-001
Clamp lock, includes universal cable (plate not included)
537745-xx1
PS/2 keyboard for use in models without Windows 8
537746-xx1
USB keyboard for use in models without Windows 8
537748-001
Mouse, PS2, optical, jack black
537749-001
Mouse, USB, optical, jack black
538048-001
HP WLAN 802.11 g/n 1x2 PCIe NIC
570838-001
Bezel blank, optical drive, 5.25-inch
581599-001
16X SATA DVD-ROM drive
583345-001
Antenna (WLAN)
583653-001
Bezel blank, 3.5-inch
586721-001
Drive adapter, 2.5-inch
594220-001
Grommet, hard drive isolation, blue
603250-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to VGA
609252-001
External USB webcam
613125-xx1
Washable keyboard for use in models without Windows 8
613764-001
320W, 90% efficient
613765-001
320W, standard
617450-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to HDMI
619580-001
Mouse, washable
631411-xx4
Smart card keyboard for use in models without Windows 8
631913-xx1
Keyboard, USB hub for use in models without Windows 8
632486-001
nVidia Quadro NVS300 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
635523-001
Intel PRO/1000CT2 NIC, includes bracket
636166-001
Card reader, 22-in-1
636917-001
USB powered speakers
636922-001
Rear chassis fan
636927-001
250-GB, 7200-rpm hard drive
636929-001
500-GB, 7200-rpm hard drive
636930-001
1-TB, 7200-rpm hard drive
637213-001
AMD FirePro 2270 512-MB PCIe x16 graphics card
637591-001
HP FireWire / IEEE 1394a PCIe x1 card
Chapter 4 Illustrated parts catalog
Spare part
number
Description
637995-001
AMD Radeon HD6350 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
638629-001
Intel Core i3 2120 (3.3-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
638815-001
Serial port PCI card
638816-001
Hood sensor
638817-001
Printer port, PCI card
639135-001
320-GB, 7200-rpm hard drive
639958-001
SATA cable, 18 inch, 1 straight end, 1 angled end
641498-001
Solenoid lock
642738-001
HP Business Digital Headset
643907-001
Fan sink (includes replacement thermal material)
643908-001
Chassis fan
645330-001
Speaker
645558-001
eSATA port assembly, PCI card
646809-001
160-GB Solid-state drive, SATA 3.0
646824-001
Fan duct
646825-001
Access panel
646827-001
Front I/O assembly
646828-001
Power switch/LED with holder
646831-001
Hard drive power cable
646832-001
SATA optical drive power cable
656792-001
Blu-ray BD-RW SuperMulti DL Drive
657094-001
System board for use in models without Windows 8 (includes replacement thermal material)
657094-501
System board for use in models with Windows 8 Standard (includes replacement thermal material)
657094-601
System board for use in models with Windows 8 Professional (includes replacement thermal material)
660408-001
16X SATA DVD±RW drive
661841-001
120-GB Solid-state drive, SATA 2.0
665120-001
Intel Core i3 2130 (3.4-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
665123-001
Intel Pentium G860 (3.0-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
665961-001
128-GB Solid-state drive, SATA 2.0
671612-001
Memory module, 2-GB, PC3 12800, CL11)
671613-001
Memory module, 4-GB, PC3-12800, 1333-MH
674314-xx1
Keyboard, wireless for use in models without Windows 8
674317-001
Mouse, wireless
674318-001
Mouse, USB, for use in models without Windows 8
Microtower (MT) chassis spare parts
47
48
Spare part
number
Description
680020-001
256-GB Solid-state drive, self-encrypting (SED), SATA 6.0
680653-001
nVidia Quadro NVS310 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
682411-001
AMD Radeon HD7450 PCIe x16 graphics card, 1 GB
683305-001
20-GB Solid-state drive, SATA
687943-001
Intel Core i5 3470 (3.2-GHz, 6-MB L3 cache)
688162-001
Intel Core i5 3570 (3.4-GHz, 6-MB L3 cache)
688164-001
Intel Core i7 3770 (3.4-GHz, 8-MB L3 cache)
689375-001
Memory module, 8-GB, PC3 12800, CL11
689377-001
Front bezel for use in all countries and regions except for China
689378-001
Front bezel for use in China
691935-001
Intel Pentium G640 (2.8-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
691936-001
Intel Pentium G870 (3.1-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
696622-001
180-GB Solid-state drive (SSD), self-encrypting (SED), SATA 6.0
700510-xx1
Keyboard, washable, for use in models with Windows 8
701424-xx1
Keyboard, USB, black, for use in models with Windows 8
701426-xx1
Keyboard, wireless, for use in models with Windows 8
701427-xx1
Keyboard, smart card, for use in models with Windows 8
701428-xx1
Keyboard, PS/2, for use in models with Windows 8
701429-xx1
Keyboard, USB, silver/black, for use in models with Windows 8
Chapter 4 Illustrated parts catalog
Small Form Factor (SFF) chassis spare parts
Computer major components
Item
Description
Spare part number
(1)
Front bezel
687950-001
Bezel blank (5.25-inch, optical drive; not illustrated)
570838-001
Bezel blank (3.5-inch; not illustrated)
583653-001
(2)
Access panel
646815-001
(3)
Power supply
(4)
240W, 90% efficient
613762-001
240W, standard
613763-001
System board (includes replacement thermal material)
For use in models without Windows 8
657094-001
For use in models with Windows 8 Standard
657094-501
For use in models with Windows 8 Professional
657094-601
Memory modules (PC3-12800, 1666-MHz; not illustrated)
Small Form Factor (SFF) chassis spare parts
49
Item
Description
Spare part number
8-GB
689375-001
4-GB
671613-001
2-GB
671612-001
Processors (include replacement thermal material; not illustrated)
50
Intel Core i7 3770 (3.4-GHz, 8-MB L3 cache)
688164-001
Intel Core i5 3570 (3.4-GHz, 6-MB L3 cache)
688162-001
Intel Core i5 3470 (3.2-GHz, 6-MB L3 cache)
687943-001
Intel Core i3 2130 (3.4-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
665120-001
Intel Core i3 2120 (3.3-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
638629-001
Intel Pentium G870 (3.1-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
691936-001
Intel Pentium G860 (3.0-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
665123-001
Intel Pentium G640 (2.8-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
691935-001
Chapter 4 Illustrated parts catalog
Cables
Item
Description
Spare part number
(1)
Front I/O and power switch assembly
636926-001
(2)
SATA cable, 19.5 inch, 2 straight ends
638813-001
(3)
SATA drive power cable
636923-001
SATA cable, 25.2 inch, 1 straight end, 1 angled end (not illustrated)
638814-001
DMS-59 to dual VGA cable
463023-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to VGA
603250-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to DVI
484156-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to HDMI
617450-001
DisplayPort cable
487562-001
Small Form Factor (SFF) chassis spare parts
51
Misc parts
52
Item
Description
Spare part number
(1)
Chassis fan
645327-001
(2)
Fan duct (not illustrated)
636921-001
(3)
Heat sink (includes replacement thermal material)
645326-001
(4)
Speaker
636925-001
(5)
Solenoid lock
641471-001
(6)
Printer port, PCI card
638817-001
(7)
Hood sensor
638816-001
Chapter 4 Illustrated parts catalog
Item
Description
Spare part number
(8)
Clamp lock, includes universal cable (plate not included; not illustrated)
508987-001
Rubber foot
583654-001
Chassis stand
587451-001
Serial port, PCI card (not illustrated)
638815-001
2.5-in drive adapter (not illustrated)
586721-001
Grommet, hard drive isolation, blue (not illustrated)
594220-001
Hard drive conversion bracket
397117-001
Card reader, 22-in-1 (not illustrated)
636166-001
USB powered speakers (not illustrated)
636917-001
Mouse (not illustrated)
PS2, optical, jack black
537748-001
USB, HP Elite
674318-001
Washable
619580-001
Wireless, HP Elite
674317-001
USB, optical, jack black
537749-001
eSATA port assembly, PCI card (not illustrated)
645558-001
Antenna (WLAN; not illustrated)
583345-001
HP Business Digital Headset (not illustrated)
642738-001
External USB webcam (not illustrated)
609252-001
Foot kit
370708-001
Keyboard (not illustrated)
PS/2 (standard)
537745-xx1
PS/2 (Windows 8)
701428-xx1
USB, basic (standard)
537746-xx1
USB, basic (Windows 8)
701424-xx1
USB, silver/black (Windows 8)
701429-xx1
USB, wireless (standard)
674314-xx1
USB, wireless (Windows 8)
701426-xx1
Washable (standard)
613125-xx1
Washable (Windows 8)
700510-xx1
Smart card (standard)
631411-xx4
Smart card (Windows 8)
701427-xx1
USB, hub
631913-xx1
Small Form Factor (SFF) chassis spare parts
53
Drives
Description
Spare part number
Hard drive
1-TB, 7200-rpm
636930-001
500-GB, 7200-rpm
636929-001
320-GB, 7200-rpm
639135-001
250-GB, 7200-rpm
636927-001
256-GB Solid-state Drive (SSD), self-encrypting (SED), SATA 6.0
680020-001
180-GB Solid-state Drive (SSD), SATA 6.0
696622-001
160-GB Solid-state Drive (SSD), SATA 3.0
646809-001
128-GB Solid-state Drive (SSD), SATA 2.0.
665961-001
120-GB Solid-state Drive (SSD), SATA 2.0
661841-001
20-GB Solid-state Drive (SSD), SATA 2.0
683305-001
Optical drive
Blu-ray BD-RW SuperMulti DL Drive
656792-001
16X SATA DVD±RW drive
660408-001
16X SATA DVD-ROM drive
581599-001
Grommet, hard drive isolation, blue
594220-001
NOTE:
2.5-inch solid-state drives require an adapter for installation.
Misc boards
54
Description
Spare part number
nVidia Quadro NVS310 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
680653-001
nVidia Quadro NVS300 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
632486-001
AMD Radeon HD7450 PCIe x16 graphics card, 1 GB
682411-001
AMD Radeon HD6350 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
637995-001
HP FireWire / IEEE 1394a PCIe x1 Card
637591-001
AMD FirePro 2270 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
637213-001
Intel PRO/1000CT2 NIC, includes bracket
635523-001
HP WLAN 802.11 g/n 1x2 PCIe NIC
538048-001
Chapter 4 Illustrated parts catalog
Sequential part number listing
Spare part
number
Description
370708-001
Foot kit
397117-001
Hard drive conversion bracket
463023-001
DMS-59 to dual VGA cable
484156-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to DVI
487562-001
DisplayPort cable
508987-001
Clamp lock, includes universal cable (plate not included)
537745-xx1
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in models without Windows 8
537746-xx1
USB basic keyboard for use in models without Windows 8
537748-001
Mouse, PS2, optical, jack black
537749-001
Mouse, USB, optical, jack black
538048-001
HP WLAN 802.11 g/n 1x2 PCIe NIC
570838-001
Bezel blank, optical drive, 5.25-inch
581599-001
16X SATA DVD-ROM drive
583345-001
Antenna (WLAN)
583653-001
Bezel blank, 3.5-inch
583654-001
Rubber foot
586721-001
Drive adapter, 2.5-inch
587451-001
Chassis stand
594220-001
Grommet, hard drive isolation, blue
603250-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to VGA
609252-001
External USB webcam
613125-xx1
Washable keyboard for use in models without Windows 8
613762-001
320W, 90% efficient
613763-001
320W, standard
617450-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to HDMI
619580-001
Mouse, washable
631411-xx4
Smart card keyboard for use in models without Windows 8
631913-xx1
Keyboard, USB hub for use in models without Windows 8
632486-001
nVidia Quadro NVS300 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
635523-001
Intel PRO/1000CT2 NIC, includes bracket
636166-001
Card reader, 22-in-1
636917-001
USB powered speakers
Small Form Factor (SFF) chassis spare parts
55
56
Spare part
number
Description
636921-001
Fan duct
636922-001
Chassis fan
636923-001
SATA power cable
636925-001
Speaker
636926-001
Front I/O cable and power switch assembly
636927-001
250-GB, 7200-rpm hard drive
636929-001
500-GB, 7200-rpm hard drive
636930-001
1-TB, 7200-rpm hard drive
637213-001
AMD FirePro 2270 512-MB PCIe x16 graphics card
637591-001
HP FireWire / IEEE 1394a PCIe x1 card
637995-001
AMD Radeon HD6350 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
638629-001
Intel Core i3 2120 (3.3-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
638813-001
SATA cable, 19.5 inch, 2 straight ends
638814-001
SATA cable, 25.2 inch, 1 straight end, 1 angled end
638815-001
Serial port PCI card
638816-001
Hood sensor
638817-001
Printer port, PCI card
641471-001
Solenoid lock
642738-001
HP Business Digital Headset
645326-001
Heat sink
645327-001
Chassis fan
645558-001
eSATA port assembly, PCI card
646809-001
160-GB Solid-state drive, SATA 3.0
646815-001
Access panel
656792-001
Blu-ray BD-RW SuperMulti DL Drive
657094-001
System board for use in models without Windows 8 (includes replacement thermal material)
657094-501
System board for use in models with Windows 8 Standard (includes replacement thermal material)
657094-601
System board for use in models with Windows 8 Professional (includes replacement thermal material)
660408-001
16X SATA DVD±RW drive
661841-001
120-GB Solid-state drive, SATA 2.0
665120-001
Intel Core i3 2130 (3.4-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
665123-001
Intel Pentium G860 (3.0-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
665961-001
128-GB Solid-state drive, SATA 2.0
671612-001
Memory module, 2-GB, PC3 12800, CL11)
Chapter 4 Illustrated parts catalog
Spare part
number
Description
671613-001
Memory module, 4-GB, PC3-12800,-CL11
674314-xx1
Keyboard, wireless for use in models without Windows 8
674317-001
Mouse, wireless, HP Elite
674318-001
Mouse, USB, HP Elite
680020-001
256-GB Solid-state drive, self-encrypting (SED), SATA 6.0
680653-001
nVidia Quadro NVS310 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
682411-001
AMD Radeon HD7450 PCIe x16 graphics card, 1 GB
683305-001
20-GB Solid-state drive, SATA
687943-001
Intel Core i5 3470 (3.2-GHz, 6-MB L3 cache)
687950-001
Front bezel
688162-001
Intel Core i5 3570 (3.4-GHz, 6-MB L3 cache)
688164-001
Intel Core i7 3770 (3.4-GHz, 8-MB L3 cache)
689375-001
Memory module, 8-GB, PC3-12800, CL11
691935-001
Intel Pentium G640 (2.8-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
691936-001
Intel Pentium G870 (3.1-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
696622-001
180-GB Solid-state drive (SSD), SATA 6.0
700510-xx1
Keyboard, washable, for use in models with Windows 8
701424-xx1
Keyboard, USB, black, for use in models with Windows 8
701426-xx1
Keyboard, wireless, for use in models with Windows 8
701427-xx1
Keyboard, smart card, for use in models with Windows 8
701428-xx1
Keyboard, PS/2, for use in models with Windows 8
701429-xx1
Keyboard, USB, silver/black, for use in models with Windows 8
Small Form Factor (SFF) chassis spare parts
57
Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) chassis spare parts
Computer major components
Item
Description
Spare part number
(1)
Access panel
689382-001
AC adapter
(2)
(3)
58
180W, 90% efficient
682320-001
180W, standard
613766-001
135W, standard
682321-001
Front bezel
689383-001
Bezel blank (not illustrated)
593230-001
System board (includes replacement thermal material)
For use in models without Windows 8
657095-001
For use in models with Windows 8 Standard
657095-501
For use in models with Windows 8 Professional
657095-601
Chapter 4 Illustrated parts catalog
Item
Description
Spare part number
For use in models with DisplayPort 1.2 support without Windows 8
711787-001
For use in models with DisplayPort 1.2 support with Windows 8 Standard
711787-501
For use in models with DisplayPort 1.2 support with Windows 8 Professional
711787-601
Memory modules (PC3-12800, 1666-MHz; not illustrated)
8-GB
689374-001
4-GB
689373-001
2-GB
689372-001
Processors (include replacement thermal material; not illustrated)
Intel Core i7 3770s (3.1-GHz, 8-MB L3 cache)
689370-001
Intel Core i5 3570s (3.1-GHz, 6-MB L3 cache)
695079-001
Intel Core i5 3475s (2.9-GHz, 6-MB L3 cache)
695078-001
Intel Core i5 3470s (2.9-GHz, 6-MB L3 cache)
695077-001
Intel Core i3 2130 (3.4-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
665120
Intel Core i3 2120 (3.3-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
638629-001
Intel Pentium G870 (3.1-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
691936-001
Intel Pentium G860 (3.0-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
665123-001
Intel Pentium G640 (2.8-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
691935-001
Item
Description
Spare part number
(1)
Optical drive cable/connector
605163-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to VGA
603250-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to DVI
484156-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to HDMI
617450-001
DisplayPort cable
487562-001
Cables
Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) chassis spare parts
59
Misc parts
Item
Description
Spare part number
(1)
Heat sink for use with the processor (includes replacement thermal material)
587456-001
(2)
Heat sink for use with the discrete graphics card (includes replacement thermal
material)
689369-001
Heat sink for use with UMA graphics models (includes replacement thermal material;
not illustrated)
625256-001
Fan, rear
691352-001
(3)
60
Chapter 4 Illustrated parts catalog
Item
Description
Spare part number
(4)
Card reader
592685-001
(5)
Speaker
689384-001
(6)
Front I/O panel
587458-001
(7)
Rear port cover
646818-001
(8)
Chassis fan, front
689376-001
(9)
Clamp lock, includes universal cable (plate not included; not illustrated)
508987-001
Optical drive rail (green plastic piece on drive; not illustrated)
594219-001
Grommet, hard drive isolation, blue (not illustrated)
594220-001
USB powered speakers (not illustrated)
636917-001
Mouse (not illustrated)
PS2, optical, jack black
537748-001
USB, HP Elite
674318-001
Washable
619580-001
Wireless, HP Elite
674317-001
USB, optical, jack black
537749-001
WLAN antenna hardware kit (not illustrated)
646811-001
HP Business Digital Headset (not illustrated)
642738-001
External USB Webcam (not illustrated)
609252-001
Keyboard (not illustrated)
PS/2 (standard)
537745-xx1
PS/2 (Windows 8)
701428-xx1
USB, basic (standard)
537746-xx1
USB, basic (Windows 8)
701424-xx1
USB, silver/black (Windows 8)
701429-xx1
USB, wireless (standard)
674314-xx1
USB, wireless (Windows 8)
701426-xx1
Washable (standard)
613125-xx1
Washable (Windows 8)
700510-xx1
Smart card (standard)
631411-xx4
Smart card (Windows 8)
701427-xx1
USB, hub
631913-xx1
Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) chassis spare parts
61
Drives
Description
Spare part number
Hard drive
500-GB, 7200-rpm, 2.5-inch, self-encrypting (SED)
696442-001
500-GB, 7200-rpm, 2.5-inch
686217-001
320-GB, 7200-rpm, 2.5-inch, self-encrypting (SED)
634824-001
320-GB, 7200-rpm, 2.5-inch
639135-001
256-GB Solid-state Drive (SSD), self-encrypting (SED), SATA 6.0
680020-001
180-GB Solid-state Drive (SSD), SATA 6.0
696622-001
160-GB Solid-state Drive (SSD), SATA 3.0
646809-001
128-GB Solid-state Drive (SSD), SATA 2.0
665961-001
120-GB Solid-state Drive (SSD), SATA 2.0
661841-001
32-GB Solid-state Drive (SSD), SATA
686616-001
24-GB Solid-state Drive (SSD), mSATA
683306-001
16-GB Solid-state Drive (SSD), SATA
688328-001
Optical drive
DVD-ROM drive
608394-001
DVD±RW and CD-RW Super Multi Double-Layer Combo Drive. This kit also includes the drive
bracket.
657958-001
Grommet, hard drive isolation, blue
594220-001
Misc boards
Description
Spare part number
AMD Radeon HD 7650A (MXM)
687445-001
Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6205 (802.11a/b/g/n Wi-Fi wireless adapter)
652165-001
Sequential part number listing
62
Spare part
number
Description
484156-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to DVI
487562-001
DisplayPort cable
537745-xx1
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in models without Windows 8
537746-xx1
USB basic keyboard for use in models without Windows 8
537748-001
Mouse, PS2, optical, jack black
Chapter 4 Illustrated parts catalog
Spare part
number
Description
537749-001
Mouse, USB, optical, jack black
587456-001
Heat sink for use with the processor (includes thermal material)
587458-001
Front I/O assembly
592685-001
Card reader assembly
593230-001
Bezel blank
594219-001
Optical drive cable and rail
594220-001
Grommet, hard drive isolation, blue
603250-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to VGA
605163-001
Optical drive cable/connector
608394-001
DVD-ROM drive
609252-001
External USB webcam
612496-001
Stand
613125-xx1
Washable keyboard for use in models without Windows 8
613766-001
180-W power adapter, standard
617450-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to HDMI
619580-001
Mouse, washable
625256-001
Heat sink for use on models with UMA graphics (includes thermal material)
631411-xx4
Smart card keyboard for use in models without Windows 8
631913-xx1
Keyboard, USB hub for use in models without Windows 8
634824-001
320-GB, 7200-rpm hard drive, 2.5 inch, SED
636917-001
USB powered speakers
638629-001
Intel Core i3 2120 (3.3-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
638816-001
Hood sensor
639135-001
320-GB, 7200-rpm hard drive, 2.5-inch
642738-001
HP Business Digital Headset
646809-001
160-GB Solid-state drive, SATA 3.0
646811-001
WLAN antenna hardware kit
652165-001
Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6205 (802.11a/b/g/n Wi-Fi wireless adapter)
657095-001
System board (includes replacement thermal material)
657958-001
DVD±RW and CD-RW Super Multi Double-Layer Combo Drive. This kit also includes the drive bracket.
661841-001
120-GB Solid-state drive, SATA 2.0
665120-001
Intel Core i3 2130 (3.4-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
665123-001
Intel Pentium G860 (3.0-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
665961-001
128-GB Solid-state drive, SATA 2.0
Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) chassis spare parts
63
64
Spare part
number
Description
674314-xx1
Keyboard, wireless
674317-001
Mouse, wireless, HP Elite
674318-001
Mouse, USB, HP Elite
680020-001
256-GB Solid-state drive, self-encrypting (SED), SATA 6.0
682320-001
AC adapter, 180W, 90% efficient
682321-001
AC adapter, 135W, standard
683306-001
24-GB Solid-state drive
686217-001
500-GB, 7200-rpm, 2.5-inch hard drive
686616-001
32-GB Solid-state drive, SATA
687445-001
AMD Radeon HD 7650A (MXM)
688328-001
16-GB Solid-state drive, SATA
689369-001
Heat sink for use on models with discrete graphics cards (includes thermal material)
689370-001
Intel Core i7 3770s (3.1-GHz, 8-MB L3 cache)
689371-001
Intel Core i5 3550s (3.1-GHz, 6-MB L3 cache)
689372-001
Memory module, 2-GB, PC3-12800, CL11
689373-001
Memory module, 4-GB, PC3-12800, CL11
689374-001
Memory module, 8-GB, PC3-12800, CL11
689376-001
Front fan
689382-001
Access panel
689383-001
Front bezel
689384-001
Speaker
691352-001
Chassis fan, rear
691935-001
Intel Pentium G640 (2.8-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
691936-001
Intel Pentium G870 (3.1-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
696442-001
500-GB hard drive, 7200-rpm, SED
696622-001
180-GB Solid-state drive, SATA 6.0
700510-xx1
Keyboard, washable, for use in models with Windows 8
701424-xx1
Keyboard, USB, black, for use in models with Windows 8
701426-xx1
Keyboard, wireless, for use in models with Windows 8
701427-xx1
Keyboard, smart card, for use in models with Windows 8
701428-xx1
Keyboard, PS/2, for use in models with Windows 8
701429-xx1
Keyboard, USB, silver/black, for use in models with Windows 8
711787-001
System board with DisplayPort 1.2 support for use in models without Windows 8
Chapter 4 Illustrated parts catalog
Spare part
number
Description
711787-501
System board with DisplayPort 1.2 support for use in models with Windows 8 Standard
711787-601
System board with DisplayPort 1.2 support for use in models with Windows 8 Professional
Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) chassis spare parts
65
5
Routine Care, SATA Drive Guidelines,
and Disassembly Preparation
This chapter provides general service information for the computer. Adherence to the procedures and
precautions described in this chapter is essential for proper service.
CAUTION: When the computer is plugged into an AC power source, voltage is always applied to
the system board. You must disconnect the power cord from the power source before opening the
computer to prevent system board or component damage.
Electrostatic Discharge Information
A sudden discharge of static electricity from your finger or other conductor can destroy static-sensitive
devices or microcircuitry. Often the spark is neither felt nor heard, but damage occurs. An electronic
device exposed to electrostatic discharge (ESD) may not appear to be affected at all and can work
perfectly throughout a normal cycle. The device may function normally for a while, but it has been
degraded in the internal layers, reducing its life expectancy.
Networks built into many integrated circuits provide some protection, but in many cases, the
discharge contains enough power to alter device parameters or melt silicon junctions.
Generating Static
The following table shows that:
●
Different activities generate different amounts of static electricity.
●
Static electricity increases as humidity decreases.
Relative Humidity
66
Event
55%
40%
10%
Walking across carpet
7,500 V
15,000 V
35,000 V
Walking across vinyl floor
3,000 V
5,000 V
12,000 V
Motions of bench worker
400 V
800 V
6,000 V
Removing DIPs from plastic tube
400 V
700 V
2,000 V
Chapter 5 Routine Care, SATA Drive Guidelines, and Disassembly Preparation
Removing DIPs from vinyl tray
2,000 V
4,000 V
11,500 V
Removing DIPs from Styrofoam
3,500 V
5,000 V
14,500 V
Removing bubble pack from PCB
7,000 V
20,000 V
26,500 V
Packing PCBs in foam-lined box
5,000 V
11,000 V
21,000 V
These are then multi-packaged inside plastic tubes, trays, or Styrofoam.
NOTE:
700 volts can degrade a product.
Preventing Electrostatic Damage to Equipment
Many electronic components are sensitive to ESD. Circuitry design and structure determine the
degree of sensitivity. The following packaging and grounding precautions are necessary to prevent
damage to electric components and accessories.
●
To avoid hand contact, transport products in static-safe containers such as tubes, bags, or
boxes.
●
Protect all electrostatic parts and assemblies with conductive or approved containers or
packaging.
●
Keep electrostatic sensitive parts in their containers until they arrive at static-free stations.
●
Place items on a grounded surface before removing them from their container.
●
Always be properly grounded when touching a sensitive component or assembly.
●
Avoid contact with pins, leads, or circuitry.
●
Place reusable electrostatic-sensitive parts from assemblies in protective packaging or
conductive foam.
Personal Grounding Methods and Equipment
Use the following equipment to prevent static electricity damage to equipment:
●
Wrist straps are flexible straps with a maximum of one-megohm ± 10% resistance in the ground
cords. To provide proper ground, a strap must be worn snug against bare skin. The ground cord
must be connected and fit snugly into the banana plug connector on the grounding mat or
workstation.
●
Heel straps/Toe straps/Boot straps can be used at standing workstations and are compatible
with most types of shoes or boots. On conductive floors or dissipative floor mats, use them on
both feet with a maximum of one-megohm ± 10% resistance between the operator and ground.
Static Shielding Protection Levels
Method
Voltage
Antistatic plastic
1,500
Carbon-loaded plastic
7,500
Metallized laminate
15,000
Electrostatic Discharge Information
67
Grounding the Work Area
To prevent static damage at the work area, use the following precautions:
●
Cover the work surface with approved static-dissipative material. Provide a wrist strap connected
to the work surface and properly grounded tools and equipment.
●
Use static-dissipative mats, foot straps, or air ionizers to give added protection.
●
Handle electrostatic sensitive components, parts, and assemblies by the case or PCB laminate.
Handle them only at static-free work areas.
●
Turn off power and input signals before inserting and removing connectors or test equipment.
●
Use fixtures made of static-safe materials when fixtures must directly contact dissipative
surfaces.
●
Keep work area free of nonconductive materials such as ordinary plastic assembly aids and
Styrofoam.
●
Use field service tools, such as cutters, screwdrivers, and vacuums, that are conductive.
Recommended Materials and Equipment
Materials and equipment that are recommended for use in preventing static electricity include:
68
●
Antistatic tape
●
Antistatic smocks, aprons, or sleeve protectors
●
Conductive bins and other assembly or soldering aids
●
Conductive foam
●
Conductive tabletop workstations with ground cord of one-megohm +/- 10% resistance
●
Static-dissipative table or floor mats with hard tie to ground
●
Field service kits
●
Static awareness labels
●
Wrist straps and footwear straps providing one-megohm +/- 10% resistance
●
Material handling packages
●
Conductive plastic bags
●
Conductive plastic tubes
●
Conductive tote boxes
●
Opaque shielding bags
●
Transparent metallized shielding bags
●
Transparent shielding tubes
Chapter 5 Routine Care, SATA Drive Guidelines, and Disassembly Preparation
Operating Guidelines
To prevent overheating and to help prolong the life of the computer:
●
Keep the computer away from excessive moisture, direct sunlight, and extremes of heat and
cold.
●
Operate the computer on a sturdy, level surface. Leave a 10.2-cm (4-inch) clearance on all
vented sides of the computer and above the monitor to permit the required airflow.
●
Never restrict the airflow into the computer by blocking any vents or air intakes. Do not place the
keyboard, with the keyboard feet down, directly against the front of the desktop unit as this also
restricts airflow.
●
Occasionally clean the air vents on all vented sides of the computer. Lint, dust, and other foreign
matter can block the vents and limit the airflow. Be sure to unplug the computer before cleaning
the air vents.
●
Never operate the computer with the cover or side panel removed.
●
Do not stack computers on top of each other or place computers so near each other that they
are subject to each other’s re-circulated or preheated air.
●
If the computer is to be operated within a separate enclosure, intake and exhaust ventilation
must be provided on the enclosure, and the same operating guidelines listed above will still
apply.
●
Keep liquids away from the computer and keyboard.
●
Never cover the ventilation slots on the monitor with any type of material.
●
Install or enable power management functions of the operating system or other software,
including sleep states.
Routine Care
General Cleaning Safety Precautions
1.
Never use solvents or flammable solutions to clean the computer.
2.
Never immerse any parts in water or cleaning solutions; apply any liquids to a clean cloth and
then use the cloth on the component.
3.
Always unplug the computer when cleaning with liquids or damp cloths.
4.
Always unplug the computer before cleaning the keyboard, mouse, or air vents.
5.
Disconnect the keyboard before cleaning it.
6.
Wear safety glasses equipped with side shields when cleaning the keyboard.
Cleaning the Computer Case
Follow all safety precautions in General Cleaning Safety Precautions on page 69 before cleaning the
computer.
Operating Guidelines
69
To clean the computer case, follow the procedures described below:
●
To remove light stains or dirt, use plain water with a clean, lint-free cloth or swab.
●
For stronger stains, use a mild dishwashing liquid diluted with water. Rinse well by wiping it with
a cloth or swab dampened with clear water.
●
For stubborn stains, use isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol. No rinsing is needed as the alcohol will
evaporate quickly and not leave a residue.
●
After cleaning, always wipe the unit with a clean, lint-free cloth.
●
Occasionally clean the air vents on the computer. Lint and other foreign matter can block the
vents and limit the airflow.
Cleaning the Keyboard
Follow all safety precautions in General Cleaning Safety Precautions on page 69 before cleaning the
keyboard.
To clean the tops of the keys or the keyboard body, follow the procedures described in Cleaning the
Computer Case on page 69.
When cleaning debris from under the keys, review all rules in General Cleaning Safety Precautions
on page 69 before following these procedures:
CAUTION: Use safety glasses equipped with side shields before attempting to clean debris from
under the keys.
●
Visible debris underneath or between the keys may be removed by vacuuming or shaking.
●
Canned, pressurized air may be used to clean debris from under the keys. Caution should be
used as too much air pressure can dislodge lubricants applied under the wide keys.
●
If you remove a key, use a specially designed key puller to prevent damage to the keys. This
tool is available through many electronic supply outlets.
CAUTION: Never remove a wide leveled key (like the space bar) from the keyboard. If these
keys are improperly removed or installed, the keyboard may not function properly.
●
Cleaning under a key may be done with a swab moistened with isopropyl alcohol and squeezed
out. Be careful not to wipe away lubricants necessary for proper key functions. Use tweezers to
remove any fibers or dirt in confined areas. Allow the parts to air dry before reassembly.
Cleaning the Monitor
70
●
Wipe the monitor screen with a clean cloth moistened with water or with a towelette designed for
cleaning monitors. Do not use sprays or aerosols directly on the screen; the liquid may seep into
the housing and damage a component. Never use solvents or flammable liquids on the monitor.
●
To clean the monitor body follow the procedures in Cleaning the Computer Case on page 69.
Chapter 5 Routine Care, SATA Drive Guidelines, and Disassembly Preparation
Cleaning the Mouse
Before cleaning the mouse, ensure that the power to the computer is turned off.
●
Clean the mouse ball by first removing the retaining plate and the ball from the housing. Pull out
any debris from the ball socket and wipe the ball with a clean, dry cloth before reassembly.
●
To clean the mouse body, follow the procedures in Cleaning the Computer Case on page 69.
Service Considerations
Listed below are some of the considerations that you should keep in mind during the disassembly and
assembly of the computer.
Power Supply Fan
The power supply fan is a variable-speed fan based on the temperature in the power supply.
CAUTION: The cooling fan is always on when the computer is in the “On” mode. The cooling fan is
off when the computer is in “Standby,” “Suspend,” or “Off” modes.
You must disconnect the power cord from the power source before opening the computer to prevent
system board or component damage.
Tools and Software Requirements
To service the computer, you need the following:
●
Torx T-15 screwdriver (HP screwdriver with bits, PN 161946-001)
●
Torx T-15 screwdriver with small diameter shank (for certain front bezel removal)
●
Flat-bladed screwdriver (may sometimes be used in place of the Torx screwdriver)
●
Phillips #2 screwdriver
●
Diagnostics software
●
HP tamper-resistant T-15 wrench (Smart Cover FailSafe Key, PN 166527-001) or HP tamperresistant bits (Smart Cover FailSafe Key, PN 166527-002)
Screws
The screws used in the computer are not interchangeable. They may have standard or metric threads
and may be of different lengths. If an incorrect screw is used during the reassembly process, it can
damage the unit. HP strongly recommends that all screws removed during disassembly be kept with
the part that was removed, then returned to their proper locations.
CAUTION: Metric screws have a black finish. U.S. screws have a silver finish and are used on hard
drives only.
CAUTION: As each subassembly is removed from the computer, it should be placed away from the
work area to prevent damage.
Service Considerations
71
Cables and Connectors
Most cables used throughout the unit are flat, flexible cables. These cables must be handled with
care to avoid damage. Apply only the tension required to seat or unseat the cables during insertion or
removal from the connector. Handle cables by the connector whenever possible. In all cases, avoid
bending or twisting the cables, and ensure that the cables are routed in such a way that they cannot
be caught or snagged by parts being removed or replaced.
CAUTION: When servicing this computer, ensure that cables are placed in their proper location
during the reassembly process. Improper cable placement can damage the computer.
Hard Drives
Handle hard drives as delicate, precision components, avoiding all physical shock and vibration. This
applies to failed drives as well as replacement spares.
●
If a drive must be mailed, place the drive in a bubble-pack mailer or other suitable protective
packaging and label the package “Fragile: Handle With Care.”
●
Do not remove hard drives from the shipping package for storage. Keep hard drives in their
protective packaging until they are actually mounted in the CPU.
●
Avoid dropping drives from any height onto any surface.
●
If you are inserting or removing a hard drive, turn off the computer. Do not remove a hard drive
while the computer is on or in standby mode.
●
Before handling a drive, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity. While handling a
drive, avoid touching the connector. For more information about preventing electrostatic
damage, refer to Electrostatic Discharge Information on page 66
●
Do not use excessive force when inserting a drive.
●
Avoid exposing a hard drive to liquids, temperature extremes, or products that have magnetic
fields such as monitors or speakers.
Lithium Coin Cell Battery
The battery that comes with the computer provides power to the real-time clock and has a minimum
lifetime of about three years.
See the appropriate removal and replacement chapter for the chassis you are working on in this
guide for instructions on the replacement procedures.
WARNING! This computer contains a lithium battery. There is a risk of fire and chemical burn if the
battery is handled improperly. Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, dispose
in water or fire, or expose it to temperatures higher than 140ºF (60ºC). Do not attempt to recharge the
battery.
NOTE: Batteries, battery packs, and accumulators should not be disposed of together with the
general household waste. In order to forward them to recycling or proper disposal, please use the
public collection system or return them to HP, their authorized partners, or their agents.
72
Chapter 5 Routine Care, SATA Drive Guidelines, and Disassembly Preparation
SATA Hard Drives
Serial ATA Hard Drive Characteristics
Number of pins/conductors in data cable
7/7
Number of pins in power cable
15
Maximum data cable length
39.37 in (100 cm)
Data interface voltage differential
400-700 mV
Drive voltages
3.3 V, 5 V, 12 V
Jumpers for configuring drive
N/A
Data transfer rate
3.0 Gb/s
SATA Hard Drive Cables
SATA Data Cable
Always use an HP approved SATA 3.0 Gb/s cable as it is fully backwards compatible with the SATA
1.5 Gb/s drives.
Current HP desktop products ship with SATA 3.0 Gb/s hard drives.
SATA data cables are susceptible to damage if overflexed. Never crease a SATA data cable and
never bend it tighter than a 30 mm (1.18 in) radius.
The SATA data cable is a thin, 7-pin cable designed to transmit data for only a single drive.
SMART ATA Drives
The Self Monitoring Analysis and Recording Technology (SMART) ATA drives for the HP Personal
Computers have built-in drive failure prediction that warns the user or network administrator of an
impending failure or crash of the hard drive. The SMART drive tracks fault prediction and failure
indication parameters such as reallocated sector count, spin retry count, and calibration retry count. If
the drive determines that a failure is imminent, it generates a fault alert.
Cable Management
Always follow good cable management practices when working inside the computer.
●
Keep cables away from major heat sources like the heat sink.
●
Do not jam cables on top of expansion cards or memory modules. Printed circuit cards like these
are not designed to take excessive pressure on them.
●
Keep cables clear of sliding or moveable parts to prevent them from being cut or crimped when
the parts are moved.
●
When folding a flat ribbon cable, never fold to a sharp crease. Sharp creases may damage the
wires.
SATA Hard Drives
73
74
●
Some flat ribbon cables come prefolded. Never change the folds on these cables.
●
Do not bend any cable sharply. A sharp bend can break the internal wires.
●
Never bend a SATA data cable tighter than a 30 mm (1.18 in) radius.
●
Never crease a SATA data cable.
●
Do not rely on components like the drive cage, power supply, or computer cover to push cables
down into the chassis. Always position the cables to lay properly by themselves.
Chapter 5 Routine Care, SATA Drive Guidelines, and Disassembly Preparation
6
Removal and Replacement Procedures
Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
Adherence to the procedures and precautions described in this chapter is essential for proper service.
After completing all necessary removal and replacement procedures, run the Diagnostics utility to
verify that all components operate properly.
NOTE:
Not all features listed in this guide are available on all computers.
Preparation for Disassembly
See Routine Care, SATA Drive Guidelines, and Disassembly Preparation on page 66 for initial safety
procedures.
1.
Remove/disengage any security devices that prohibit opening the computer.
2.
Close any open software applications.
3.
Exit the operating system.
4.
Remove any diskette, compact disc, or media card from the computer.
5.
Turn off the computer and any peripheral devices that are connected to it.
CAUTION: Turn off the computer before disconnecting any cables.
Regardless of the power-on state, voltage is always present on the system board as long as the
system is plugged into an active AC outlet. In some systems the cooling fan is on even when the
computer is in the “Standby,” or “Suspend” modes. The power cord should always be
disconnected before servicing a unit.
6.
Disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet and then from the computer.
7.
Disconnect all peripheral device cables from the computer.
8.
As applicable, lay the computer down on its side to achieve a safe working position.
NOTE: During disassembly, label each cable as you remove it, noting its position and routing.
Keep all screws with the units removed.
CAUTION: The screws used in the computer are of different thread sizes and lengths; using the
wrong screw in an application may damage the unit.
Preparation for Disassembly
75
Access Panel
Description
Spare part number
Access panel
646819-001
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 75)
2.
Lay the computer down on its large base for greater stability.
3.
Lift up on the access panel handle (1) then lift the access panel off the computer (2).
Figure 6-1 Removing the Computer Access Panel
To install the access panel, reverse the removal procedure.
76
Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
Front Bezel
Description
Spare part number
Front bezel for use in 8300 models
689380-001
Front bezel for use in 8380 models
689381-001
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 75).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 76).
3.
Lift up the three tabs on the side of the bezel (1), then rotate the bezel off the chassis (2).
Figure 6-2 Removing the Front Bezel
To install the front bezel, reverse the removal procedure.
Front Bezel
77
Front Bezel Security
The front bezel can be locked in place by installing a security screw provided by HP. To install the
security screw:
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 75).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 76).
3.
Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 77).
4.
Remove the security screw from the inside of the front bezel.
Figure 6-3 Retrieving the Front Bezel Security Screw
5.
78
Replace the front bezel.
Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
6.
Install the screw through the interior of the front of the chassis into the front bezel. The screw
hole is located on the left edge of the chassis next to the top hard drive bay.
Figure 6-4 Installing the Front Bezel Security Screw
7.
Replace the access panel.
8.
Reconnect the power cord and turn on the computer.
9.
Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the access panel was removed.
Front Bezel Security
79
Bezel Blanks
Description
Spare part number
3.5-inch bezel blank
583653-001
5.25-inch bezel blank, optical drive
570838-001
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 75).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 76).
3.
Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 77).
4.
Gently pull the subpanel, with the bezel blanks secured in it, away from the front bezel, then
remove the desired bezel blank.
CAUTION: Hold the subpanel straight when you pull it away from the front bezel. Pulling the
subpanel away at an angle could damage the pins that align it within the front bezel.
Figure 6-5 Removing Bezel Blanks from the Subpanel (Desktop Shown)
NOTE: When replacing the subpanel, ensure that the aligning pins and any remaining bezel blanks
are in their proper orientation. The logo on the subpanel should be located at the bottom of the
subpanel when properly oriented.
80
Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
System Board Connections
Refer to the following illustration and table to identify the system board connectors.
Figure 6-6 System Board Connections
Table 6-1 System Board Connections
No.
System Board Connector
System Board Label
Color
Component
1
PCI
PCI3
white
Expansion Card
2
PCI
PCI2
white
Expansion Card
3
PCI
PCI1
white
Expansion Card
4
Hood Lock
HLCK
black
Hood Lock
5
Parallel Port
PAR
black
Parallel Port
6
PCI Express x16 downshifted
to a x4
X4PCIEXP
white
Expansion Card
7
PCI Express x16
X16PCIEXP
black
Expansion Card
8
PCI Express x1
X1PCIEXP1
black
Expansion Card
9
Hood Sensor
HSENSE
white
Hood Sensor
10
DIMM4 (Channel A)
DIMM4
white
Memory Module
11
DIMM3 (Channel A)
DIMM3
black
Memory Module
12
DIMM2 (Channel B)
DIMM2
white
Memory Module
13
DIMM1 (Channel B)
DIMM1
black
Memory Module
14
Power
SATA PWR1
black
SATA Optical Drives
15
Power
SATA PWR0
black
SATA Hard Drives
System Board Connections
81
Table 6-1 System Board Connections (continued)
No.
System Board Connector
System Board Label
Color
Component
16
USB
MEDIA
black
USB Device, such as a Media Card
Reader
17
USB
MEDIA2
black
USB Device, such as a Media Card
Reader
18
SATA 2.0
SATA2
white
3rd Hard Drive, or 1st Optical Drive if
no 3rd Hard Drive
19
SATA 3.0
SATA0
dark blue
1st Hard Drive
20
SATA 3.0
SATA1
light blue
2nd Hard Drive
21
SATA 2.0
SATA3
white
2nd Optical Drive, or 1st Optical
Drive if a 3rd Hard Drive exists
22
eSATA
ESATA
black
eSATA Adapter Cable, or 2nd
Optical Drive if a 3rd Hard Drive
exists
23
Serial Port
COMB
black
Serial Port
Memory
Description
Spare part number
8-GB, PC3-12800
689375-001
4-GB, PC3-12800
671613-001
2-GB, PC3-12800
671612-001
The computer comes with double data rate 3 synchronous dynamic random access memory (DDR3SDRAM) dual inline memory modules (DIMMs).
DIMMs
The memory sockets on the system board can be populated with up to four industry-standard DIMMs.
These memory sockets are populated with at least one preinstalled DIMM. To achieve the maximum
memory support, you can populate the system board with up to 16-GB of memory configured in a
high-performing dual channel mode.
DDR3-SDRAM DIMMs
CAUTION: This product DOES NOT support DDR3 Ultra Low Voltage (DDR3U) memory. The
processor is not compatible with DDR3U memory and if you plug DDR3U memory into the system
board, it can cause the physical damage to the DIMM or invoke system malfunction.
82
Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
For proper system operation, the DDR3-SDRAM DIMMs must be:
●
industry-standard 240-pin
●
unbuffered non-ECC PC3-12800 DDR3-1600 MHz-compliant
●
1.5 volt DDR3-SDRAM DIMMs
The DDR3-SDRAM DIMMs must also:
●
support CAS latency 11 DDR3 1600 MHz (11-11-11 timing)
●
contain the mandatory JEDEC SPD information
In addition, the computer supports:
●
512-Mbit, 1-Gbit, and 2-Gbit non-ECC memory technologies
●
single-sided and double-sided DIMMs
●
DIMMs constructed with x8 and x16 DDR devices; DIMMs constructed with x4 SDRAM are not
supported
NOTE:
The system will not operate properly if you install unsupported DIMMs.
Populating DIMM Sockets
There are four DIMM sockets on the system board, with two sockets per channel. The sockets are
labeled DIMM1, DIMM2, DIMM3, and DIMM4. Sockets DIMM1 and DIMM2 operate in memory
channel B. Sockets DIMM3 and DIMM4 operate in memory channel A.
The system will automatically operate in single channel mode, dual channel mode, or flex mode,
depending on how the DIMMs are installed.
●
The system will operate in single channel mode if the DIMM sockets are populated in one
channel only.
●
The system will operate in a higher-performing dual channel mode if the total memory capacity
of the DIMMs in Channel A is equal to the total memory capacity of the DIMMs in Channel B.
The technology and device width can vary between the channels. For example, if Channel A is
populated with two 1-GB DIMMs and Channel B is populated with one 2-GB DIMM, the system
will operate in dual channel mode.
●
The system will operate in flex mode if the total memory capacity of the DIMMs in Channel A is
not equal to the total memory capacity of the DIMMs in Channel B. In flex mode, the channel
populated with the least amount of memory describes the total amount of memory assigned to
dual channel and the remainder is assigned to single channel. For optimal speed, the channels
should be balanced so that the largest amount of memory is spread between the two channels.
If one channel will have more memory than the other, the larger amount should be assigned to
Channel A. For example, if you are populating the sockets with one 2-GB DIMM, and three 1-GB
DIMMs, Channel A should be populated with the 2-GB DIMM and one 1-GB DIMM, and Channel
B should be populated with the other two 1-GB DIMMs. With this configuration, 4-GB will run as
dual channel and 1-GB will run as single channel.
●
In any mode, the maximum operational speed is determined by the slowest DIMM in the system.
Memory
83
Installing DIMMs
CAUTION: You must disconnect the power cord and wait approximately 30 seconds for the power
to drain before adding or removing memory modules. Regardless of the power-on state, voltage is
always supplied to the memory modules as long as the computer is plugged into an active AC outlet.
Adding or removing memory modules while voltage is present may cause irreparable damage to the
memory modules or system board.
The memory module sockets have gold-plated metal contacts. When upgrading the memory, it is
important to use memory modules with gold-plated metal contacts to prevent corrosion and/or
oxidation resulting from having incompatible metals in contact with each other.
Static electricity can damage the electronic components of the computer or optional cards. Before
beginning these procedures, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by briefly touching a
grounded metal object. For more information, refer to Electrostatic Discharge Information on page 66.
When handling a memory module, be careful not to touch any of the contacts. Doing so may damage
the module.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 75).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 76).
3.
Open both latches of the memory module socket (1), and insert the memory module into the
socket (2).
Figure 6-7 Installing a DIMM
NOTE: A memory module can be installed in only one way. Match the notch on the module
with the tab on the memory socket.
Populate the black DIMM sockets before the white DIMM sockets.
For maximum performance, populate the sockets so that the memory capacity is spread as
equally as possible between Channel A and Channel B. Refer to Populating DIMM Sockets
on page 83 for more information.
84
Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
4.
Push the module down into the socket, ensuring that the module is fully inserted and properly
seated. Make sure the latches are in the closed position (3).
5.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to install any additional modules.
6.
Replace the computer access panel.
7.
Reconnect the power cord and turn on the computer.
8.
Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the access panel was removed.
The computer should automatically recognize the additional memory the next time you turn on the
computer.
Expansion Card
Description
Spare part number
nVidia Quadro NVS310 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
680653-001
nVidia Quadro NVS300 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
632486-001
AMD Radeon HD7450 PCIe x16 graphics card, 1 GB
682411-001
AMD Radeon HD6350 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
637995-001
AMD FirePro 2270 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
637213-001
Intel PRO/1000CT2 NIC, includes bracket
635523-001
HP FireWire / IEEE 1394a PCIe x1 Card
637591-001
The computer has three standard full-height PCI expansion slots, one PCI Express x1 expansion slot,
one PCI Express x16 expansion slot, and one PCI Express x16 expansion slot that is downshifted to
a x4 slot.
NOTE: You can install a PCI Express x1, x8, or x16 expansion card in the PCI Express x16 slots.
For dual graphics card configurations, the first (primary) card must be installed in the PCI Express
x16 slot that is NOT downshifted to a x4 slot.
To remove, replace, or add an expansion card:
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 75).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 76).
3.
Locate the correct vacant expansion socket on the system board and the corresponding
expansion slot on the back of the computer chassis.
Expansion Card
85
4.
Press straight down on the two green thumb tabs inside the chassis (1) and rotate the expansion
card retention latch up (2).
Figure 6-8 Opening the Expansion Slot Retainer
5.
Before installing an expansion card, remove the expansion slot cover or the existing expansion
card.
NOTE: Before removing an installed expansion card, disconnect any cables that may be
attached to the expansion card.
a.
If you are installing an expansion card in a vacant socket, remove the appropriate
expansion slot cover on the back of the chassis. Lift the expansion slot cover from the
expansion slot.
Figure 6-9 Removing an Expansion Slot Cover
86
Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
b.
If you are removing a standard PCI card or PCI Express x1 card, hold the card at each end
and carefully rock it back and forth until the connectors pull free from the socket. Lift the
card straight up to remove it. Be sure not to scrape the card against other components.
Figure 6-10 Removing a Standard PCI Expansion Card
c.
If you are removing a PCI Express x16 card, pull the retention arm on the back of the
expansion socket away from the card and carefully rock the card back and forth until the
connectors pull free from the socket. Lift the card straight up to remove it. Be sure not to
scrape the card against other components.
Figure 6-11 Removing a PCI Express x16 Expansion Card
6.
Store the removed card in anti-static packaging.
Expansion Card
87
7.
If you are not installing a new expansion card, install an expansion slot cover to close the open
slot.
CAUTION: After removing an expansion card, you must replace it with a new card or
expansion slot cover for proper cooling of internal components during operation.
8.
To install a new expansion card, slide the bracket on the end of the card down into the slot on
the back of the chassis and press the card down firmly into the socket on the system board.
Figure 6-12 Installing an Expansion Card
NOTE: When installing an expansion card, press firmly on the card so that the whole
connector seats properly in the expansion card slot.
9.
Close the expansion card retention latch, making sure that it snaps firmly into place.
10. Connect external cables to the installed card, if needed. Connect internal cables to the system
board, if needed.
11. Replace the computer access panel.
12. Reconnect the power cord and turn on the computer.
13. Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the computer access panel was removed.
14. Reconfigure the computer, if necessary.
88
Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
Drives
Description
Spare part number
16X SATA DVD±RW drive
660408-001
16X SATA DVD-ROM drive
581599-001
Blu-ray BD-RW SuperMulti DL Drive
656792-001
1 TB, 7200 rpm SATA hard drive
636930-001
500 GB, 7200 rpm, 2.5-inch, self-encrypting (SED), SATA hard drive
696442-001
500 GB, 7200 rpm SATA hard drive
636929-001
250 GB, 7200 rpm SATA hard drive
636927-001
256 GB Solid State Drive (SSD), self-encrypting (SED), SATA 6.0
680020-001
160 GB Solid State Drive (SSD), SATA 2.0
646809-001
128 GB Solid State Drive (SSD), SATA 2.0
665961-001
120 GB Solid State Drive (SSD), SATA 2.0
661841-001
20 GB Solid State Drive (SSD), SATA
683305-001
Drives
89
Drive Positions
Figure 6-13 Drive Positions (Minitower Configuration Shown)
Table 6-2 Drive Positions
1
Three 5.25-inch drive bays for optional drives (optical drives and media card reader shown)
2
Three 3.5-inch internal hard drive bays
NOTE: The drive configuration on your computer may be different than the drive configuration shown above.
The bottom 5.25-inch drive bay has a shorter depth than the upper two bays. The bottom bay
supports a half-height drive or other device that is no more than 14.5 cm (5.7 inches) in depth. Do not
try to force a larger drive, such as an optical drive, into the bottom bay. This could cause damage to
the drive and the system board. The use of unnecessary force when installing any drive into the drive
bay may result in damage to the drive.
To verify the type and size of the storage devices installed in the computer, run Computer Setup.
90
Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
Removing a Drive from a Drive Bay
CAUTION: All removable media should be taken out of a drive before removing the drive from the
computer.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 75).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 76).
3.
Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 77).
4.
Disconnect the drive cables, as indicated in the following illustrations:
CAUTION: When removing the cables, pull the tab or connector instead of the cable itself to
avoid damaging the cable.
●
If you are removing an optical drive, disconnect the power cable and data cable from the
back of the drive.
●
If you are removing a media card reader, disconnect the USB cable from the system board.
Figure 6-14 Disconnecting the Media Card Reader USB Cable
●
If you are removing a hard drive, disconnect the power cable and data cable from the back
of the drive.
Drives
91
5.
Remove the drive from the drive bay as follows:
●
To remove a 5.25-inch drive in the desktop configuration, press down on the yellow
drivelock mechanism (1) and slide the drive from the drive bay (2).
CAUTION: When the yellow drivelock is pressed, all the 5.25-inch drives are released so
do not tilt the unit and allow the drives to fall out.
Figure 6-15 Removing a 5.25-inch Drive in the Desktop Configuration (Optical Drive
shown)
92
Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
●
To remove a 5.25-inch drive in the minitower configuration, pull up on the green drivelock
mechanism (1) for that specific drive and slide the drive from the drive bay (2).
Figure 6-16 Removing a 5.25-inch Drive in the Minitower Configuration (Optical Drive
shown)
●
To remove a hard drive from one of the two lower internal hard drive bays, pull up on the
green hard drive drivelock mechanism (1) for that drive and slide the drive from the drive
bay (2).
Figure 6-17 Removing a Hard Drive from the Lower Two Bays
Drives
93
●
To remove a hard drive from the upper internal hard drive bay, remove the screw on the
side of the bay that secures the drive in place (1), then slide the drive out of the bay (2).
Figure 6-18 Removing a Hard Drive from the Upper Bay
94
Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
Installing Drives
When installing drives, follow these guidelines:
●
The primary Serial ATA (SATA) hard drive must be connected to the dark blue SATA connector
on the system board labeled SATA0. If you are adding a second hard drive, connect it to the
light blue SATA1 connector.
●
Connect the first SATA optical drive to the white SATA connector on the system board labeled
SATA2. If you are adding a second optical drive, connect it to the white SATA3 connector.
●
Connect an optional eSATA adapter cable to the black SATA connector on the system board
labeled ESATA.
●
Connect a media card reader USB cable to the USB connector on the system board labeled
MEDIA.
●
The power cable for the SATA optical drives is a two-headed cable this is plugged into the
system board with the first connector routed to the middle 5.25-inch bay and the second
connector routed to the top 5.25-inch bay.
●
The power cable for the SATA hard drives is a three-headed cable this is plugged into the
system board with the first connector routed to the bottom 3.5-inch bay, the second connector
routed to the middle 3.5-inch bay, and the third connector routed to the top 3.5-inch bay.
●
The system does not support Parallel ATA (PATA) optical drives or PATA hard drives.
●
You must install guide screws to ensure the drive will line up correctly in the drive cage and lock
in place. HP has provided extra guide screws installed on the chassis. The hard drive uses 6-32
isolation mounting guide screws in the lower two bays and standard 6-32 screws in the upper
bay. Four of each are installed on the hard drive bracket under the access panel. All other drives
use M3 metric screws, eight of which are installed on the optical drive bracket under the access
panel. The HP-supplied metric guide screws are black. The HP-supplied 6-32 isolation mounting
guide screws are silver and blue. The HP-supplied standard 6-32 screws are silver. If you are
Drives
95
replacing the primary hard drive, you must remove the four silver and blue 6-32 isolation
mounting guide screws from the old hard drive and install them in the new hard drive.
Figure 6-19 Extra Guide Screw Locations
No.
Guide Screw
Device
1
Black M3 Metric Screws
5.25-inch Drives
2
Silver 6-32 Standard Screws
3.5-inch Hard Drive in the Top Drive Bay (Bay 4)
3
Silver and Blue 6-32 Isolation Mounting Screws
3.5-inch Hard Drives in the Middle and Bottom Drive Bays
(Bays 5 and 6)
CAUTION: To prevent loss of work and damage to the computer or drive:
If you are inserting or removing a drive, shut down the operating system properly, turn off the
computer, and unplug the power cord. Do not remove a drive while the computer is on or in standby
mode.
Before handling a drive, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity. While handling a drive,
avoid touching the connector.
Handle a drive carefully; do not drop it.
Do not use excessive force when inserting a drive.
Avoid exposing a hard drive to liquids, temperature extremes, or products that have magnetic fields
such as monitors or speakers.
If a drive must be mailed, place the drive in a bubble-pack mailer or other protective packaging and
label the package “Fragile: Handle With Care.”
96
Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
Installing a 5.25-inch Drive into a Drive Bay
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 75).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 76).
3.
Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 77).
4.
If you are installing a drive in a bay covered by a bezel blank, remove the bezel blank. See Bezel
Blanks on page 80 for more information.
5.
Install four M3 metric guide screws in the lower holes on each side of the drive (1). HP has
provided four extra M3 metric guide screws on the 5.25-inch drive bracket under the access
panel. The M3 metric guide screws are black. Refer to Installing Drives on page 95 for an
illustration of the extra M3 metric guide screws location.
NOTE: When replacing the drive, transfer the four M3 metric guide screws from the old drive to
the new one.
CAUTION: Use only 5-mm long screws as guide screws. Longer screws can damage the
internal components of the drive.
Figure 6-20 Installing a 5.25-Inch Drive in a Minitower (top) and Desktop (bottom)
Drives
97
6.
Install the drive in the desired drive bay by sliding it all the way into the front of the drive cage
until it locks (2). The drivelock automatically secures the drive in the bay.
CAUTION: The bottom 5.25-inch drive bay has a shorter depth than the upper two bays. The
bottom bay supports a half-height drive or other device that is no more than 14.5 cm (5.7 inches)
in depth. Do not try to force a larger drive, such as an optical drive, into the bottom bay. This
could cause damage to the drive and the system board. The use of unnecessary force when
installing any drive into the drive bay may result in damage to the drive.
7.
Connect the power and data cables to the drive as indicated in the following illustrations.
a.
If you are installing an optical drive, connect the power cable and data cable to the back of
the drive.
NOTE: The power cable for the optical drives is a two-headed cable that is routed from
the system board to the rear of the optical drive bays.
b.
If your are installing a media card reader, connect the USB cable to the USB system board
connector labeled MEDIA.
Figure 6-21 Connecting the Media Card Reader USB Cable
8.
If you are installing a new drive, connect the opposite end of the data cable to the appropriate
system board connector.
NOTE: If you are installing a new SATA optical drive, connect the data cable for the first optical
drive to the white SATA connector on the system board labeled SATA2. Connect the data cable
for a second optical drive to the white SATA connector on the system board labeled SATA3.
Refer to System Board Connections on page 81 for an illustration of the system board drive
connectors.
9.
Replace the front bezel and computer access panel.
10. Reconnect the power cord and turn on the computer.
11. Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the computer access panel was removed.
98
Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
Installing a Hard Drive into an Internal Drive Bay
NOTE:
The system does not support Parallel ATA (PATA) hard drives.
Before you remove the old hard drive, be sure to back up the data from the old hard drive so that you
can transfer the data to the new hard drive.
To install a hard drive in a 3.5-inch internal drive bay:
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 75).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 76).
3.
Install guide screws on the sides of the drive. The type of screws used depends on which drive
bay is being used to house the drive. If you are installing a 2.5-inch drive, you must install the
drive in an adapter bracket.
NOTE: Extra guide screws are installed on the hard drive bracket under the access panel.
Refer to Installing Drives on page 95 for an illustration of the extra guide screw locations.
If you are replacing a drive, transfer the guides screws from the old drive to the new one.
●
If you are installing a 3.5-inch drive in either of the lower two bays (bays 5 and 6), install
four 6-32 silver and blue isolation mounting guide screws (two on each side of the drive).
Figure 6-22 Installing Isolation Mounting Guide Screws in a 3.5-inch Hard Drive
Drives
99
●
If you are installing a 2.5-inch hard drive into either of the lower two bays (bays 5 and 6), do
the following:
◦
Slide the drive into the bay adapter bracket, ensuring the connector on the drive is fully
inserted into the connector on the adapter bracket.
Figure 6-23 Sliding the 2.5-inch Drive in the Adapter Bracket
◦
Secure the drive to the bay adapter bracket by installing four black M3 adapter bracket
screws through the sides of the bracket into the drive.
Figure 6-24 Securing the Drive in the Adapter Bracket
100 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
◦
Install four 6-32 silver and blue isolation mounting guide screws in the adapter bracket
(two on each side of the bracket).
Figure 6-25 Installing Isolation Mounting Guide Screws in the Adapter Bracket
●
If you are installing the drive in the upper bay (bay 4), install three standard 6-32 silver
guide screws (two on the right side and one on the left side in the screw hole closest to the
power and data connectors).
Figure 6-26 Installing Standard Guide Screws
Drives 101
4.
Insert the hard drive into the bay as follows:
CAUTION: Make sure the guide screws line up with the guide slots in the drive cage. The use
of unnecessary force when installing any drive into the drive bay may result in damage to the
drive.
●
If you are installing a hard drive into one of the lower two bays (bays 5 and 6), slide the
hard drive into the drive bay until it locks. The drivelock automatically secures the drive in
the bay.
Figure 6-27 Installing a Hard Drive into the Lower Two Bays
102 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
●
If you are installing a hard drive into the upper bay (bay 4), slide the hard drive into the
drive bay (1) then secure the drive in place with a standard 6-32 screw (2).
Figure 6-28 Installing a Hard Drive into the Upper Bay
5.
Connect the power cable and data cable to the rear of the hard drive.
NOTE: The power cable for the hard drives is a three-headed cable that is routed from the
system board to the rear of the hard drive bays.
6.
Connect the opposite end of the data cable to the appropriate system board connector.
NOTE: If your system has only one SATA hard drive, you must connect the hard drive data
cable to the dark blue connector labeled SATA0 to avoid any hard drive performance problems.
If you are adding a second hard drive, connect the data cable to the light blue connector labeled
SATA1.
7.
Replace the computer access panel.
8.
Reconnect the power cord and turn on the computer.
9.
Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the computer access panel was removed.
Drives 103
Hood Sensor
Description
Spare part number
Hood sensor
638816-001
The hood sensor is located on the top of the rear chassis panel.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 75).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 76).
3.
Unplug the hood sensor cable from the connector labeled HSENSE on the system board (1).
4.
Slide the hood sensor straight out of the slot in the chassis (2).
Figure 6-29 Removing the hood sensor
To reinstall the hood sensor, reverse the removal procedure.
104 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
Front I/O, USB Assembly
Description
Spare part number
Front I/O and USB assembly
646821-001
The front I/O, USB assembly is mounted to the front of the chassis and is removed by pulling it away
from the chassis.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 75).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 76).
3.
Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 77).
4.
Disconnect the three cables from the following system board connectors:
●
Yellow connector labeled FRONT USB
●
Green connector labeled FRONT USB2
●
Blue connector labeled FRONT AUD
NOTE: The blue FRONT AUD connector is not located near the other two connectors
used for the front I/O assembly. See the following image for its location.
Front I/O, USB Assembly 105
5.
Remove the Torx T15 screw that secures the assembly to the front of the chassis.
6.
Rotate the right side of the assembly away from the chassis.
Figure 6-30 Removing the front I/O, USB, power switch assembly
7.
Pull the assembly toward the right and away from the chassis while threading the wires through
the slot between the drive cage and chassis front and the hole in the front of the chassis.
To reinstall the assembly, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: When reinstalling the cables, route the blue cable through the top hard drive cage slot and
route the green and yellow through the bottom hard drive cage slot.
106 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
Power Switch Assembly
Description
Spare part number
Power switch/LED assembly
646820-001
The power switch assembly is mounted to the front of the chassis and removed by pulling it away
from the chassis.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 75).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 76).
3.
Remove the computer access panel (Front Bezel on page 77).
4.
Disconnect the cable from the black system board connector labeled PB/LED.
5.
Press downward on the tabs (1) at the top of the assembly.
6.
Rotate the top of the assembly downward (2), and then pull it away from the chassis while
threading the wires through the hole in the front of the chassis.
Figure 6-31 Removing the power switch assembly
To install the power switch assembly, reverse the removal procedure.
Power Switch Assembly 107
Speaker
Description
Spare part number
Speaker
645330-001
The speaker is mounted to the inside front of the chassis with two screws.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 75).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 76).
3.
Disconnect the speaker wire from the white system board connector labeled SPKR (1).
4.
From the inside of the unit, remove the two Torx T15 screws (2) that secure the speaker to the
front of the chassis.
5.
Rotate the top of the speaker downward slightly, and then remove it from the chassis (3).
Figure 6-32 Removing the speaker
To install the speaker, reverse the removal procedures.
NOTE:
When installing a speaker, place the wire on the side toward the side of the computer.
108 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
Rear Chassis Fan
Description
Spare part number
Rear chassis fan
643908-001
The rear fan is mounted to the rear chassis wall and secured by four Phillips screws.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 75).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 76).
3.
Disconnect the fan control cable (1) from the red/brown system board labeled CHFAN2.
4.
Remove the four Phillips screws (2) that secure the fan housing to the chassis.
5.
Remove the fan from the chassis (3).
Figure 6-33 Removing the rear chassis fan
To install the fan, reverse the removal procedure. Be sure to orient the air flow out of the unit.
Rear Chassis Fan 109
Fan sink
Description
Spare part number
Fan sink
643907-001
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 75).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 76).
3.
In the order indicated, loosen the four captive Torx screws that secure the fan sink to the system
board.
CAUTION: Fan sink retaining screws should be removed in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an
X) to even the downward forces on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on the
socket are very fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.
Figure 6-34 Loosening the fan sink screws
4.
Disconnect the fan cable from the white system board connector labeled CPUFAN (1).
110 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
5.
Lift the fan sink from the processor (2).
Figure 6-35 Removing the fan sink
When reinstalling the fan sink, make sure that its bottom has been cleaned with an alcohol wipe and
fresh thermal grease has been applied to the top of the processor.
CAUTION: Fan sink retaining screws should be tightened in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an X)
to evenly seat the fan sink on the processor. Failure to do so could result in damage that requires
replacing the system board.
Fan sink 111
Processor
Description
Spare part number
Intel Core i7 processor
3770, 3.4 GHz, 8-MB L3 cache, 95W
688164-001
Intel Core i5 processors
3570, 3.4 GHz, 6-MB L3 cache, 95W
688162-001
3470, 3.2 GHz, 6-MB L3 cache, 95W
687943-001
Intel Core i3 processors
2130, 3.4 GHz, 3-MB L3 cache, 65W
665120-001
2120, 3.3 GHz, 3-MB L3 cache, 65W
638629-001
Intel Pentium processors
G870, 3.0 GHz, 3-MB L3 cache
691936-001
G860, 3.0 GHz, 3-MB L3 cache
665123-001
G640, 2.8 GHz, 3-MB L3 cache
691935-001
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 75).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 76).
3.
Remove the heat sink (Fan sink on page 110).
4.
Rotate the locking lever to its full open position (1).
5.
Raise and rotate the microprocessor retainer to its fully open position (2).
112 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
6.
Carefully lift the processor from the socket (3).
CAUTION: Do NOT handle the pins in the processor socket. These pins are very fragile and
handling them could cause irreparable damage. Once pins are damaged it may be necessary to
replace the system board.
The heat sink must be installed within 24 hours of installing the processor to prevent damage to
the processor’s solder connections.
Figure 6-36 Removing the processor
To install a new processor:
1.
Place the processor in its socket and close the retainer. Make sure the slot in the processor fits
into the post on the socket.
Processor 113
2.
Secure the locking lever.
Figure 6-37 Installing the processor
If reusing the existing heat sink, go to step 3.
If using a new heat sink, go to step 5.
3.
If reusing the existing heat sink, apply the thermal grease provided in the spares kit to the top of
the processor.
4.
Clean the bottom of the heat sink with the provided alcohol pad and place it atop the processor.
5.
If using a new heat sink, remove the protective covering from the bottom of the heat sink and
place it in position atop the processor.
6.
Secure the heat sink to the system board and system board tray.
CAUTION: Heat sink retaining screws should be tightened in diagonally opposite pairs (as in
an X) to evenly seat the heat sink on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on
the socket are very fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.
NOTE: After installing a new processor onto the system board, always update the system ROM to
ensure that the latest version of the BIOS is being used on the computer. The latest system BIOS can
be found on the Web at: http://h18000.www1.hp.com/support/files.
114 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
Power Supply
Description
Spare part number
Power supply, 320W, 90% efficient
613764-001
Power supply, 320W
613765-001
WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the power supply provided with the computer, a
replacement power supply provided by HP, or a power supply purchased as an accessory from HP
should be used with the computer.
The power supply is secured to the rear of the chassis by four Torx screws. A lever on the chassis
floor also holds the power supply in place.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 75).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 76).
3.
Disconnect all power cables from the system board as follows:
●
white 4-pin PWRCPU
●
white 6-pin PWR
●
white 6-pin PWRCMD
4.
Remove the power cables from the white plastic clamp on the chassis floor.
5.
Remove the four Torx screws (1) that secure the power supply to the chassis.
6.
Press the tab (2) in front of the power supply, slide the power supply toward the front of the
computer, and then lift the power supply out of the chassis (3).
Figure 6-38 Removing the power supply
Power Supply 115
To install the power supply, reverse the removal procedure.
System Board
Description
Spare part number
System board for use in models without Windows 8 (includes replacement thermal material)
657096-001
System board for use in models with Windows 8 Standard (includes replacement thermal
material)
657096-501
System board for use in models with Windows 8 Professional (includes replacement thermal
material)
657096-601
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 75).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 76).
3.
When replacing the system board, make sure the following components are removed from the
defective system board and installed on the replacement system board:
●
Memory modules (seeMemory on page 82)
●
Expansion cards (Expansion Card on page 85)
●
Fan sink (Fan sink on page 110).
●
Processor (Processor on page 112)
4.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 76).
5.
Disconnect all cables connected to the system board, noting their location for reinstallation.
6.
Remove the 10 Torx T15 screws (1) that secure the system board to the chassis.
116 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
7.
Slide the system board toward the front of the computer so that the connectors loosen from the
rear of the chassis, and then lift the system board out of the computer (2).
Figure 6-39 Removing the system board
NOTE:
BIOS.
When replacing the system board, you must also change the chassis serial number in the
CAUTION: Before reinstalling the fan sink you must clean the top of the processor and the bottom
of the heat sink with an alcohol pad supplied in the spares kit. After the alcohol has evaporated, apply
thermal grease to the top of the processor from the syringe supplied in the spares kit.
Changing from a Minitower to a Desktop Configuration
1.
Remove/disengage any security devices that prohibit opening the computer.
2.
Remove all removable media, such as compact discs or USB flash drives, from the computer.
3.
Turn off the computer properly through the operating system, then turn off any external devices.
4.
Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet and disconnect any external devices.
CAUTION: Regardless of the power-on state, voltage is always present on the system board
as long as the system is plugged into an active AC outlet. You must disconnect the power cord
to avoid damage to the internal components of the computer.
5.
Remove the computer access panel.
6.
Remove the front bezel.
7.
Disconnect all power and data cables from the back of the drives in the 5.25-inch drive bays.
Changing from a Minitower to a Desktop Configuration 117
8.
To release the drives from the 5.25-inch drive bay, lift the release tab on the green latch drive
bracket for the drive (1). While lifting the release tab, slide the drive from its drive bay (2).
Repeat this step for each 5.25-inch drive.
Figure 6-40 Releasing the 5.25-inch Drives from the Drive Bays (Minitower)
9.
Gently slide the drive into the uppermost available bay until it snaps into place. When the drive is
properly inserted, the drivelock will secure it. Repeat this step for each drive.
Figure 6-41 Installing a Drive in the Desktop Configuration
CAUTION: The bottom 5.25-inch drive bay has a shorter depth than the upper two bays. The
bottom bay supports a half-height drive or other device that is no more than 14.5 cm (5.7 inches)
in depth. Do not try to force a larger drive, such as an optical drive, into the bottom bay. This
could cause damage to the drive and the system board. The use of unnecessary force when
installing any drive into the drive bay may result in damage to the drive.
10. Reconnect all power and data cables to the drives in the 5.25-inch drive bays.
118 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
11. Remove the bezel subpanel as described in Bezel Blanks on page 80.
CAUTION: Hold the subpanel straight when you pull it away from the front bezel. Pulling the
subpanel away at an angle could damage the pins that align it within the front bezel.
12. Reposition the bezel blanks within the subpanel in the proper orientation for the desktop
configuration.
13. Reposition the subpanel (rotate it 90º) with the logo at the bottom, then snap it back into the
bezel.
Figure 6-42 Changing from a Minitower to a Desktop Configuration
14. Replace the front bezel and computer access panel.
15. Reconnect the power cord and turn on the computer.
16. Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the computer access panel was removed.
Changing from a Desktop to a Minitower Configuration
1.
Remove/disengage any security devices that prohibit opening the computer.
2.
Remove all removable media, such as compact discs or USB flash drives, from the computer.
3.
Turn off the computer properly through the operating system, then turn off any external devices.
4.
Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet and disconnect any external devices.
CAUTION: Regardless of the power-on state, voltage is always present on the system board
as long as the system is plugged into an active AC outlet. You must disconnect the power cord
to avoid damage to the internal components of the computer.
5.
Remove the computer access panel.
6.
Remove the front bezel.
Changing from a Desktop to a Minitower Configuration 119
7.
Disconnect all power and data cables from the back of the drives in the 5.25-inch drive bays.
8.
To release the drives from the 5.25-inch drive bay, press down on the short yellow drivelock as
shown (1). While pressing the drivelock, pull the drives out of the drive bay (2).
Figure 6-43 Releasing the 5.25-inch Drives from the Drive Bays (Desktop)
9.
Gently slide the drive into the uppermost available bay until it snaps into place. When the drive is
properly inserted, the drivelock will secure it. Repeat this step for each drive.
Figure 6-44 Installing a Drive in the Minitower Configuration
CAUTION: The bottom 5.25-inch drive bay has a shorter depth than the upper two bays. The
bottom bay supports a half-height drive or other device that is no more than 14.5 cm (5.7 inches)
in depth. Do not try to force a larger drive, such as an optical drive, into the bottom bay. This
could cause damage to the drive and the system board. The use of unnecessary force when
installing any drive into the drive bay may result in damage to the drive.
120 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
10. Reconnect all power and data cables to the drives in the 5.25-inch drive bays.
11. Remove the bezel subpanel as described in the Bezel Blanks on page 80 section.
CAUTION: Hold the subpanel straight when you pull it away from the front bezel. Pulling the
subpanel away at an angle could damage the pins that align it within the front bezel.
12. Reposition the bezel blanks within the subpanel in the proper orientation for the minitower
configuration.
13. Reposition the subpanel (rotate it 90º) with the logo at the bottom, then snap it back into the
bezel.
Figure 6-45 Changing from a Desktop to a Minitower Configuration
14. Replace the front bezel and computer access panel.
15. Reconnect the power cord and turn on the computer.
16. Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the computer access panel was removed.
Changing from a Desktop to a Minitower Configuration 121
7
Removal and Replacement Procedures
Microtower (MT) Chassis
Adherence to the procedures and precautions described in this chapter is essential for proper service.
After completing all necessary removal and replacement procedures, run the Diagnostics utility to
verify that all components operate properly.
NOTE:
Not all features listed in this guide are available on all computers.
Preparation for Disassembly
See Routine Care, SATA Drive Guidelines, and Disassembly Preparation on page 66 for initial safety
procedures.
1.
Remove/disengage any security devices that prohibit opening the computer.
2.
Close any open software applications.
3.
Exit the operating system.
4.
Remove any diskette, compact disc, or media card from the computer.
5.
Turn off the computer and any peripheral devices that are connected to it.
CAUTION: Turn off the computer before disconnecting any cables.
Regardless of the power-on state, voltage is always present on the system board as long as the
system is plugged into an active AC outlet. In some systems the cooling fan is on even when the
computer is in the “Standby,” or “Suspend” modes. The power cord should always be
disconnected before servicing a unit.
6.
Disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet and then from the computer.
7.
Disconnect all peripheral device cables from the computer.
8.
As applicable, lay the computer down on its side to achieve a safe working position.
NOTE: During disassembly, label each cable as you remove it, noting its position and routing.
Keep all screws with the units removed.
CAUTION: The screws used in the computer are of different thread sizes and lengths; using the
wrong screw in an application may damage the unit.
122 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Microtower (MT) Chassis
Computer Access Panel
Description
Spare part number
Access panel
646825-001
To access internal components, you must remove the access panel:
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 122)
2.
Loosen the two captive thumbscrews (1) that secure the access panel to the computer chassis.
3.
Use the handle located between the thumbscrews to lift the access panel off the unit (2).
NOTE: You may want to lay the computer on its side to install internal parts. Be sure the side
with the access panel is facing up.
Figure 7-1 Removing the Computer Access Panel
Computer Access Panel 123
Front Bezel
Description
Spare part number
Front bezel
689377-001
Front bezel for use in China
689378-001
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 122)
2.
Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 123)
3.
Lift up the three tabs on the side of the bezel (1), then rotate the bezel off the chassis (2).
Figure 7-2 Removing the Front Bezel
124 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Microtower (MT) Chassis
Front Bezel Security
The front bezel can be locked in place by installing a security screw provided by HP. To install the
security screw:
1.
Remove/disengage any security devices that prohibit opening the computer.
2.
Remove all removable media, such as compact discs or USB flash drives, from the computer.
3.
Turn off the computer properly through the operating system, then turn off any external devices.
4.
Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet and disconnect any external devices.
CAUTION: Regardless of the power-on state, voltage is always present on the system board
as long as the system is plugged into an active AC outlet. You must disconnect the power cord
to avoid damage to the internal components of the computer.
5.
Remove the access panel and front bezel.
6.
Remove the security screw from the inside of the front bezel.
Figure 7-3 Retrieving the Front Bezel Security Screw
7.
Replace the front bezel.
Front Bezel Security 125
8.
Install the screw through the interior of the front of the chassis into the front bezel. The screw
hole is located toward the middle of the right edge of the chassis between the hard drive bay and
speaker.
Figure 7-4 Installing the Front Bezel Security Screw
9.
Replace the access panel.
10. Reconnect the power cord and turn on the computer.
11. Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the access panel was removed.
126 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Microtower (MT) Chassis
Bezel Blanks
Description
Spare part number
3.5-inch bezel blank
583653-001
5.25-inch bezel blank, optical drive
570838-001
On some models, there are bezel blanks covering the 3.5-inch and 5.25-inch drive bays that need to
be removed before installing a drive. To remove a bezel blank:
1.
Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 123)
2.
Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 124)
3.
To remove a bezel blank, push the two retaining tabs that hold the bezel blank in place towards
the outer right edge of the bezel (1) and slide the bezel blank back and to the right to remove it
(2).
Figure 7-5 Removing a Bezel Blank
Bezel Blanks 127
Memory
Description
Spare part number
8-GB, PC3-12800
689375-001
4-GB, PC3-12800
671613-001
2-GB, PC3-12800
671612-001
The computer comes with double data rate 3 synchronous dynamic random access memory (DDR3SDRAM) dual inline memory modules (DIMMs).
DIMMs
The memory sockets on the system board can be populated with up to four industry-standard DIMMs.
These memory sockets are populated with at least one preinstalled DIMM. To achieve the maximum
memory support, you can populate the system board with up to 16-GB of memory configured in a
high-performing dual channel mode.
DDR3-SDRAM DIMMs
CAUTION: This product DOES NOT support DDR3 Ultra Low Voltage (DDR3U) memory. The
processor is not compatible with DDR3U memory and if you plug DDR3U memory into the system
board, it can cause the physical damage to the DIMM or invoke system malfunction.
For proper system operation, the DDR3-SDRAM DIMMs must be:
●
industry-standard 240-pin
●
unbuffered non-ECC PC3-12800 DDR3-1600 MHz-compliant
●
1.5 volt DDR3-SDRAM DIMMs
The DDR3-SDRAM DIMMs must also:
●
support CAS latency 11 DDR3 1600 MHz (11-11-11 timing)
●
contain the mandatory JEDEC SPD information
In addition, the computer supports:
●
512-Mbit, 1-Gbit, and 2-Gbit non-ECC memory technologies
●
single-sided and double-sided DIMMs
●
DIMMs constructed with x8 and x16 DDR devices; DIMMs constructed with x4 SDRAM are not
supported
NOTE:
The system will not operate properly if you install unsupported DIMMs.
Populating DIMM Sockets
There are four DIMM sockets on the system board, with two sockets per channel. The sockets are
labeled DIMM1, DIMM2, DIMM3, and DIMM4. Sockets DIMM1 and DIMM2 operate in memory
channel B. Sockets DIMM3 and DIMM4 operate in memory channel A.
128 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Microtower (MT) Chassis
The system will automatically operate in single channel mode, dual channel mode, or flex mode,
depending on how the DIMMs are installed.
●
The system will operate in single channel mode if the DIMM sockets are populated in one
channel only.
●
The system will operate in a higher-performing dual channel mode if the total memory capacity
of the DIMMs in Channel A is equal to the total memory capacity of the DIMMs in Channel B.
The technology and device width can vary between the channels. For example, if Channel A is
populated with two 1-GB DIMMs and Channel B is populated with one 2-GB DIMM, the system
will operate in dual channel mode.
●
The system will operate in flex mode if the total memory capacity of the DIMMs in Channel A is
not equal to the total memory capacity of the DIMMs in Channel B. In flex mode, the channel
populated with the least amount of memory describes the total amount of memory assigned to
dual channel and the remainder is assigned to single channel. For optimal speed, the channels
should be balanced so that the largest amount of memory is spread between the two channels.
If one channel will have more memory than the other, the larger amount should be assigned to
Channel A. For example, if you are populating the sockets with one 2-GB DIMM, and three 1-GB
DIMMs, Channel A should be populated with the 2-GB DIMM and one 1-GB DIMM, and Channel
B should be populated with the other two 1-GB DIMMs. With this configuration, 4-GB will run as
dual channel and 1-GB will run as single channel.
●
In any mode, the maximum operational speed is determined by the slowest DIMM in the system.
Installing DIMMs
CAUTION: You must disconnect the power cord and wait approximately 30 seconds for the power
to drain before adding or removing memory modules. Regardless of the power-on state, voltage is
always supplied to the memory modules as long as the computer is plugged into an active AC outlet.
Adding or removing memory modules while voltage is present may cause irreparable damage to the
memory modules or system board.
The memory module sockets have gold-plated metal contacts. When upgrading the memory, it is
important to use memory modules with gold-plated metal contacts to prevent corrosion and/or
oxidation resulting from having incompatible metals in contact with each other.
Static electricity can damage the electronic components of the computer or optional cards. Before
beginning these procedures, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by briefly touching a
grounded metal object. For more information, refer to Electrostatic Discharge Information on page 66.
When handling a memory module, be careful not to touch any of the contacts. Doing so may damage
the module.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 122)
2.
Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 123)
Memory 129
3.
Open both latches of the memory module socket (1), and insert the memory module into the
socket (2).
Figure 7-6 Installing a DIMM
NOTE: A memory module can be installed in only one way. Match the notch on the module
with the tab on the memory socket.
Populate the black DIMM sockets before the white DIMM sockets.
For maximum performance, populate the sockets so that the memory capacity is spread as
equally as possible between Channel A and Channel B. Refer to Populating DIMM Sockets
on page 128 for more information.
4.
Push the module down into the socket, ensuring that the module is fully inserted and properly
seated. Make sure the latches are in the closed position (3).
5.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to install any additional modules.
6.
Replace the computer access panel.
7.
Reconnect the power cord and turn on the computer.
8.
Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the access panel was removed.
The computer should automatically recognize the additional memory the next time you turn on the
computer.
Expansion Cards
Description
Spare part number
nVidia Quadro NVS310 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
680653-001
nVidia Quadro NVS300 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
632486-001
AMD Radeon HD7450 PCIe x16 graphics card, 1 GB
682411-001
AMD Radeon HD6350 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
637995-001
130 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Microtower (MT) Chassis
Description
Spare part number
AMD FirePro 2270 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
637213-001
Intel PRO/1000CT2 NIC, includes bracket
635523-001
HP FireWire / IEEE 1394a PCIe x1 Card
637591-001
The computer has one PCI expansion slot, one PCI Express x1 expansion slot, one PCI Express x16
expansion slot, and one PCI Express x16 expansion slot that is downshifted to a x4 slot.
NOTE:
You can install a PCI Express x1, x4, x8, or x16 expansion card in the PCI Express x16 slot.
For dual graphics card configurations, the first (primary) card must be installed in the PCI Express
x16 slot that is NOT downshifted to a x4 slot.
To remove, replace, or add an expansion card:
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 122)
2.
Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 123)
3.
Locate the correct vacant expansion socket on the system board and the corresponding
expansion slot on the back of the computer chassis.
4.
Release the slot cover retention latch that secures the PCI slot covers by lifting the green tab on
the latch and rotating the latch to the open position.
Figure 7-7 Opening the Expansion Slot Retainer
Expansion Cards 131
5.
Before installing an expansion card, remove the expansion slot cover or the existing expansion
card.
NOTE: Before removing an installed expansion card, disconnect any cables that may be
attached to the expansion card.
a.
If you are installing an expansion card in a vacant socket, remove the appropriate
expansion slot cover on the back of the chassis. Pull the slot cover straight up then away
from the inside of the chassis.
Figure 7-8 Removing an Expansion Slot Cover
132 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Microtower (MT) Chassis
b.
If you are removing a standard PCI card or PCI Express x1 card, hold the card at each end,
and carefully rock it back and forth until the connectors pull free from the socket. Pull the
expansion card straight up from the socket then away from the inside of the chassis to
release it from the chassis frame. Be sure not to scrape the card against the other
components.
Figure 7-9 Removing a Standard PCI Expansion Card
Expansion Cards 133
c.
If you are removing a PCI Express x16 card, pull the retention arm on the back of the
expansion socket away from the card and carefully rock the card back and forth until the
connectors pull free from the socket. Pull the expansion card straight up from the socket
then away from the inside of the chassis to release it from the chassis frame. Be sure not to
scrape the card against the other components.
Figure 7-10 Removing a PCI Express x16 Expansion Card
6.
Store the removed card in anti-static packaging.
7.
If you are not installing a new expansion card, install an expansion slot cover to close the open
slot.
CAUTION: After removing an expansion card, you must replace it with a new card or
expansion slot cover for proper cooling of internal components during operation.
134 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Microtower (MT) Chassis
8.
To install a new expansion card, hold the card just above the expansion socket on the system
board then move the card toward the rear of the chassis so that the bracket on the card is
aligned with the open slot on the rear of the chassis. Press the card straight down into the
expansion socket on the system board.
Figure 7-11 Installing an Expansion Card
NOTE: When installing an expansion card, press firmly on the card so that the whole
connector seats properly in the expansion card slot.
9.
Rotate the slot cover retention latch back in place to secure the expansion card.
Figure 7-12 Closing the Expansion Slot Retainer
10. Connect external cables to the installed card, if needed. Connect internal cables to the system
board, if needed.
11. Replace the computer access panel.
Expansion Cards 135
12. Reconnect the power cord and turn on the computer.
13. Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the access panel was removed.
14. Reconfigure the computer, if necessary.
System Board Connections
Refer to the following illustrations and tables to identify the system board connectors for your model.
Figure 7-13 System Board Connections
Table 7-1 System Board Connections
No.
System Board Connector
System Board Label
Color
Component
1
DIMM4 (Channel A)
DIMM4
white
Memory Module
2
DIMM3 (Channel A)
DIMM3
black
Memory Module
3
DIMM2 (Channel B)
DIMM2
white
Memory Module
4
DIMM1 (Channel B)
DIMM1
black
Memory Module
5
Power
SATAPWR1
black
SATA Optical Drives
6
Power
SATAPWR0
black
SATA Hard Drives
7
SATA 3.0
SATA0
dark blue
1st Hard Drive
8
SATA 3.0
SATA1
light blue
2nd Hard Drive, or 2nd Optical Drive
if an ESATA Adapter Cable exists
9
SATA 2.0
SATA2
white
1st Optical Drive
10
eSATA
ESATA
black
eSATA Adapter Cable, or 2nd
Optical Drive
11
Parallel Port
PAR
black
Parallel Port
12
Serial Port
COMB
black
Serial Port
13
USB
MEDIA
black
USB Device, such as a Media Card
Reader
136 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Microtower (MT) Chassis
Table 7-1 System Board Connections (continued)
No.
System Board Connector
System Board Label
Color
Component
14
Hood Lock
HLCK
black
USB Device, such as a Media Card
Reader
15
Hood Sensor
HSENSE
white
Hood Sensor
16
USB
MEDIA2
black
Second Media Card Reader
17
PCI Express x1
X1PCIEXP1
black
Expansion Card
18
PCI Express x16 downshifted
to a x4
X4PCIEXP
white
Expansion Card
19
PCI Express x16
X16PCIEXP
black
Expansion Card
20
PCI
PCI1
white
Expansion Card
System Board Connections 137
Drives
Description
Spare part number
16X SATA DVD±RW drive
660408-001
16X SATA DVD-ROM drive
581599-001
Blu-ray BD-RW SuperMulti DL Drive
656792-001
1 TB, 7200 rpm SATA hard drive
636930-001
500 GB, 7200 rpm, 2.5-inch, self-encrypting (SED), SATA hard drive
696442-001
500 GB, 7200 rpm SATA hard drive
636929-001
250 GB, 7200 rpm SATA hard drive
636927-001
256 GB Solid State Drive (SSD), self-encrypting (SED), SATA 6.0
680020-001
180 GB Solid State Drive (SSD), SATA 6.0
160 GB Solid State Drive (SSD), SATA 3.0
646809-001
128 GB Solid State Drive (SSD), SATA 2.0
665961-001
120 GB Solid State Drive (SSD), SATA 2.0
661841-001
20 GB Solid State Drive (SSD), SATA
683305-001
When installing drives, follow these guidelines:
●
The primary Serial ATA (SATA) hard drive must be connected to the dark blue primary SATA
connector on the system board labeled SATA0. If you are adding a second hard drive, connect it
to the light blue connector on the system board labeled SATA1.
●
Connect the first SATA optical drive to the white SATA connector on the system board labeled
SATA2. If you are adding a second optical drive connect it to the black SATA connector on the
system board labeled ESATA. If the ESATA connector is already populated, connect the second
optical drive to the light blue connector on the system board labeled SATA1.
●
Connect an optional eSATA adapter cable to the black SATA connector on the system board
labeled ESATA.
●
Connect a media card reader USB cable to the USB connector on the system board labeled
MEDIA.
●
The power cable for the SATA optical drives is a two-headed cable this is plugged into the
system board with the first connector routed to the top 5.25-inch bay and the second connector
routed to the bottom 5.25-inch bay.
●
The power cable for the SATA hard drives is a two-headed cable this is plugged into the system
board with the first connector routed to the bottom 3.5-inch bay and the second connector routed
to the top 3.5-inch bay.
●
The system does not support Parallel ATA (PATA) optical drives or PATA hard drives.
●
You must install guide screws to ensure the drive will line up correctly in the drive cage and lock
in place. HP has provided extra guide screws for the drive bays (four 6-32 isolation mounting
guide screws and eight M3 metric guide screws), installed on the side of the drive bays. The
138 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Microtower (MT) Chassis
6-32 isolation mounting screws are required for a secondary hard drive. All other drives (except
the primary hard drive) use M3 metric screws. The HP-supplied metric screws are black and the
HP-supplied isolation mounting screws are silver and blue. If you are replacing the primary hard
drive, you must remove the four silver and blue 6-32 isolation mounting guide screws from the
old hard drive and install them in the new hard drive.
Figure 7-14 Extra Guide Screw Locations
No.
Guide Screw
Device
1
Black M3 Metric Screws
All Drives (except hard drives)
2
Silver and Blue 6-32 Isolation Mounting Screws
Secondary Hard Drive
CAUTION: To prevent loss of work and damage to the computer or drive:
If you are inserting or removing a drive, shut down the operating system properly, turn off the
computer, and unplug the power cord. Do not remove a drive while the computer is on or in standby
mode.
Before handling a drive, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity. While handling a drive,
avoid touching the connector.
Handle a drive carefully; do not drop it.
Do not use excessive force when inserting a drive.
Avoid exposing a hard drive to liquids, temperature extremes, or products that have magnetic fields
such as monitors or speakers.
If a drive must be mailed, place the drive in a bubble-pack mailer or other protective packaging and
label the package “Fragile: Handle With Care.”
Drives 139
Drive Positions
Figure 7-15 Drive Positions
Table 7-2 Drive Positions
1
Two 5.25-inch drive bays for optional drives (optical drives shown)
2
One 3.5-inch drive bay for optional drive (media card reader shown)
3
Secondary 3.5-inch internal hard drive bay for optional hard drive
4
Primary 3.5-inch internal hard drive bay
NOTE: The drive configuration on your computer may be different than the drive
configuration shown above.
To verify the type and size of the storage devices installed in the computer, run Computer Setup.
Removing a 5.25-inch or 3.5-inch Drive from a Drive Bay
CAUTION: All removable media should be taken out of a drive before removing the drive from the
computer.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 122)
2.
Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 123)
3.
Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 124)
4.
Disconnect the drive cables, as indicated in the following illustrations.
CAUTION: When removing the cables, pull the tab or connector instead of the cable itself to
avoid damaging the cable.
a.
If you are removing an optical drive, disconnect the power cable and data cable from the
back of the drive.
140 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Microtower (MT) Chassis
b.
If you are removing a media card reader, disconnect the USB cable from the system board.
Figure 7-16 Disconnecting the Media Card Reader USB Cable
5.
A latch drive bracket with release tabs secures the drives in the drive bay. Lift the release tab on
the latch drive bracket (1) for the drive you want to remove, then slide the drive from its drive bay
(2).
Figure 7-17 Removing the Drives
Drives 141
Installing a 5.25-inch or 3.5-inch Drive into a Drive Bay
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 122)
2.
Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 123)
3.
Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 124)
4.
If you are installing a drive in a bay covered by a bezel blank, remove the bezel blank. See Bezel
Blanks on page 127 for more information.
5.
Install four M3 metric guide screws in the lower holes on each side of the drive. HP has provided
eight extra M3 metric guide screws on the front of the chassis, under the front bezel. The M3
metric guide screws are black. Refer to Drives on page 138 for an illustration of the extra M3
metric guide screws location.
NOTE: When replacing the drive, transfer the four M3 metric guide screws from the old drive to
the new one.
CAUTION: Use only 5-mm long screws as guide screws. Longer screws can damage the
internal components of the drive.
Figure 7-18 Installing Guide Screws (Optical Drive Shown)
6.
Slide the drive into the drive bay, making sure to align the guide screws with the guide slots, until
the drive snaps into place.
Figure 7-19 Sliding the Drives into the Drive Cage
142 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Microtower (MT) Chassis
7.
Connect the power and data cables to the drive as indicated in the following illustrations.
a.
If you are installing an optical drive, connect the power cable and data cable to the back of
the drive.
NOTE: The power cable for the optical drives is a two-headed cable that is routed from
the system board to the rear of the optical drive bays.
b.
If your are installing a media card reader, connect the USB cable to the USB system board
connector labeled MEDIA.
Figure 7-20 Connecting the Media Card Reader USB Cable
8.
If installing a new drive, connect the opposite end of the data cable to the appropriate system
board connector.
NOTE: If you are installing a new SATA optical drive, connect the data cable for the first optical
drive to the white SATA connector on the system board labeled SATA2. Connect the data cable
for a second optical drive to the black SATA connector on the system board labeled ESATA. If
the ESATA connector is already populated, connect the second optical drive to the light blue
connector labeled SATA1.
Refer to System Board Connections on page 136 for an illustration of the system board drive
connectors.
9.
Replace the front bezel and computer access panel.
10. Reconnect the power cord and any external devices, then turn on the computer.
11. Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the access panel was removed.
Drives 143
Removing a Hard Drive from a Drive Bay
NOTE: Before you remove the old hard drive, be sure to back up the data from the old hard drive so
that you can transfer the data to the new hard drive.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 122)
2.
Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 123)
3.
Disconnect the power cable and data cable from the back of the hard drive.
4.
Release the drive by pulling the release tab away from the drive (1) and sliding the drive out of
the bay (2).
Figure 7-21 Removing a Hard Drive
5.
Remove the four guide screws (two on each side) from the old drive. You will need these screws
to install a new drive.
Installing a Hard Drive into an Internal Drive Bay
NOTE:
The system does not support Parallel ATA (PATA) hard drives.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 122)
2.
Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 123)
144 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Microtower (MT) Chassis
3.
Install guide screws on the sides of the drive. If you are installing a 2.5-inch drive, you must
install the drive in an adapter bracket.
NOTE: The hard drive uses 6-32 isolation mounting guide screws. Four extra guide screws are
installed on the exterior of the hard drive bays. The HP-supplied isolation mounting guide screws
are silver and blue. Refer to Drives on page 138 for an illustration of the extra 6-32 isolation
mounting guide screws location.
If you are replacing a drive, transfer the guides screws from the old drive to the new one.
●
If you are installing a 3.5-inch hard drive, install four isolation mounting guide screws (two
on each side of the drive).
Figure 7-22 Installing Isolation Mounting Guide Screws in a 3.5-inch Drive
●
If you are installing a 2.5-inch hard drive:
◦
Install four 6-32 silver and blue isolation mounting guide screws in the adapter bracket
(two on each side of the bracket).
◦
Install the drive into the slot on the adapter bracket with the PCA side facing down,
aligning the three tabs on the bracket with the drive. Ensure that the power and data
connectors on the drive are properly oriented.
Figure 7-23 Installing the Drive in the Adapter Bracket
◦
Hold the drive and bracket firmly together and turn the assembly over. Install four M3
screws to secure the drive to the bracket.
Drives 145
4.
Slide the drive into the drive bay, making sure to align the guide screws with the guide slots, until
the drive snaps into place. The bottom bay is for the primary hard drive. The upper bay is for an
optional secondary hard drive.
Figure 7-24 Sliding a Hard Drive into the Drive Bay
5.
Connect the power cable and data cable to the back of the hard drive.
NOTE: The power cable for the hard drives is a two-headed cable that is routed from the
system board to the rear of the hard drive bays.
6.
If installing a new drive, connect the opposite end of the data cable to the appropriate system
board connector.
NOTE: If your system has only one SATA hard drive, you must connect the hard drive data
cable to the dark blue connector labeled SATA0 to avoid any hard drive performance problems.
If you are adding a second hard drive, connect the data cable to the light blue connector labeled
SATA1.
7.
Route the power and data cables in their cable retainers.
8.
Replace the computer access panel.
9.
Reconnect the power cord and any external devices, then turn on the computer.
10. Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the access panel was removed.
146 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Microtower (MT) Chassis
Front Fan Assembly
Description
Spare part number
Front fan assembly
585884-001
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 75).
2.
Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 123).
3.
Remove the cables from the clip on the top of the fan assembly.
Figure 7-25 Removing the cables from atop the front fan assembly
4.
Unplug the fan cable from the system board connector labeled CHFAN.
Front Fan Assembly 147
5.
Press the lever that secures the assembly to the chassis (1), pivot the assembly forward toward
the front of the computer (2), and then lift the assembly straight up and out of the computer (3).
Figure 7-26 Removing the front fan assembly
To reinstall the front fan, reverse the removal procedure.
148 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Microtower (MT) Chassis
Front I/O Assembly
Description
Spare part number
Front I/O assembly
646827-001
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 75).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 123).
3.
Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 124).
4.
Remove the front fan (Front Fan Assembly on page 147).
5.
Disconnect the three front I/O cables (yellow, green, and blue) from the system board
connectors (FRONT USB1, FRONT USB2, and FRONT AUD).
6.
Remove the Torx T15 screw that secures the assembly to the chassis.
Figure 7-27 Removing the front I/O assembly screw
7.
Rotate the left side of the assembly to the right .
Figure 7-28 Removing the front I/O assembly
8.
Pull the assembly away from the computer while threading the wires through the hole in the front
of the chassis.
To reinstall the assembly, reverse the removal procedure.
Front I/O Assembly 149
Power Switch/LED Assembly
Description
Spare part number
Power switch/LED assembly
646828-001
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 75).
2.
Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 123).
3.
Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 124).
4.
Remove the front fan (Front Fan Assembly on page 147).
5.
Disconnect the cable from the system board connector labeled PB/LED.
6.
With the computer on its side, press on the tabs on the bottom of the assembly (1) to disengage
the assembly from the chassis, and then rotate the bottom of the assembly upward (2) to
remove it from the chassis.
Figure 7-29 Removing the power switch/LED
7.
Pull the assembly away from the chassis while threading the cable through the hole in front of
the chassis.
150 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Microtower (MT) Chassis
Heat sink
Description
Spare part number
Heat sink
645326-001
WARNING! To reduce risk of personal injury from hot surfaces, allow the internal system
components to cool before touching.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 75).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 123).
3.
Remove the front fan (Front Fan Assembly on page 147).
4.
Loosen the four silver captive Torx T15 screws that secure the heat sink to the system board.
CAUTION: Remove heat sink retaining screws in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an X) to even
the downward forces on the processor. The pins on the socket are very fragile and any damage
to them may require replacing the system board.
Figure 7-30 Removing the heat sink
Heat sink 151
5.
Lift the heat sink from atop the processor.
When reinstalling the heat sink, make sure that its bottom has been cleaned with an alcohol wipe and
fresh thermal grease has been applied to the top of the processor.
CAUTION: Heat sink retaining screws should be tightened in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an X)
to evenly seat the heat sink on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on the socket
are very fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.
152 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Microtower (MT) Chassis
Processor
Description
Spare part number
Intel Core i7 processor
3770, 3.4 GHz, 8-MB L3 cache, 95W
688164-001
Intel Core i5 processors
3570, 3.4 GHz, 6-MB L3 cache, 95W
688162-001
3470, 3.2 GHz, 6-MB L3 cache, 95W
687943-001
Intel Core i3 processors
2130, 3.4 GHz, 3-MB L3 cache, 65W
665120-001
2120, 3.3 GHz, 3-MB L3 cache, 65W
638629-001
Intel Pentium processors
G870, 3.0 GHz, 3-MB L3 cache
691936-001
G860, 3.0 GHz, 3-MB L3 cache
665123-001
G640, 2.8 GHz, 3-MB L3 cache
691935-001
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 75).
2.
Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 123).
3.
Remove the heat sink (Heat sink on page 151).
4.
Rotate the locking lever to its full open position (1).
5.
Raise and rotate the microprocessor retainer to its fully open position (2).
Processor 153
6.
Carefully lift the processor from the socket (3).
CAUTION: Do NOT handle the pins in the processor socket. These pins are very fragile and
handling them could cause irreparable damage. Once pins are damaged it may be necessary to
replace the system board.
The heat sink must be installed within 24 hours of installing the processor to prevent damage to
the processor’s solder connections.
154 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Microtower (MT) Chassis
To install a new processor:
1.
Place the processor in its socket and close the retainer.
2.
Secure the locking lever.
If reusing the existing heat sink, go to step 3.
If using a new heat sink, go to step 5.
3.
If reusing the existing heat sink, apply the thermal grease provided in the spares kit to the top of
the processor.
4.
Clean the bottom of the heat sink with the provided alcohol pad and place it atop the processor.
5.
If using a new heat sink, remove the protective covering from the bottom of the heat sink and
place it in position atop the processor.
6.
Secure the heat sink to the system board and system board tray with the four captive screws
and attach the heat sink control cable to the system board.
CAUTION: Heat sink retaining screws should be tightened in diagonally opposite pairs (as in
an X) to evenly seat the heat sink on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on
the socket are very fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.
NOTE: After installing a new processor onto the system board, always update the system ROM to
ensure that the latest version of the BIOS is being used on the computer. The latest system BIOS can
be found on the Web at: http://h18000.www1.hp.com/support/files.
Processor 155
Speaker
Description
Spare part number
Speaker
645330-001
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 75).
2.
Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 123).
3.
Remove the front fan assembly (Front Fan Assembly on page 147).
4.
Disconnect the speaker wire from the system board connector labeled SPKR.
5.
From the inside of the chassis, remove the two silver Torx T15 screws (1) that secure the
speaker to the chassis.
6.
Rotate the top of the speaker downward (2), and then remove it from the chassis.
Figure 7-31 Removing the speaker
To replace the speaker, reverse the removal procedures.
156 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Microtower (MT) Chassis
Rear Chassis Fan
Description
Spare part number
Rear chassis fan
636922-001
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 75).
2.
Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 123).
3.
Remove the four silver Phillips screws that secure the fan to the chassis.
Figure 7-32 Rear fan screws
4.
Disconnect the fan control cable (1) from the system board connector labeled CHFAN2.
Rear Chassis Fan 157
5.
Lift the fan out of the chassis (2).
Figure 7-33 Removing the rear fan
To install the fan assembly, reverse the removal procedure. Be sure to orient the air flow out of the
unit.
158 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Microtower (MT) Chassis
Power Supply
Description
Spare part number
Power supply, 320W, 90% efficient
613764-001
Power supply, 320W
613765-001
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 75).
2.
Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 123).
3.
Disconnect the power cables from the white 6-pin system board connector labeled PWR and the
4-pin white system board connector labeled P3.
4.
Remove the power cables from the clip on the base pan.
5.
Remove the four silver Torx T15 screws that connect the power supply to the chassis.
Figure 7-34 Power supply screws
6.
Press the tab (1) on the base pan in front of the power supply that holds it in place.
Power Supply 159
7.
Slide the power supply toward the front of the computer (2), rotate toward the fan so the power
supply clears the lip on the top of the chassis, and then lift the power supply out of the chassis
(3).
Figure 7-35 Removing the power supply
To install the power supply, reverse the removal procedure.
160 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Microtower (MT) Chassis
System Board
Description
Spare part number
System board for use in models without Windows 8 (includes thermal material)
657094-001
System board for use in models with Windows 8 Standard (includes replacement thermal
material)
657094-501
System board for use in models with Windows 8 Professional (includes replacement thermal
material)
657094-601
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 75).
2.
Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 123).
3.
Remove the front fan assembly (Front Fan Assembly on page 147).
4.
When replacing the system board, make sure the following components are removed from the
defective system board and installed on the replacement system board:
●
Memory modules (Memory on page 128)
●
Expansion cards (Expansion Cards on page 130)
●
Heat sink (Heat sink on page 151).
●
Processor (Processor on page 153)
5.
Remove all expansion boards (Expansion Cards on page 130).
6.
Disconnect all cables connected to the system board, noting their location for reinstallation.
7.
Remove the eight Torx T15 screws that secure the system board to the chassis.
Figure 7-36 System board screws
System Board 161
8.
Slide the system board toward the front of the computer to disengage the I/O panel (1), lift the
rear of the system board up at an angle (2), and then lift the system board out of the computer
(3).
Figure 7-37 Removing the system board
When reinstalling the system board, first insert the I/O panel back into the slots in the rear of the
chassis, and then align the board with the chassis screw holes.
NOTE:
When replacing the system board, you must change the chassis serial number in the BIOS.
162 Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures Microtower (MT) Chassis
8
Removal and Replacement Procedures
Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
Adherence to the procedures and precautions described in this chapter is essential for proper service.
After completing all necessary removal and replacement procedures, run the Diagnostics utility to
verify that all components operate properly.
NOTE:
Not all features listed in this guide are available on all computers.
Preparation for Disassembly
See Routine Care, SATA Drive Guidelines, and Disassembly Preparation on page 66 for initial safety
procedures.
1.
Remove/disengage any security devices that prohibit opening the computer.
2.
Close any open software applications.
3.
Exit the operating system.
4.
Remove any compact disc or media card from the computer.
5.
Turn off the computer and any peripheral devices that are connected to it.
CAUTION: Turn off the computer before disconnecting any cables.
Regardless of the power-on state, voltage is always present on the system board as long as the
system is plugged into an active AC outlet. In some systems the cooling fan is on even when the
computer is in the “Standby,” or “Suspend” modes. The power cord should always be
disconnected before servicing a unit.
6.
Disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet and then from the computer.
7.
Disconnect all peripheral device cables from the computer.
NOTE: During disassembly, label each cable as you remove it, noting its position and routing.
Keep all screws with the units removed.
CAUTION: The screws used in the computer are of different thread sizes and lengths; using
the wrong screw in an application may damage the unit.
Preparation for Disassembly 163
Access Panel
Description
Spare part number
Access panel
646815-001
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 163).
2.
If the computer is on a stand, remove the computer from the stand.
3.
Lift up on the access panel handle (1) then lift the access panel off the computer (2).
Figure 8-1 Removing the access panel
To install the access panel, reverse the removal procedure.
164 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
Front Bezel
Description
Spare part number
Front bezel
687950-001
5.25-inch bezel blank, optical drive
570838-001
3.5-inch bezel blank
583653-001
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 163).
2.
Remove the access panel (Access Panel on page 164).
3.
Lift up the three tabs on the side of the bezel (1), then rotate the bezel off the chassis (2).
Figure 8-2 Removing the front bezel
To install the front bezel, reverse the removal procedure.
Front Bezel 165
Front Bezel Security
The front bezel can be locked in place by installing a security screw provided by HP. To install the
security screw:
1.
Remove/disengage any security devices that prohibit opening the computer.
2.
Remove all removable media, such as compact discs or USB flash drives, from the computer.
3.
Turn off the computer properly through the operating system, then turn off any external devices.
4.
Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet and disconnect any external devices.
CAUTION: Regardless of the power-on state, voltage is always present on the system board
as long as the system is plugged into an active AC outlet. You must disconnect the power cord
to avoid damage to the internal components of the computer.
5.
If the computer is on a stand, remove the computer from the stand.
6.
Remove the access panel and front bezel.
7.
Remove one of the five silver 6-32 standard screws located on the front of the chassis behind
the bezel.
Figure 8-3 Retrieving the Front Bezel Security Screw
8.
Replace the front bezel.
166 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
9.
Install the security screw next to the middle front bezel release tab to secure the front bezel in
place.
Figure 8-4 Installing the Front Bezel Security Screw
10. Replace the access panel.
11. If the computer was on a stand, replace the stand.
12. Reconnect the power cord and turn on the computer.
13. Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the access panel was removed.
Front Bezel Security 167
Bezel Blanks
On some models, there are bezel blanks covering the 3.5-inch and 5.25-inch external drive bays that
need to be removed before installing a drive. To remove a bezel blank:
1.
Remove the access panel (Access Panel on page 164).
2.
Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 165)..
3.
To remove a bezel blank, push the two retaining tabs that hold the bezel blank in place towards
the outer right edge of the bezel (1) and slide the bezel blank back and to the right to remove it
(2).
Figure 8-5 Removing a bezel blank
4.
Replace the front bezel.
168 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
Memory
Description
Spare part number
8-GB, PC3-12800
689375-001
4-GB, PC3-12800
671613-001
2-GB, PC3-12800
671612-001
The computer comes with double data rate 3 synchronous dynamic random access memory (DDR3SDRAM) dual inline memory modules (DIMMs).
DIMMs
The memory sockets on the system board can be populated with up to four industry-standard DIMMs.
These memory sockets are populated with at least one preinstalled DIMM. To achieve the maximum
memory support, you can populate the system board with up to 16-GB of memory configured in a
high-performing dual channel mode.
DDR3-SDRAM DIMMs
CAUTION: This product DOES NOT support DDR3 Ultra Low Voltage (DDR3U) memory. The
processor is not compatible with DDR3U memory and if you plug DDR3U memory into the system
board, it can cause the physical damage to the DIMM or invoke system malfunction.
For proper system operation, the DDR3-SDRAM DIMMs must be:
●
industry-standard 240-pin
●
unbuffered non-ECC PC3-12800 DDR3-1600 MHz-compliant
●
1.5 volt DDR3-SDRAM DIMMs
The DDR3-SDRAM DIMMs must also:
●
support CAS latency 11 DDR3 1600 MHz (11-11-11 timing)
●
contain the mandatory JEDEC SPD information
In addition, the computer supports:
●
512-Mbit, 1-Gbit, and 2-Gbit non-ECC memory technologies
●
single-sided and double-sided DIMMs
●
DIMMs constructed with x8 and x16 DDR devices; DIMMs constructed with x4 SDRAM are not
supported
NOTE:
The system will not operate properly if you install unsupported DIMMs.
Populating DIMM Sockets
There are four DIMM sockets on the system board, with two sockets per channel. The sockets are
labeled DIMM1, DIMM2, DIMM3, and DIMM4. Sockets DIMM1 and DIMM2 operate in memory
channel B. Sockets DIMM3 and DIMM4 operate in memory channel A.
Memory 169
The system will automatically operate in single channel mode, dual channel mode, or flex mode,
depending on how the DIMMs are installed.
●
The system will operate in single channel mode if the DIMM sockets are populated in one
channel only.
●
The system will operate in a higher-performing dual channel mode if the total memory capacity
of the DIMMs in Channel A is equal to the total memory capacity of the DIMMs in Channel B.
The technology and device width can vary between the channels. For example, if Channel A is
populated with two 1-GB DIMMs and Channel B is populated with one 2-GB DIMM, the system
will operate in dual channel mode.
●
The system will operate in flex mode if the total memory capacity of the DIMMs in Channel A is
not equal to the total memory capacity of the DIMMs in Channel B. In flex mode, the channel
populated with the least amount of memory describes the total amount of memory assigned to
dual channel and the remainder is assigned to single channel. For optimal speed, the channels
should be balanced so that the largest amount of memory is spread between the two channels.
If one channel will have more memory than the other, the larger amount should be assigned to
Channel A. For example, if you are populating the sockets with one 2-GB DIMM, and three 1-GB
DIMMs, Channel A should be populated with the 2-GB DIMM and one 1-GB DIMM, and Channel
B should be populated with the other two 1-GB DIMMs. With this configuration, 4-GB will run as
dual channel and 1-GB will run as single channel.
●
In any mode, the maximum operational speed is determined by the slowest DIMM in the system.
Installing DIMMs
CAUTION: You must disconnect the power cord and wait approximately 30 seconds for the power
to drain before adding or removing memory modules. Regardless of the power-on state, voltage is
always supplied to the memory modules as long as the computer is plugged into an active AC outlet.
Adding or removing memory modules while voltage is present may cause irreparable damage to the
memory modules or system board.
The memory module sockets have gold-plated metal contacts. When upgrading the memory, it is
important to use memory modules with gold-plated metal contacts to prevent corrosion and/or
oxidation resulting from having incompatible metals in contact with each other.
Static electricity can damage the electronic components of the computer or optional cards. Before
beginning these procedures, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by briefly touching a
grounded metal object. For more information, refer to Electrostatic Discharge Information on page 66.
When handling a memory module, be careful not to touch any of the contacts. Doing so may damage
the module.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 163).
2.
Remove the access panel (Access Panel on page 164).
3.
Rotate up the internal drive bay housing to access the memory module sockets on the system
board.
170 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
4.
Open both latches of the memory module socket (1), and insert the memory module into the
socket (2).
Figure 8-6 Installing a DIMM
NOTE: A memory module can be installed in only one way. Match the notch on the module
with the tab on the memory socket.
Populate the black DIMM sockets before the white DIMM sockets.
For maximum performance, populate the sockets so that the memory capacity is spread as
equally as possible between Channel A and Channel B. Refer to Populating DIMM Sockets
on page 169 for more information.
5.
Push the module down into the socket, ensuring that the module is fully inserted and properly
seated. Make sure the latches are in the closed position (3).
6.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 to install any additional modules.
7.
Replace the access panel.
8.
If the computer was on a stand, replace the stand.
9.
Reconnect the power cord and turn on the computer.
10. Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the access panel was removed.
The computer should automatically recognize the additional memory the next time you turn on the
computer.
Memory 171
Expansion Card
Description
Spare part number
nVidia Quadro NVS310 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
680653-001
nVidia Quadro NVS300 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
632486-001
AMD Radeon HD7450 PCIe x16 graphics card, 1 GB
682411-001
AMD Radeon HD6350 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
637995-001
AMD FirePro 2270 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
637213-001
Intel PRO/1000CT2 NIC, includes bracket
635523-001
HP FireWire / IEEE 1394a PCIe x1 Card
637591-001
The computer has one PCI expansion slot, one PCI Express x1 expansion slot, one PCI Express x16
expansion slot, and one PCI Express x16 expansion slot that is downshifted to a x4 slot.
NOTE:
The PCI and PCI Express slots support only low profile cards.
You can install a PCI Express x1, x4, x8, or x16 expansion card in the PCI Express x16 slot.
For dual graphics card configurations, the first (primary) card must be installed in the PCI Express
x16 slot that is NOT downshifted to a x4 slot (8300 models).
To remove, replace, or add an expansion card:
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 163).
2.
Remove the access panel (Access Panel on page 164).
3.
Locate the correct vacant expansion socket on the system board and the corresponding
expansion slot on the back of the computer chassis.
172 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
4.
Release the slot cover retention latch that secures the PCI slot covers by lifting the green tab on
the latch and rotating the latch to the open position.
Figure 8-7 Opening the Expansion Slot Retainer
5.
Before installing an expansion card, remove the expansion slot cover or the existing expansion
card.
NOTE: Before removing an installed expansion card, disconnect any cables that may be
attached to the expansion card.
a.
If you are installing an expansion card in a vacant socket, remove the appropriate
expansion slot cover on the back of the chassis. Pull the slot cover straight up then away
from the inside of the chassis.
Figure 8-8 Removing an Expansion Slot Cover
Expansion Card 173
b.
If you are removing a standard PCI card or PCI Express x1 card, hold the card at each end,
and carefully rock it back and forth until the connectors pull free from the socket. Pull the
expansion card straight up from the socket (1) then away from the inside of the chassis to
release it from the chassis frame (2). Be sure not to scrape the card against the other
components.
Figure 8-9 Removing a Standard PCI Expansion Card
c.
If you are removing a PCI Express x16 card, pull the retention arm on the back of the
expansion socket away from the card and carefully rock the card back and forth until the
connectors pull free from the socket. Pull the expansion card straight up from the socket
then away from the inside of the chassis to release it from the chassis frame. Be sure not to
scrape the card against the other components.
Figure 8-10 Removing a PCI Express x16 Expansion Card
6.
Store the removed card in anti-static packaging.
174 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
7.
If you are not installing a new expansion card, install an expansion slot cover to close the open
slot.
CAUTION: After removing an expansion card, you must replace it with a new card or
expansion slot cover for proper cooling of internal components during operation.
8.
To install a new expansion card, hold the card just above the expansion socket on the system
board then move the card toward the rear of the chassis (1) so that the bracket on the card is
aligned with the open slot on the rear of the chassis. Press the card straight down into the
expansion socket on the system board (2).
Figure 8-11 Installing an Expansion Card
NOTE: When installing an expansion card, press firmly on the card so that the whole
connector seats properly in the expansion card slot.
Expansion Card 175
9.
Rotate the slot cover retention latch back in place to secure the expansion card.
Figure 8-12 Closing the Expansion Slot Retainer
10. Connect external cables to the installed card, if needed. Connect internal cables to the system
board, if needed.
11. Replace the computer access panel.
12. If the computer was on a stand, replace the stand.
13. Reconnect the power cord and turn on the computer.
14. Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the access panel was removed.
15. Reconfigure the computer, if necessary.
176 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
System Board Connections
Refer to the following illustration and table to identify the system board connectors for your model.
Figure 8-13 System Board Connections
Table 8-1 System Board Connections
No.
System Board Connector
System Board Label
Color
Component
1
DIMM4 (Channel A)
DIMM4
white
Memory Module
2
DIMM3 (Channel A)
DIMM3
black
Memory Module
3
DIMM2 (Channel B)
DIMM2
white
Memory Module
4
DIMM1 (Channel B)
DIMM1
black
Memory Module
5
Power
SATAPWR1
black
(unused)
6
Power
SATAPWR0
black
SATA Optical and Hard Drives
7
SATA 3.0
SATA0
dark blue
1st Hard Drive
8
SATA 3.0
SATA1
light blue
2nd Hard Drive, or 2nd Optical Drive
if an ESATA Adapter Cable exists
9
SATA 2.0
SATA2
white
1st Optical Drive
10
eSATA
ESATA
black
eSATA Adapter Cable, or 2nd
Optical Drive
11
Parallel Port
PAR
black
Parallel Port
12
Serial Port
COMB
black
Serial Port
13
USB
MEDIA
black
USB Device, such as a Media Card
Reader
14
Hood Lock
HLCK
black
Hood Lock
15
Hood Sensor
HSENSE
white
Hood Sensor
16
USB
MEDIA2
black
USB Device, such as a Media Card
Reader
System Board Connections 177
Table 8-1 System Board Connections (continued)
No.
System Board Connector
System Board Label
Color
Component
17
PCI Express x1
X1PCIEXP1
black
Expansion Card
18
PCI Express x16 downshifted
to a x4
X4PCIEXP
white
Expansion Card
19
PCI Express x16
X16PCIEXP
black
Expansion Card
20
PCI
PCI1
white
Expansion Card
Drives
Description
Spare part number
16X SATA DVD±RW drive
660408-001
16X SATA DVD-ROM drive
581599-001
Blu-ray BD-RW SuperMulti DL Drive
656792-001
1 TB, 7200 rpm SATA hard drive
636930-001
500 GB, 7200 rpm SATA hard drive
636929-001
250 GB, 7200 rpm SATA hard drive
636927-001
256 GB Solid State Drive (SSD), self-encrypting (SED), SATA 6.0
680020-001
180 GB Solid State Drive (SSD), SATA 6.0
696622-001
160 GB Solid State Drive (SSD), SATA 3.0
646809-001
128 GB Solid State Drive (SSD), SATA 2.0
665961-001
120 GB Solid State Drive (SSD), SATA 2.0
661841-001
20 GB Solid State Drive (SSD), SATA
683305-001
Drive Positions
Figure 8-14 Drive Positions
178 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
Table 8-2 Drive Positions
1
3.5-inch internal hard drive bay
2
3.5-inch drive bay for optional drives (media card reader shown)
3
5.25-inch drive bay for optional drives (optical drive shown)
NOTE: The drive configuration on your computer may be different than the drive
configuration shown above.
To verify the type and size of the storage devices installed in the computer, run Computer Setup.
Installing and Removing Drives
When installing drives, follow these guidelines:
●
The primary Serial ATA (SATA) hard drive must be connected to the dark blue primary SATA
connector on the system board labeled SATA0. If you are adding a second hard drive, connect it
to the light blue connector on the system board labeled SATA1.
●
Connect a SATA optical drive to the white SATA connector on the system board labeled SATA2.
●
Connect an optional eSATA adapter cable to the black SATA connector on the system board
labeled ESATA.
●
Connect a media card reader USB cable to the USB connector on the system board labeled
MEDIA.
●
The power cable for the SATA drives is a three-headed cable that is plugged into the system
board with the first connector routed to the rear of the hard drive, the second connector routed to
the rear of the 3.5” drive, and the third connector routed to the rear of the 5.25” optical drive.
●
The system does not support Parallel ATA (PATA) optical drives or PATA hard drives.
●
You must install guide screws to ensure the drive will line up correctly in the drive cage and lock
in place. HP has provided extra guide screws for the drive bays (five 6-32 standard screws and
four M3 metric screws), installed in the front of the chassis, under the front bezel. The 6-32
standard screws are required for a secondary hard drive. All other drives (except the primary
hard drive) use M3 metric screws. The HP-supplied metric screws are black and the HPsupplied standard screws are silver. If you are replacing the primary hard drive, you must
Drives 179
remove the four silver and blue 6-32 isolation mounting guide screws from the old hard drive and
install them in the new hard drive.
Figure 8-15 Extra Guide Screw Locations
No.
Guide Screw
Device
1
Black M3 Metric Screws
All Drives (except primary and secondary hard drives)
2
Silver 6-32 Standard Screws
Secondary Hard Drive
There are at total of five extra silver 6-32 standard screws. Four are used as guide screws for a
secondary hard drive. The fifth is used for bezel security (see Front Bezel Security on page 166 for more
information).
CAUTION: To prevent loss of work and damage to the computer or drive:
If you are inserting or removing a drive, shut down the operating system properly, turn off the
computer, and unplug the power cord. Do not remove a drive while the computer is on or in standby
mode.
Before handling a drive, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity. While handling a drive,
avoid touching the connector.
Handle a drive carefully; do not drop it.
Do not use excessive force when inserting a drive.
Avoid exposing a hard drive to liquids, temperature extremes, or products that have magnetic fields
such as monitors or speakers.
If a drive must be mailed, place the drive in a bubble-pack mailer or other protective packaging and
label the package “Fragile: Handle With Care.”
Removing a 5.25-inch Drive from a Drive Bay
CAUTION: All removable media should be taken out of a drive before removing the drive from the
computer.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 163).
2.
Remove the access panel (Access Panel on page 164).
180 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
3.
Rotate the drive cage to its upright position.
4.
If removing an optical drive, disconnect the power cable and data cable from the rear of the
optical drive.
CAUTION: When removing the cables, pull the tab or connector instead of the cable itself to
avoid damaging the cable.
5.
Rotate the drive cage back down to its normal position.
CAUTION: Be careful not to pinch any cables or wires when rotating the drive cage down.
6.
Press down on the green drive retainer button located on the left side of the drive to disengage
the drive from the drive cage (1). While pressing the drive retainer button, slide the drive back
until it stops, then lift it up and out of the drive cage (2).
Figure 8-16 Removing the 5.25-inch Drive
Installing a 5.25-inch Drive into a Drive Bay
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 163).
2.
Remove the access panel (Access Panel on page 164).
3.
If you are installing a drive in a bay covered by a bezel blank, remove the front bezel then
remove the bezel blank. See Bezel Blanks on page 168 for more information.
Drives 181
4.
Install four M3 metric guide screws in the lower holes on each side of the drive. HP has provided
four extra M3 metric guide screws on the front of the chassis, under the front bezel. The M3
metric guide screws are black. Refer to Installing and Removing Drives on page 179 for an
illustration of the extra M3 metric guide screws location.
NOTE: When replacing the drive, transfer the four M3 metric guide screws from the old drive to
the new one.
CAUTION: Use only 5-mm long screws as guide screws. Longer screws can damage the
internal components of the drive.
Figure 8-17 Installing Guide Screws in the Optical Drive
5.
Position the guide screws on the drive into the J-slots in the drive bay. Then slide the drive
toward the front of the computer until it locks into place.
Figure 8-18 Installing the Optical Drive
6.
Rotate the drive cage to its upright position.
7.
Connect the SATA data cable to the white SATA system board connector labeled SATA2.
8.
Route the data cable through the cable guides.
CAUTION: There are two cable guides that keep the data cable from being pinched by the
drive cage when raising or lowering it. One is located on the bottom side of the drive cage. The
other is located on the chassis frame under the drive cage. Ensure that the data cable is routed
through these guides before connecting it to the optical drive.
182 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
9.
Connect the power cable and data cable to the rear of the optical drive.
NOTE: The power cable for the optical drive is a three-headed cable that is routed from the
system board to the hard drive, then to the rear of the optical drive.
10. Rotate the drive cage back down to its normal position.
CAUTION: Be careful not to pinch any cables or wires when rotating the drive cage down.
11. Replace the front bezel (if removed) and access panel.
12. If the computer was on a stand, replace the stand.
13. Reconnect the power cord and turn on the computer.
14. Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the access panel was removed.
Drives 183
Removing a 3.5-inch Drive from a Drive Bay
CAUTION: All removable media should be taken out of a drive before removing the drive from the
computer.
The 3.5-inch drive is located underneath the 5.25-inch drive. You must remove the 5.25-inch drive
before removing the 3.5-inch drive.
1.
Follow the procedure in Removing a 5.25-inch Drive from a Drive Bay on page 180 to remove
the 5.25-inch drive and access the 3.5-inch drive.
CAUTION: Ensure that the computer is turned off and that the power cord is disconnected
from the electrical outlet before proceeding.
2.
Disconnect the drive cables from the rear of the drive, or, if you are removing a media card
reader, disconnect the USB cable from the system board as indicated in the following illustration.
Figure 8-19 Disconnecting the Media Card Reader USB Cable
184 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
3.
Press down on the green drive retainer button located on the left side of the drive to disengage
the drive from the drive cage (1). While pressing the drive retainer button, slide the drive back
until it stops, then lift it up and out of the drive cage (2).
Figure 8-20 Removing a 3.5-inch Drive (Media Card Reader Shown)
Installing a 3.5-inch Drive into a Drive Bay
The 3.5-inch bay is located underneath the 5.25-inch drive. To install a drive into the 3.5-inch bay:
NOTE: Install guide screws to ensure the drive will line up correctly in the drive cage and lock in
place. HP has provided extra guide screws for the drive bays (four 6-32 standard screws and four M3
metric screws), installed in the front of the chassis, under the front bezel. A secondary hard drive
uses 6-32 standard screws. All other drives (except the primary hard drive) use M3 metric screws.
The HP-supplied M3 metric screws are black and the HP-supplied 6-32 standard screws are silver.
Refer to Installing and Removing Drives on page 179 for illustrations of the guide screw locations.
1.
Follow the procedure in Removing a 5.25-inch Drive from a Drive Bay on page 180 to remove
the 5.25-inch drive and access the 3.5-inch drive bay.
CAUTION: Ensure that the computer is turned off and that the power cord is disconnected
from the electrical outlet before proceeding.
2.
If you are installing a drive in a bay covered by a bezel blank, remove the front bezel then
remove the bezel blank. See Bezel Blanks on page 168 for more information.
3.
Install guide screws in the holes on each side of the drive.
Figure 8-21 Installing Guide Screws (Media Card Reader Shown)
Drives 185
4.
Position the guide screws on the drive into the J-slots in the drive bay. Then slide the drive
toward the front of the computer until it locks into place.
Figure 8-22 Installing a Drive into the 3.5-inch Drive Bay (Media Card Reader Shown)
5.
Connect the appropriate drive cables:
a.
If installing a second hard drive, connect the power cable and data cable to the rear of the
drive and connect the other end of the data cable to the light blue connector on the system
board labeled SATA1.
b.
If installing a media card reader, connect the USB cable from the media card reader to the
USB connector on the system board labeled MEDIA.
Figure 8-23 Connecting the Media Card Reader USB Cable
NOTE: Refer to System Board Connections on page 177 for an illustration of the system
board drive connectors.
6.
Replace the 5.25-inch drive.
186 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
7.
Replace the front bezel (if removed) and access panel.
8.
If the computer was on a stand, replace the stand.
9.
Reconnect the power cord and turn on the computer.
10. Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the access panel was removed.
Removing and Replacing the Primary 3.5-inch Internal Hard Drive
NOTE: Before you remove the old hard drive, be sure to back up the data from the old hard drive so
that you can transfer the data to the new hard drive.
The preinstalled 3.5-inch hard drive is located under the power supply. To remove and replace the
hard drive:
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 163).
2.
Remove the access panel (Access Panel on page 164).
3.
Rotate the drive cage for internal drives to its upright position.
4.
Rotate the power supply to its upright position. The hard drive is located beneath the power
supply.
Figure 8-24 Raising the Power Supply
5.
Disconnect the power cable and data cable from the back of the hard drive.
Drives 187
6.
Press down on the green release latch next to the hard drive (1). While holding the latch down,
slide the drive forward until it stops, then lift the drive up and out of the bay (2).
Figure 8-25 Removing the Hard Drive
7.
To install a hard drive, you must transfer the silver and blue isolation mounting guide screws
from the old hard drive to the new hard drive.
Figure 8-26 Installing Hard Drive Guide Screws
188 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
8.
Align the guide screws with the slots on the chassis drive cage, press the hard drive down into
the bay, then slide it back until it stops and locks in place.
Figure 8-27 Installing the Hard Drive
9.
Connect the power cable and data cable to the back of the hard drive.
NOTE: If the system has only one SATA hard drive, the data cable must be connected to the
dark blue connector labeled SATA0 on the system board to avoid any hard drive performance
problems.
10. Rotate the drive cage for internal drives and the power supply down to their normal positions.
11. Replace the access panel.
12. If the computer was on a stand, replace the stand.
13. Reconnect the power cord and turn on the computer.
14. Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the access panel was removed.
Drives 189
Fan duct
Description
Spare part number
Fan duct
636921-001
The fan duct sits between the front fan and the heat sink.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 163).
2.
Remove the access panel (Access Panel on page 164).
3.
Lift the fan duct straight up out of the chassis.
Figure 8-28 Removing the fan duct
To install the fan duct, reverse the removal procedure.
190 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
Front Fan Assembly
Description
Spare part number
Front fan
645327-001
The front fan assembly is attached to the front of the chassis.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 163).
2.
Remove the access panel (Access Panel on page 164).
3.
Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 165).
4.
Remove the baffle (Fan duct on page 190).
5.
Disconnect the fan cable from the red/brown system board connector labeled CHFAN.
Figure 8-29 Disconnecting the front fan cable
6.
Press the tabs that secure the fan assembly to the front of the chassis (1).
Front Fan Assembly 191
7.
Pull the assembly toward the rear of the unit (2), and then lift it out of the chassis.
Figure 8-30 Removing the front fan
To install the front fan, reverse the removal procedure. Be sure to orient the air flow into the unit.
192 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
Hood Sensor
Description
Spare part number
Hood sensor
638816-001
The hood sensor is attached in a slot in the rear of the chassis.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 163).
2.
Remove the access panel (Access Panel on page 164).
3.
Unplug the sensor cable from the system board connector labeled HSENSE (1).
4.
Slide the hood sensor straight out of the notch in the chassis (2).
NOTE: A flat blade screwdriver can be used to push the hood sensor out of the slot.
Figure 8-31 Removing the hood sensor from the chassis fan
To install the hood sensor, reverse the removal procedure.
Hood Sensor 193
Front I/O, Power Switch Assembly
Description
Spare part number
Front I/O and power switch assembly
636926-001
The front I/O and power switch/LEDs is one assembly, attached to the front of the chassis. Push the
assembly into the chassis to remove.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 163).
2.
Remove the access panel (Access Panel on page 164).
3.
Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 165).
4.
Remove the chassis fan (Front Fan Assembly on page 191).
5.
Rotate the drive cage to its upright position.
6.
Disconnect the four cables from the system board as follows:
●
Yellow connector labeled FRONT_USB
●
Green connector labeled FRONT_USB2
●
Blue connector labeled FRONT AUD
●
Black connector labeled PB/LED
Figure 8-32 Disconnecting the front I/O, power switch/LED assembly cables
7.
Remove the Torx T15 screw (1) that secures the assembly to the front of the chassis.
194 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
8.
Route the cables through the slots beneath the drive cage, rotate the assembly into the chassis
(2), and then remove the assembly from the computer.
Figure 8-33 Removing the front I/O, power switch/LED assembly screw
To install the front I/O and power switch assembly, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Be sure to correctly route the cables beneath the drive cage when reinstalling the assembly.
Proper cable routing prevents damage to the cables and allows the drive cage to close properly.
Front I/O, Power Switch Assembly 195
Speaker
Description
Spare part number
Speaker
636925-001
The speaker is attached to the front of the chassis under the rotating drive cage.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 163).
2.
Remove the access panel (Access Panel on page 164).
3.
Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 165).
4.
Rotate the drive cage to its upright position.
5.
Disconnect the speaker wire from the white system board labeled SPKR (1).
6.
Remove the Torx screw that secures the speaker to the chassis (2).
7.
Lift the speaker from the inside of the chassis to remove it (3).
Figure 8-34 Removing the speaker
To install the speaker, reverse the removal procedures.
196 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
Heat sink
Description
Spare part number
Heat sink
645326-001
The heat sink is secured atop the processor with four captive Torx screws. The heat sink does not
include a fan.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 163).
2.
Remove the access panel (Access Panel on page 164).
3.
Remove the fan duct (Fan duct on page 190).
4.
Remove the front fan (Front Fan Assembly on page 191).
Heat sink 197
5.
Loosen the four captive Torx T15 screws that secure the heat sink to the system board tray.
CAUTION: Remove heat sink retaining screws in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an X) to even
the downward forces on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on the socket are
very fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.
Figure 8-35 Removing the heat sink
6.
Lift the heat sink from atop the processor, and set it on its side to keep from contaminating the
work area with thermal grease.
When reinstalling the heat sink, make sure that its bottom has been cleaned with an alcohol wipe and
fresh thermal grease has been applied to the top of the processor.
CAUTION: Heat sink retaining screws should be tightened in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an X)
to evenly seat the heat sink on the processor to avoid damage that could require replacing the system
board.
Failure to install the fan duct may cause the computer to overheat.
Processor
Description
Intel Core i7 processor
198 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
Spare part number
Description
Spare part number
3770, 3.4 GHz, 8-MB L3 cache, 95W
688164-001
Intel Core i5 processors
3570, 3.4 GHz, 6-MB L3 cache, 95W
688162-001
3470, 3.2 GHz, 6-MB L3 cache, 95W
687943-001
Intel Core i3 processors
2130, 3.4 GHz, 3-MB L3 cache, 65W
665120-001
2120, 3.3 GHz, 3-MB L3 cache, 65W
638629-001
Intel Pentium processors
G870, 3.0 GHz, 3-MB L3 cache
691936-001
G860, 3.0 GHz, 3-MB L3 cache
665123-001
G640, 2.8 GHz, 3-MB L3 cache
691935-001
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 163).
2.
Remove the access panel (Access Panel on page 164).
3.
Remove the fan duct (Fan duct on page 190).
4.
Remove the front fan assembly (Front Fan Assembly on page 191).
5.
Remove the heat sink (Heat sink on page 197).
6.
Rotate the locking lever to its full open position (1).
7.
Raise and rotate the microprocessor retainer to its fully open position (2).
Processor 199
8.
Carefully lift the processor from the socket (3).
CAUTION: Do NOT handle the pins in the processor socket. These pins are very fragile and
handling them could cause irreparable damage. Once pins are damaged it may be necessary to
replace the system board.
The heat sink must be installed within 24 hours of installing the processor to prevent damage to
the processor’s solder connections.
Figure 8-36 Removing the processor
To install a new processor:
1.
Place the processor in its socket and close the retainer. Make sure the slot in the processor fits
into the post on the socket.
200 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
2.
Secure the locking lever. If reusing the existing heat sink, go to step 3. If using a new heat sink,
go to step 6.
Figure 8-37 Removing the processor
3.
If reusing the existing heat sink, clean the bottom of the heat sink with the alcohol pad provided
in the spares kit.
CAUTION: Before reinstalling the heat sink you must clean the top of the processor and the
bottom of the heat sink with an alcohol pad supplied in the spares kit. After the alcohol has
evaporated, apply thermal grease to the top of the processor from the syringe supplied in the
spares kit.
4.
Apply the thermal grease provided in the spares kit to the top of the processor and install the
heat sink atop the processor.
5.
Go to step 7.
6.
If using a new heat sink, remove the protective covering from the bottom of the heat sink and
place it in position atop the processor.
7.
Secure the heat sink to the system board and system board tray.
CAUTION: Heat sink retaining screws should be tightened in diagonally opposite pairs (as in
an X) to evenly seat the heat sink on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on
the socket are very fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.
NOTE: After installing a new processor onto the system board, always update the system ROM to
ensure that the latest version of the BIOS is being used on the computer. The latest system BIOS can
be found on the Web at: http://h18000.www1.hp.com/support/files.
Processor 201
Power Supply
Description
Spare part number
Power supply, 90% efficient
613762-001
Power supply, standard
613763-001
WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the power supply provided with the computer, a
replacement power supply provided by HP, or a power supply purchased as an accessory from HP
should be used with the computer.
The rotating power supply is located at the rear of the chassis. It is held in place by a bracket – no
screws are used.
WARNING! Voltage is always present on the system board when the computer is plugged into an
active AC outlet. To avoid possible personal injury and damage to the equipment the power cord
should be disconnected from the computer and/or the AC outlet before opening the computer.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 163).
2.
Remove the access panel (Access Panel on page 164).
3.
Rotate the drive cage up and disconnect the power cables from all of the drives.
4.
Disconnect all power cables from the system board as follows:
●
clear 4-pin PWRCPU
●
clear 6-pin PWR
●
white 6-pin PWRCMD
5.
Rotate the power supply to its full upright position.
6.
Release the power supply cables from the cable retaining clip under the drive cage.
202 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
7.
Pull the power supply forward until the posts on the power supply move forward in the power
supply bracket, and then lift the power supply straight up and out of the chassis.
Figure 8-38 Removing the power supply
To install the power supply, reverse the removal procedure.
CAUTION: When installing the power supply cables, make sure they are properly positioned so
they are not cut by the drive cage and are not pinched by the rotating power supply.
Power Supply 203
System Board
Description
Spare part number
System board (includes thermal material)
657094-001
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 163).
2.
Remove the access panel (Access Panel on page 164).
3.
When replacing the system board, make sure the following components are removed from the
defective system board and installed on the replacement system board:
●
Memory modules (Memory on page 169)
●
Expansion cards (Expansion Card on page 172)
●
Heat sink (Heat sink on page 197)
●
Processor (Processor on page 198)
4.
Remove the baffle from the chassis (Fan duct on page 190).
5.
Remove the fan from the chassis (Front Fan Assembly on page 191).
6.
Rotate the drive cage to its upright position.
7.
Rotate the power supply to its full upright position.
8.
Disconnect all data and power cables from the system board.
9.
Disconnect the balance of the cables from the system board.
10. Remove the eight Torx T15 screws (1) that secure the system board to the chassis.
204 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
11. Lift up the front of the system board, and then pull the system board forward, up, and out of the
chassis (2).
Figure 8-39 Removing the system board
To install the system board, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE:
BIOS.
When replacing the system board, you must also change the chassis serial number in the
CAUTION: Before reinstalling the heat sink you must clean the top of the processor and the bottom
of the heat sink with an alcohol pad supplied in the spares kit. After the alcohol has evaporated, apply
thermal grease to the top of the processor from the syringe supplied in the spares kit.
CAUTION: When reconnecting the cables it is important that they be positioned so they do not
interfere with the rotation of the drive cage or power supply.
System Board 205
Using the Small Form Factor Computer in a Tower
Orientation
The Small Form Factor computer can be used in a tower orientation. The HP logo plate on the front
bezel is adjustable for either desktop or tower orientation.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 163).
2.
Orient the computer so that its right side is facing down and place the computer in the optional
stand.
Figure 8-40 Changing from Desktop to Tower Orientation
NOTE: To stabilize the computer in a tower orientation, HP recommends the use of the
optional tower stand.
3.
Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the access panel was removed.
NOTE: Ensure at least 10.2 centimeters (4 inches) of space on all sides of the computer remains
clear and free of obstructions.
206 Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
9
Removal and Replacement Procedures
Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
Adherence to the procedures and precautions described in this chapter is essential for proper service.
After completing all necessary removal and replacement procedures, run the Diagnostics utility to
verify that all components operate properly.
NOTE:
Not all features listed in this guide are available on all computers.
Preparation for Disassembly
See Routine Care, SATA Drive Guidelines, and Disassembly Preparation on page 66 for initial safety
procedures.
1.
Remove/disengage any security devices that prohibit opening the computer.
2.
Close any open software applications.
3.
Exit the operating system.
4.
Remove any compact disc from the computer.
5.
Turn off the computer and any peripheral devices that are connected to it.
CAUTION: Turn off the computer before disconnecting any cables.
Regardless of the power-on state, voltage is always present on the system board as long as the
system is plugged into an active AC outlet. In some systems the cooling fan is on even when the
computer is in the “Standby,” or “Suspend” modes. The power cord should always be
disconnected before servicing a unit.
6.
Disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet and then from the computer.
7.
Disconnect all peripheral device cables from the computer.
NOTE: During disassembly, label each cable as you remove it, noting its position and routing.
Keep all screws with the units removed.
CAUTION: The screws used in the computer are of different thread sizes and lengths; using
the wrong screw in an application may damage the unit.
8.
If the PC is mounted in the accessory mounting stand, remove it from the stand.
Preparation for Disassembly 207
Access Panel
Description
Spare part number
Access panel
689382-001
To access internal components, you must remove the access panel:
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 207).
2.
If the computer is on a stand, remove the computer from the stand and lay the computer down.
3.
Loosen the thumbscrew on the rear of the computer (1), slide the access panel toward the rear
of the computer, then lift it off (2).
Figure 9-1 Removing the Computer Access Panel
To install the access panel, reverse the removal procedure.
208 Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
Front Bezel
Description
Spare part number
Front bezel
689383-001
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 207).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 208).
3.
Lift up the three tabs on the side of the bezel (1), then rotate the bezel off the chassis (2).
Figure 9-2 Removing the front bezel
To install the front bezel, reverse the removal procedure.
Front Bezel 209
Front Bezel Security
The front bezel can be locked in place by installing a security screw provided by HP. To install the
security screw:
1.
Remove/disengage any security devices that prohibit opening the computer.
2.
Remove all removable media, such as compact discs or USB flash drives, from the computer.
3.
Turn off the computer properly through the operating system, then turn off any external devices.
4.
Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet and disconnect any external devices.
CAUTION: Regardless of the power-on state, voltage is always present on the system board
as long as the system is plugged into an active AC outlet. You must disconnect the power cord
to avoid damage to the internal components of the computer.
5.
If the computer is on a stand, remove the computer from the stand.
6.
Remove the access panel and front bezel.
7.
Remove the black screw on the front of the chassis behind the bezel. The screw is located next
to the optical drive and is labeled "BEZEL."
Figure 9-3 Retrieving the Front Bezel Security Screw
8.
Replace the front bezel.
210 Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
9.
Install the security screw through the middle front bezel release tab and into the chassis to
secure the front bezel in place.
Figure 9-4 Installing the Front Bezel Security Screw
10. Replace the access panel.
11. If the computer was on a stand, replace the stand.
12. Reconnect the power cord and turn on the computer.
13. Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the access panel was removed.
Front Bezel Security 211
Bezel Blank
Description
Spare part number
Bezel blank
593230-001
On some models, there is a bezel blank covering the external drive bay that needs to be removed
before installing a drive. To remove a bezel blank:
1.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 208).
2.
Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 209).
3.
To remove the bezel blank, push the two retaining tabs that hold the bezel blank in place
towards the outer left edge of the bezel (1) and pull the bezel blank inwards to remove it (2).
Figure 9-5 Removing a bezel blank
212 Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
System Board Connections
Refer to the following illustration and table to identify the system board connectors.
Figure 9-6 System Board Connections
No.
System Board Connector
System Board Label
Color
Component
1
SATA 3.0
SATA1
light blue
Optical Drive
2
Power
SATA PWR1
white
Optical Drive
3
Mobile PCI Express Module
MXM
black
Graphics Card
4
Hood Sensor
HSENSE
white
Hood Sensor
5
USB
MEDIA
black
SD Media Card Reader
6
Mini PCI Express x1
X1PCIEXP1
black
Expansion Card (for example,
WLAN card)
7
Mini-SATA
mSATA
white
Ultra-Small SSD
System Board Connections 213
Memory
Description
Spare part number
8-GB, PC3-12800, SODIMM
689374-001
4-GB, PC3-12800, SODIMM
689373-001
2-GB, PC3-12800, SODIMM
689372-001
The computer comes with double data rate 3 synchronous dynamic random access memory (DDR3SDRAM) small outline dual inline memory modules (SODIMMs).
SODIMMs
The memory sockets on the system board can be populated with up to two industry-standard
SODIMMs. These memory sockets are populated with at least one preinstalled SODIMM. To achieve
the maximum memory support, you can populate the system board with up to 8-GB of memory.
DDR3-SDRAM SODIMMs
CAUTION: This product DOES NOT support DDR3 Ultra Low Voltage (DDR3U) memory. The
processor is not compatible with DDR3U memory and if you plug DDR3U memory into the system
board, it can cause the physical damage to the SODIMM or invoke system malfunction.
For proper system operation, the SODIMMs must be:
●
industry-standard 204-pin
●
unbuffered non-ECC PC3-12800 DDR3-1600 MHz-compliant
●
1.5 volt DDR3-SDRAM SODIMMs
The DDR3-SDRAM SODIMMs must also:
●
support CAS latency 11 DDR3 1600 MHz (11-11-11 timing)
●
contain the mandatory Joint Electronic Device Engineering Council (JEDEC) specification
In addition, the computer supports:
●
512-Mbit, 1-Gbit, and 2-Gbit non-ECC memory technologies
●
single-sided and double-sided SODIMMS
●
SODIMMs constructed with x8 and x16 devices; SODIMMs constructed with x4 SDRAM are not
supported
NOTE:
The system will not operate properly if you install unsupported SODIMMs.
214 Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
Populating SODIMM Sockets
There are two SODIMM sockets on the system board, with one socket per channel. The sockets are
labeled XMM1 and XMM3. The XMM1 socket operates in memory channel A. The XMM3 socket
operates in memory channel B.
Figure 9-7 SODIMM Socket Locations
Table 9-1 SODIMM Socket Locations
Item
Description
System Board Label
Socket Color
1
SODIMM1 socket, Channel B
XMM1
Black
2
SODIMM3 socket, Channel A
XMM3
Black
The system will automatically operate in single channel mode, dual channel mode, or flex mode,
depending on how the SODIMMs are installed.
●
The system will operate in single channel mode if the SODIMM sockets are populated in one
channel only.
●
The system will operate in a higher-performing dual channel mode if the memory capacity of the
SODIMM in Channel A is equal to the memory capacity of the SODIMM in Channel B.
●
The system will operate in flex mode if the memory capacity of the SODIMM in Channel A is not
equal to the memory capacity of the SODIMM in Channel B. In flex mode, the channel populated
with the least amount of memory describes the total amount of memory assigned to dual
channel and the remainder is assigned to single channel. If one channel will have more memory
than the other, the larger amount should be assigned to channel A.
●
In any mode, the maximum operational speed is determined by the slowest SODIMM in the
system.
Memory 215
Installing SODIMMs
CAUTION: You must disconnect the power cord and wait approximately 30 seconds for the power
to drain before adding or removing memory modules. Regardless of the power-on state, voltage is
always supplied to the memory modules as long as the computer is plugged into an active AC outlet.
Adding or removing memory modules while voltage is present may cause irreparable damage to the
memory modules or system board.
The memory module sockets have gold-plated metal contacts. When upgrading the memory, it is
important to use memory modules with gold-plated metal contacts to prevent corrosion and/or
oxidation resulting from having incompatible metals in contact with each other.
Static electricity can damage the electronic components of the computer or optional cards. Before
beginning these procedures, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by briefly touching a
grounded metal object. For more information, refer to Electrostatic Discharge Information on page 66.
When handling a memory module, be careful not to touch any of the contacts. Doing so may damage
the module.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 207).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 208).
3.
Locate the memory module sockets on the system board.
WARNING! To reduce risk of personal injury from hot surfaces, allow the internal system
components to cool before touching.
4.
To remove a SODIMM, press outward on the two latches on each side of the SODIMM (1) then
pull the SODIMM out of the socket (2).
Figure 9-8 Removing a SODIMM
216 Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
5.
Slide the new SODIMM into the socket at approximately a 30° angle (1) then press the SODIMM
down (2) so that the latches lock it in place.
Figure 9-9 Installing a SODIMM
NOTE: A memory module can be installed in only one way. Match the notch on the module
with the tab on the memory socket.
6.
Replace the access panel.
7.
If the computer was on a stand, replace the stand.
8.
Reconnect the power cord and turn on the computer.
9.
Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the computer cover or access panel was
removed.
The computer automatically recognizes the additional memory when you turn on the computer.
Memory 217
Front Fan
Description
Spare part number
Front fan
689376-001
The front fan sits against the front on the left side of the chassis.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 207).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 208).
3.
Disconnect the fan control cable from the red system board connector labeled CHFAN.
4.
Lift the fan straight up and out of the chassis.
Figure 9-10 Removing the front fan
To install the front fan, reverse the removal procedure.
218 Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
Optical Drive
The Ultra-Slim Desktop uses a slimline Serial ATA (SATA) optical drive.
Description
Spare part number
DVD-ROM drive
608394-001
DVD±RW and CD-RW Super Multi Double-Layer Combo Drive(includes drive bracket)
657958-001
Removing the Optical Drive
CAUTION: All removable media should be taken out of a drive before removing the drive from the
computer.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 207).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 208).
3.
Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 209).
4.
Disconnect the cables on the rear of the optical drive (1), push the green release latch on the
right rear side of the drive toward the center of the drive (2), then slide the drive forward and out
of the bay through the front bezel (3).
CAUTION: When removing the cables, pull the tab or connector instead of the cable itself to
avoid damaging the cable.
Figure 9-11 Removing the optical drive
Optical Drive 219
Preparing the New Optical Drive
Before the new optical drive can be used, the release latch must be attached.
1.
Peel the backing off the adhesive on the release latch.
2.
Without allowing the release latch to touch the optical drive, carefully align the holes on the
release latch with the pins on the side of the optical drive. Make sure the release latch is
oriented properly.
3.
Insert the pin at the front of the optical drive into the hole at the end of the release latch, and
press firmly.
4.
Insert the second pin, and press the entire release latch firmly to fasten the latch securely to the
optical drive.
Figure 9-12 Aligning the release latch
220 Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
Installing the New Optical Drive
NOTE: If you are installing an optical drive in a bay that did not previously have a drive in it, you
must remove the access panel and the bezel blank covering the opening of the bay before
proceeding. Follow the procedures in Access Panel on page 208 and Bezel Blank on page 212.
1.
Follow the instructions for removing the optical drive. Refer to Removing the Optical Drive
on page 219.
2.
Attach the release latch to the new optical drive. Refer to Preparing the New Optical Drive
on page 220.
3.
With the back of the optical drive facing the computer and the release latch on the inner side of
the drive, align the drive with the opening in the front bezel.
4.
Slide the optical drive through the front bezel all the way into the bay so that it locks in place (1),
then connect the cable to the rear of the drive (2).
Figure 9-13 Installing the optical drive
5.
Replace the front bezel and access panel.
6.
If the computer was on a stand, replace the stand.
7.
Reconnect the power cord and turn on the computer.
8.
Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the computer cover or access panel was
removed.
Optical Drive 221
Hard Drive
Description
Spare part number
500 GB, 7200 rpm SATA hard drive, 2.5-inch, SED
696442-001
500-GB, 7200-rpm, 2.5-inch
686217-001
320 GB, 7200 rpm SATA hard drive, 2.5-inch, SED
634824-001
320 GB, 7200 rpm SATA hard drive, 2.5-inch
639135-001
256 GB Solid State Drive (SSD), self-encrypting (SED), 2.5-inch, SATA 6.0
680020-001
180 GB Solid State Drive (SSD), SATA 6.0
696622-001
160 GB Solid State Drive (SSD), SATA 3.0
646809-001
128 GB Solid State Drive (SSD), SATA 2.0
665961-001
120 GB Solid State Drive (SSD), SATA 2.0
661841-001
24 GB Solid State Drive (SSD), SATA
683306-001
NOTE:
The Ultra-Slim Desktop supports only 2.5-inch Serial ATA (SATA) internal hard drives.
Before you remove the old hard drive, be sure to back up the data from the old hard drive so that you
can transfer the data to the new hard drive.
The 2.5-inch hard drive is enclosed in a carrier under the optical drive.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 207).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 208).
3.
Remove the optical drive (Removing the Optical Drive on page 219).
222 Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
4.
Press in the release latch on the left side of the hard drive carrier (1) then rotate the carrier
handle to the right (2).
Figure 9-14 Unlocking the hard drive carrier
5.
Lift the hard drive carrier straight up and out of the chassis.
Figure 9-15 Removing the hard drive carrier
Hard Drive 223
6.
Remove the four guide screws from the sides of the hard drive carrier.
Figure 9-16 Removing the guide screws
7.
Lift the hard drive up to the top of the carrier (1) and slide the drive out of the carrier (2).
Figure 9-17 Removing the hard drive from the carrier
224 Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
8.
Position the hard drive so that the top of the hard drive is up against the top of the carrier (1) so
that the circuit board on the bottom of the hard drive does not come in contact wit the tabs on the
bottom of the carrier, then slide the new hard drive into the carrier (2).
CAUTION: Do not allow the circuit board on the bottom of the hard drive to scrape along the
tabs on the bottom of the carrier when sliding the hard drive into the carrier. Doing so can cause
irreparable damage to the hard drive.
Figure 9-18 Sliding the hard drive into the carrier
9.
Set the hard drive down into the bottom of the carrier (1), then replace the four guide screws on
the sides of the carrier to secure the drive in the carrier (2).
Figure 9-19 Lowering the hard drive and replacing the guide screws
Hard Drive 225
10. To place the hard drive carrier back in the chassis, align the guide screws with the slots on the
drive bay, drop the carrier straight down into the drive bay (1), and press the handle on the
carrier all the way down (2) so that the drive is properly seated and locked in place.
Figure 9-20 Installing the hard drive carrier
11. Replace the optical drive and reconnect the cable on the back of the optical drive.
12. Replace the computer access panel.
13. If the computer was on a stand, replace the stand.
14. Reconnect the power cord and turn on the computer.
15. Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the computer cover or access panel was
removed.
NOTE: No configuration of the SATA hard drive is necessary; the computer automatically
recognizes it the next time you turn on the computer.
226 Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
Optical Drive Rail
Description
Spare part number
Optical drive rail (green plastic piece on drive)
594219-001
The optical drive rail sits behind the USB ports on the front of the chassis.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 207).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 208).
3.
Remove the optical drive (Removing the Optical Drive on page 219).
4.
Remove the hard drive (Hard Drive on page 222).
5.
Remove the two Torx screws that secure the rail to the chassis (1), lift the tab (2) on the rail,
slide the rail toward the rear of the unit (3), and then pull the rail up and out of the chassis.
Figure 9-21 Removing the optical drive rail
To install the optical drive rail, reverse the removal procedures.
Optical Drive Rail 227
Card Reader
Description
Spare part number
Card reader
592685-001
The card reader is secured to the front right corner of the chassis.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 207).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 208).
3.
Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 209).
4.
Remove the optical drive (Removing the Optical Drive on page 219).
5.
Remove the hard drive (Hard Drive on page 222).
6.
Remove the optical drive rail (Optical Drive Rail on page 227).
7.
Disconnect the cable from the system board connector labeled MEDIA.
8.
On the outside of the chassis, remove the one Torx screw that secures the card reader to the
chassis.
Figure 9-22 Removing the card reader screw
228 Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
9.
Pull the reader away from the front of the chassis while threading the cable through the slot in
the front of the chassis.
Figure 9-23 Removing the card reader
To install the card reader, reverse the removal procedure.
Card Reader 229
Speaker
Description
Spare part number
Speaker
689384-001
The speaker is secured to the front of the chassis between the fan and the I/O ports. Remove the
screws from the outside and then remove the speaker from the inside.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 207).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 208).
3.
Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 209).
4.
Disconnect the speaker cable from the white system board connector labeled SPKR.
5.
On the outside of the chassis, remove the two Torx T8 screws that secure the speaker to the
chassis (1), and then from the inside of the chassis, slide the speaker up to remove it (2).
Figure 9-24 Removing the speaker
To install the speaker, reverse the removal procedure.
230 Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
Heat sink
Description
Spare part number
Heat sink
587456-001
The heat sink is secured by four Torx screws. It does not have an attached fan.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 207).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 208).
3.
Lift the front fan up and place it on top of the optical drive to access the front bezel release tabs.
You do not need to disconnect the fan cable from the system board.
4.
Loosen the four Torx T15 screws that secure the heat sink to the system board, and then lift the
heat sink from the system board.
Figure 9-25 Loosening the heat sink screws
CAUTION: Heat sink retaining screws should be removed in diagonally opposite pairs (as in
an X) to even the downward forces on the processor to avoid damage that could require
replacing the system board.
Heat sink 231
5.
Lift the heat sink from the system board.
Figure 9-26 Removing the heat sink
CAUTION: Heat sink retaining screws should be removed in diagonally opposite pairs (as in
an X) to even the downward forces on the processor to avoid damage that could require
replacing the system board.
6.
Lay the heat sink on its top in a safe area to prevent the thermal grease from contaminating the
work surface.
If reusing the existing heat sink go to step 1.
If using a new heat sink, go to step 3.
1.
If reusing the existing heat sink, clean bottom of the heat sink and apply the thermal grease
provided in the spares kit to the top of the processor.
2.
Position the heat sink atop the processor.
3.
If using a new heat sink, remove the protective covering from the bottom of the heat sink and
place it in position atop the processor.
4.
Secure the heat sink to the system board and system board tray with the 4 captive screws.
CAUTION: Heat sink retaining screws should be tightened in diagonally opposite pairs (as in
an X) to evenly seat the heat sink on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on
the socket are very fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.
232 Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
Processor
Description
Spare part number
Intel Core i7 processor
3770s, 3.4 GHz, 8-MB L3 cache
689370-001
Intel Core i5 processors
3550s, 3.1 GHz, 6-MB L3 cache
689371-001
3475s, 2.9 GHz, 6-MB L3 cache
695078-001
3470s, 2.9 GHz, 6-MB L3 cache
695077-001
Intel Core i3 processors
2130, 3.4 GHz, 3-MB L3 cache
665120-001
2120, 3.3 GHz, 3-MB L3 cache
638629-001
Intel Pentium processors
G870, 3.0 GHz, 3-MB L3 cache
691936-001
G860, 3.0 GHz, 3-MB L3 cache
665123-001
G640, 2.8 GHz, 3-MB L3 cache
691935-001
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 207).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 208).
3.
Remove the heat sink (Heat sink on page 231).
4.
Rotate the processor locking lever to its full open position (1).
5.
Raise and rotate the microprocessor retainer to its fully open position (2).
Processor 233
6.
Carefully lift the processor from the socket (3).
CAUTION: Do NOT handle the pins in the processor socket. These pins are very fragile and
handling them could cause irreparable damage. Once pins are damaged it may be necessary to
replace the system board.
The heat sink must be installed within 24 hours of installing the processor to prevent damage to
the processor’s solder connections.
Figure 9-27 Removing the processor
To install a new processor:
1.
Place the processor in its socket and close the retainer.
234 Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
2.
Secure the locking lever.
Figure 9-28 Replacing the processor
If reusing the existing heat sink, go to step 3.
If using a new heat sink, go to step 5.
3.
If reusing the existing heat sink, clean bottom of the heat sink and apply the thermal grease
provided in the spares kit to the top of the processor.
4.
Position the heat sink atop the processor.
5.
If using a new heat sink, remove the protective covering from the bottom of the heat sink and
place it in position atop the processor.
6.
Secure the heat sink to the system board and system board tray with the 4 captive screws.
CAUTION: Heat sink retaining screws should be tightened in diagonally opposite pairs (as in
an X) to evenly seat the heat sink on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on
the socket are very fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.
NOTE: After installing a new processor onto the system board, always update the system ROM to
ensure that the latest version of the BIOS is being used on the computer. The latest system BIOS can
be found on the Web at: http://h18000.www1.hp.com/support/files.
Processor 235
WLAN Module
Description
Spare part number
Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6205 (802.11a/b/g/n Wi-Fi wireless adapter)
652165-001
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 207).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 208).
3.
Remove the optical drive (Removing the Optical Drive on page 219).
4.
Remove the hard drive (Hard Drive on page 222).
5.
Remove the optical drive rail (Optical Drive Rail on page 227).
6.
Remove the heat sink (Heat sink on page 231).
7.
Disconnect the two antenna cables from the connectors on the module (1).
8.
Remove the two Torx T5 screws (2) that secure the module to the system board.
Figure 9-29 Removing the WLAN module
236 Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
9.
Lift the module to a 45 degree angle (3), and then remove the module from the connector by
pulling it away at an angle (4).
Figure 9-30 Removing the WLAN module
To install the WLAN module, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure the antenna cables are
correctly routed.
WLAN Module 237
Hood Sensor
Description
Spare part number
Hood sensor
638816-001
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 207).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 208).
3.
Remove the optical drive (Removing the Optical Drive on page 219).
4.
Unplug the hood sensor cable from the white system board connector labeled HSENSE (1) and
remove the cable from the white clip mounted on the inside chassis wall.
5.
Slide the hood sensor into the chassis to remove it from its slot (2). Disengaging the hood
sensor from the chassis may require use of a screwdriver or similar tool.
Figure 9-31 Removing the hood sensor
To install the hood sensor, reverse the removal procedures.
238 Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
Graphics Board
Description
Spare part number
AMD Radeon HD 7650A (MXM)
687445-001
CAUTION: Be very careful when removing or replacing the system board to prevent damaging it.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 207).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 208).
3.
Remove the memory modules (Memory on page 214).
4.
Remove the front fan (Front Fan on page 218).
5.
Remove the optical drive (Removing the Optical Drive on page 219).
6.
Remove the hard drive (Hard Drive on page 222).
7.
Remove the optical drive rail (Optical Drive Rail on page 227).
8.
Remove the hood sensor (Hood Sensor on page 238).
9.
Remove the two Torx T8 screws (1) that secure the graphics board to the system board, rotate
the board upward to a 45-degree angle (2), and the pull it away from the system board
connector and out of the computer (3).
Figure 9-32 Removing the graphics board
Graphics Board 239
To install the graphics board, reverse the removal procedure.
If you need to remove the heat sink from the graphics board, loosen the four captive Torx screws that
secure the heat sink from the graphics board, and then lift the heat sink from the graphics board.
Figure 9-33 Graphics board heat sink screws
NOTE:
BIOS.
When replacing the system board, you must also change the chassis serial number in the
240 Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
System Board
Description
Spare part number
System board for use in models without Windows 8
657095-001
System board for use in models with Windows 8 Standard
657095-501
System board for use in models with Windows 8 Professional
657095-601
System board with DisplayPort 1.2 support for use in models without Windows 8
711787-001
System board with DisplayPort 1.2 support for use in models with Windows 8 Standard
711787-501
System board with DisplayPort 1.2 support for use in models with Windows 8 Professional
711787-601
Front I/O panel
587458-001
CAUTION: Be very careful when removing or replacing the system board to prevent damaging it.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 207).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 208).
3.
Remove the memory modules (Memory on page 214).
4.
Remove the front fan (Front Fan on page 218).
5.
Remove the optical drive (Removing the Optical Drive on page 219).
6.
Remove the hard drive (Hard Drive on page 222).
7.
Remove the optical drive rail (Optical Drive Rail on page 227).
8.
Remove the heat sink (Heat sink on page 231).
9.
Disconnect the rear fan cable from the system board.
10. Disconnect any remaining cables connected to the system board, noting their location for
reinstallation.
11. Remove the front I/O panel:
a.
Remove the Torx T15 screw from the right side of the panel that secures it to the front of
the chassis.
Figure 9-34 I/O panel screw
System Board 241
b.
Press the tab on right side of the panel (1), and then swing the right side of the cage away
from the chassis to remove it (2).
Figure 9-35 Removing the I/O panel
12. Remove the three remaining Torx T15 screws (1) that secure the system board to the chassis.
13. Slide system board toward the front of the unit until the rear connectors are clear of their slots in
the chassis (2).
14. Lift the rear of the system board until it clears the chassis, and then remove the system board
from the chassis (3).
Figure 9-36 Removing the system board
To install the system board, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE:
BIOS.
When replacing the system board, you must also change the chassis serial number in the
242 Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
Rear Fan
Description
Spare part number
Rear fan
691352-001
The rear fan is secured to the rear right corner of the chassis. You must remove the system board
before you can remove the rear fan.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 207).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 208).
3.
Remove the optical drive (Removing the Optical Drive on page 219).
4.
Remove the front fan (Front Fan on page 218).
5.
Remove the hard drive (Hard Drive on page 222).
6.
Remove the optical drive rail (Optical Drive Rail on page 227).
7.
Remove the heat sink (Heat sink on page 231).
8.
Remove the system board (System Board on page 241).
9.
From the outside of the chassis, remove the four Phillips screws that secure the fan to the
chassis.
Figure 9-37 Removing the rear fan screws
Rear Fan 243
10. From the inside of the chassis, slide the fan out from underneath the chassis lip, and then
remove the fan.
Figure 9-38 Removing the rear fan
To install the rear fan, reverse the removal procedure.
Antennas
Description
Spare part number
Antenna Hardware Kit
646811-001
Two antennas are secured to chassis – one on the front, one on the back. You must remove all other
components to remove the antennas.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 207).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 208).
3.
Remove the optical drive (Removing the Optical Drive on page 219).
4.
Remove the front fan (Front Fan on page 218).
5.
Remove the hard drive (Hard Drive on page 222).
6.
Remove the optical drive rail (Optical Drive Rail on page 227).
7.
Remove the heat sink (Heat sink on page 231).
8.
Remove the system board (System Board on page 241).
9.
Remove the rear fan (Rear Fan on page 243).
244 Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
10. To remove the front antenna, from the inside of the front of the chassis, remove the antenna
from the clips built into the base pan.
Figure 9-39 Removing the front antenna – inside
11. From the outside of the front of the chassis, remove the two Torx T8 screws (1) that secure the
antenna to the chassis.
12. Pull the antenna out of the clips on the front of the chassis (2), and then pull the antenna out of
the hole it routes through (3).
Figure 9-40 Removing the front antenna – outside
Antennas 245
13. To remove the rear antenna, from the inside of the front of the chassis, remove the antenna from
the plastic clips attached to the side of the chassis.
Figure 9-41 Removing the rear antenna – inside
14. From the outside of the rear of the chassis, remove the two Torx T8 screws that secure the
antenna to the chassis.
Figure 9-42 Removing the rear antenna – outside
246 Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
15. Pull the antenna through the hole it routes through.
Figure 9-43 Removing the rear antenna
To install the rear fan, reverse the removal procedure.
Antennas 247
Changing from Desktop to Tower Configuration
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 207).
2.
Orient the computer so that its left side is facing down and place the computer firmly down into
the stand.
Figure 9-44 Placing the computer on the stand
3.
Reconnect the external equipment, plug the power cord into a power outlet, and turn the
computer on.
4.
Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the computer cover or access panel was
removed.
To change from the tower configuration to the desktop configuration, reverse the previous steps.
NOTE: An optional Quick Release mounting bracket is available from HP for mounting the computer
to a wall, desk, or swing arm.
248 Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
Port Cover
Description
Spare part number
Port cover
646818-001
An optional rear port cover is available for the computer.
To install the port cover:
1.
Thread the cables through the bottom hole on the port cover (1) and connect the cables to the
rear ports on the computer.
2.
Insert the hooks on the port cover into the slots on the rear of the chassis, then slide the cover to
the right to secure it in place (2).
Figure 9-45 Installing a Port Cover
NOTE: For security purposes, you can install an optional cable lock to the chassis that locks the
port cover and secures the computer.
The port cover is secured in place by a retention lever just inside the port cover opening. To remove
the port cover, pull the lever back towards the port cover opening (1), then slide the cover to the left
and off the computer (2).
Port Cover 249
Figure 9-46 Removing a Port Cover
Power Supply, External
The USDT chassis uses an external power supply.
WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the power supply provided with the computer, a
replacement power supply provided by HP, or a power supply purchased as an accessory from HP
should be used with the computer.
250 Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
10 Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
This chapter provides information on how to identify and correct minor problems, such as USB
devices, hard drive, optical drive, graphics, audio, memory, and software problems. If you encounter
problems with the computer, refer to the tables in this chapter for probable causes and recommended
solutions.
NOTE: For information on specific error messages that may appear on the screen during Power-On
Self-Test (POST) at startup, refer to Appendix A, POST Error Messages on page 292.
Safety and Comfort
WARNING! Misuse of the computer or failure to establish a safe and comfortable work environment
may result in discomfort or serious injury. Refer to the Safety & Comfort Guide at http://www.hp.com/
ergo for more information on choosing a workspace and creating a safe and comfortable work
environment. For more information, refer to the Safety & Regulatory Information guide.
Before You Call for Technical Support
If you are having problems with the computer, try the appropriate solutions below to try to isolate the
exact problem before calling for technical support.
●
Run the HP diagnostic tool.
●
Run the hard drive self-test in Computer Setup. Refer to Computer Setup (F10) Utility
on page 16 for more information.
●
Check the Power LED on the front of the computer to see if it is flashing red. The flashing lights
are error codes that will help you diagnose the problem. Refer to Appendix A, POST Error
Messages on page 292 for more information.
●
If the screen is blank, plug the monitor into a different video port on the computer if one is
available. Or, replace the monitor with a monitor that you know is functioning properly.
●
If you are working on a network, plug another computer with a different cable into the network
connection. There may be a problem with the network plug or cable.
●
If you recently added new hardware, remove the hardware and see if the computer functions
properly.
●
If you recently installed new software, uninstall the software and see if the computer functions
properly.
●
Boot the computer to the Safe Mode to see if it will boot without all of the drivers loaded. When
booting the operating system, use “Last Known Configuration.”
Safety and Comfort 251
●
Refer to the comprehensive online technical support at http://www.hp.com/support.
●
Refer to Helpful Hints on page 252 in this guide.
To assist you in resolving problems online, HP Instant Support Professional Edition provides you with
self-solve diagnostics. If you need to contact HP support, use HP Instant Support Professional
Edition's online chat feature. Access HP Instant Support Professional Edition at: http://www.hp.com/
go/ispe.
Access the Business Support Center (BSC) at http://www.hp.com/go/bizsupport for the latest online
support information, software and drivers, proactive notification, and worldwide community of peers
and HP experts.
If it becomes necessary to call for technical assistance, be prepared to do the following to ensure that
your service call is handled properly:
●
Be in front of your computer when you call.
●
Write down the computer serial number, product ID number, and monitor serial number before
calling.
●
Spend time troubleshooting the problem with the service technician.
●
Remove any hardware that was recently added to your system.
●
Remove any software that was recently installed.
●
Restore the system from the Recovery Disc Set that you created or restore the system to its
original factory condition in System Software Requirement Disks (SSRD).
CAUTION: Restoring the system will erase all data on the hard drive. Be sure to back up all data
files before running the restore process.
NOTE: For sales information and warranty upgrades (Care Packs), call your local authorized
service provider or dealer.
Helpful Hints
If you encounter problems with the computer, monitor, or software, see the following list of general
suggestions before taking further action:
●
Check that the computer and monitor are plugged into a working electrical outlet.
●
Check that the voltage select switch (some models) is set to the appropriate voltage for your
region (115V or 230V).
●
Check that the computer is turned on and the green power light is on.
●
Check that the monitor is turned on and the green monitor light is on.
●
Check the Power LED on the front of the computer to see if it is flashing red. The flashing lights
are error codes that will help you diagnose the problem. Refer to Appendix A, POST Error
Messages on page 292 for more information.
●
Turn up the brightness and contrast controls of the monitor if the monitor is dim.
●
Press and hold any key. If the system beeps, then the keyboard should be operating correctly.
●
Check all cable connections for loose connections or incorrect connections.
252 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
●
Wake the computer by pressing any key on the keyboard or pressing the power button. If the
system remains in suspend mode, shut down the computer by pressing and holding the power
button for at least four seconds then press the power button again to restart the computer. If the
system will not shut down, unplug the power cord, wait a few seconds, then plug it in again. The
computer will restart if it is set to power on automatically as soon as power is restored in
Computer Setup. If it does not restart, press the power button to start the computer.
●
Reconfigure the computer after installing a non-plug and play expansion board or other option.
See Solving Hardware Installation Problems on page 276 for instructions.
●
Be sure that all the needed device drivers have been installed. For example, if you are using a
printer, you need a driver for that model printer.
●
Remove all bootable media (CD/DVD or USB device) from the system before turning it on.
●
If you have installed an operating system other than the factory-installed operating system,
check to be sure that it is supported on the system.
●
If the system has multiple video sources (embedded, PCI, or PCI-Express adapters) installed
(embedded video on some models only) and a single monitor, the monitor must be plugged into
the monitor connector on the source selected as the primary VGA adapter. During boot, the
other monitor connectors are disabled and if the monitor is connected into these ports, the
monitor will not function. You can select which source will be the default VGA source in
Computer Setup.
CAUTION: When the computer is plugged into an AC power source, there is always voltage applied
to the system board. You must disconnect the power cord from the power source before opening the
computer to prevent system board or component damage.
Helpful Hints 253
Solving General Problems
You may be able to easily resolve the general problems described in this section. If a problem
persists and you are unable to resolve it yourself or if you feel uncomfortable about performing the
operation, contact an authorized dealer or reseller.
WARNING! When the computer is plugged into an AC power source, voltage is always applied to
the system board. To reduce the risk of personal injury from electrical shock and/or hot surfaces, be
sure to disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet and allow the internal system components to
cool before touching.
Table 10-1 Solving General Problems
Computer appears locked up and will not turn off when the power button is pressed.
Cause
Solution
Software control of the power switch is not functional.
1.
Press and hold the power button for at least four
seconds until the computer turns off.
2.
Disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet.
Computer will not respond to keyboard or mouse.
Cause
Solution
Computer is in Sleep state.
To resume from Sleep state, press the power button.
CAUTION: When attempting to resume from Sleep state,
do not hold down the power button for more than four
seconds. Otherwise, the computer will shut down and you
will lose any unsaved data.
System has locked up.
Restart computer.
Computer date and time display is incorrect.
Cause
Solution
RTC (real-time clock) battery may need to be replaced.
Reset the date and time under Control Panel (Computer
Setup can also be used to update the RTC date and time). If
the problem persists, replace the RTC battery. See the
Removal and Replacement section for instructions on
installing a new battery, or contact an authorized dealer or
reseller for RTC battery replacement.
NOTE: Connecting the computer to a live AC outlet
prolongs the life of the RTC battery.
To access Control Panel in Windows 7, select Start, and
then select Control Panel.
To access Control Panel in Windows 8, from the Start
screen, type c, and then select Control Panel from the list of
applications.
254 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Cursor will not move using the arrow keys on the keypad.
Cause
Solution
The Num Lock key is turned on.
Press the Num Lock key. The Num Lock light must be off if
you want to use the arrow keys on the keypad. You can also
disable or enable the Num Lock key in Computer Setup at
Advanced > Device Options.
There is no sound or sound volume is too low.
Cause
Solution
System volume may be set low or muted.
1.
Check the Computer Setup settings to make sure the
internal system speaker is not muted (this setting does
not affect the external speakers).
2.
Make sure the external speakers are properly
connected and powered on and that the speakers'
volume control is set correctly.
3.
Use the system volume control available in the
operating system to make sure the speakers are not
muted or to increase the volume.
Cannot remove computer cover or access panel.
Cause
Solution
Smart Cover Lock, featured on some computers, is locked.
Unlock the Smart Cover Lock using Computer Setup.
In case of forgotten password, power loss, or computer
malfunction, you must manually disable the Smart Cover
lock . A key to unlock the Smart Cover Lock is not available
from HP. Keys are typically available from a hardware store.
Poor performance.
Cause
Solution
Processor is too hot.
1.
Make sure airflow to the computer is not blocked. Leave
a 10.2-cm (4-inch) clearance on all vented sides of the
computer and above the monitor to permit the required
airflow.
2.
Make sure fans are connected and working properly
(some fans only operate when needed).
3.
Make sure the processor heat sink is installed properly.
Hard drive is full.
Transfer data from the hard drive to create more space on
the hard drive.
Low on memory.
Add more memory.
Hard drive fragmented.
Defragment hard drive.
Program previously accessed did not release reserved
memory back to the system.
Restart the computer.
Solving General Problems 255
Table 10-1 Solving General Problems (continued)
Poor performance.
Cause
Solution
Virus resident on the hard drive.
Run virus protection program.
Too many applications running.
Windows 7:
1.
Close unnecessary applications to free up memory.
2.
Add more memory.
3.
Some applications run in the background and can be
closed by right-clicking on their corresponding icons in
the task tray. To prevent these applications from
launching at startup:
In Windows 7:
a.
Go to Start > All Programs > Accessories > Run
b.
Type msconfig, and then press Enter.
c.
On the Startup tab of the System Configuration
Utility, clear applications that you do not want to
launch automatically, and the click OK.
In Windows 8:
Some software applications, especially games, are stressful
on the graphics subsystem.
Cause unknown.
256 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
a.
On the Start screen, right-click, and then select the
All apps icon.
b.
Under Windows System, click Run.
c.
Type msconfig, and then press Enter.
d.
On the Startup tab of the System Configuration
Utility, clear applications that you do not want to
launch automatically, and the click OK.
1.
Lower the display resolution for the current application
or consult the documentation that came with the
application for suggestions on how to improve
performance by adjusting parameters in the application.
2.
Add more memory.
3.
Upgrade the graphics solution.
Restart the computer.
Computer powered off automatically and the Power LED flashes Red two times, once every second, followed by a
two second pause, and the computer beeps two times. (Beeps stop after fifth iteration but LEDs continue flashing).
Cause
Solution
Processor thermal protection activated:
1.
Ensure that the computer air vents are not blocked and
the processor cooling fan is running.
2.
Open the access panel, press the power button, and
see if the processor fan (or other system fan) spins. If
the fan does not spin, make sure the fan cable is
plugged onto the system board header.
3.
If fan a plugged in and not spinning, replace it.
A fan may be blocked or not turning.
OR
The heat sink is not properly attached to the processor.
System does not power on and the LEDs on the front of the computer are not flashing.
Cause
Solution
System unable to power on.
Press and hold the power button for less than 4 seconds. If
the hard drive LED turns green, then:
1.
If equipped with a voltage selector, check that the
voltage selector (located on the rear of the power
supply) is set to the appropriate voltage. Proper voltage
setting depends on your region.
2.
Remove the expansion cards one at a time until the
5V_aux light on the system board turns on.
3.
Replace the system board.
OR
Press and hold the power button for less than 4 seconds. If
the hard drive LED does not turn on green then:
1.
Check that the unit is plugged into a working AC outlet.
2.
Open the access panel and check that the power button
cable is properly connected to the system board.
3.
Check that the power supply cables are properly
connected to the system board.
4.
Check to see if the 5V_aux light on the system board is
turned on. If it is turned on, then replace the power
button assembly.
5.
If the 5V_aux light on the system board is off, then
replace the power supply.
6.
Replace the system board.
Solving General Problems 257
Solving Power Problems
Common causes and solutions for power problems are listed in the following table.
Table 10-2 Solving Power Problems
Power supply shuts down intermittently.
Cause
Solution
If equipped with a voltage selector, voltage selector switch
on rear of computer chassis (some models) not switched to
correct line voltage (115V or 230V).
Select the proper AC voltage using the selector switch.
Power supply will not turn on because of internal power
supply fault.
Replace the power supply.
Computer powered off automatically and the Power LED flashes Red two times, once every second, followed by a
two second pause, and the computer beeps two times. (Beeps stop after fifth iteration but LEDs continue flashing.)
Cause
Solution
Processor thermal protection activated:
1.
Ensure that the computer air vents are not blocked and
the processor cooling fan is running.
2.
Open the access panel, press the power button, and
see if the processor fan (or other system fan) spins. If
the fan does not spin, make sure the fan cable is
plugged onto the system board header.
3.
If fan a plugged in and not spinning, replace it.
A fan may be blocked or not turning.
OR
The heat sink is not properly attached to the processor.
258 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Power LED flashes Red four times, once every second, followed by a two second pause, and the computer beeps
four times. (Beeps stop after fifth iteration but LEDs continue flashing.)
Cause
Solution
Power failure (power supply is overloaded).
1.
If equipped with a voltage selector, check that the
voltage selector, located on the rear of the power supply
(some models), is set to the appropriate voltage. Proper
voltage setting depends on your region.
2.
Open the access panel and ensure the power supply
cable is seated into the connector on the system board.
3.
Check if a device is causing the problem by removing
ALL attached devices (such as hard drives or optical
drives and expansion cards). Power on the system. If
the system enters POST, then power off and replace
one device at a time and repeat this procedure until
failure occurs. Replace the device that is causing the
failure. Continue adding devices one at a time to ensure
all devices are functioning properly.
4.
Replace the power supply.
5.
Replace the system board.
The incorrect external power supply adapter is being used on
the All-in One or USDT.
The power supply adapter must be at the correct power
rating and use the Smart ID technology before the system
will power up. Replace the power supply adapter with the
HP-supplied power supply adapter.
Solving Power Problems 259
Solving Hard Drive Problems
Table 10-3 Solving Hard Drive Problems
Hard drive error occurs.
Cause
Solution
Hard disk has bad sectors or has failed.
1.
In Windows 7, click Start, click Computer, and rightclick on a drive. Select Properties, and then select the
Tools tab. Under Error-checking click Check Now.
In Windows 8, on the Start screen type e, and then
select File Explorer from the list of applications. In the
left column, expand Computer, right-click on a drive,
select Properties, and then select the Tools tab. Under
Error checking click Check.
2.
Use a utility to locate and block usage of bad sectors. If
necessary, reformat the hard disk.
Disk transaction problem.
Cause
Solution
Either the directory structure is bad or there is a problem with
a file.
In Windows 7, click Start, expand Computer, and right-click
on a drive. Select Properties, and then select the Tools tab.
Under Error-checking click Check Now.
In Windows 8, on the Start screen type e, and then click File
Explorer from the list of applications. In the left column,
expand Computer, right-click on a drive, select Properties,
and then select the Tools tab. Under Error checking click
Check.
Drive not found (identified).
Cause
Solution
Cable could be loose.
Check cable connections.
The system may not have automatically recognized a newly
installed device.
See reconfiguration directions in the Solving Hardware
Installation Problems on page 276 section. If the system still
does not recognize the new device, check to see if the
device is listed within Computer Setup. If it is listed, the
probable cause is a driver problem. If it is not listed, the
probable cause is a hardware problem.
If this is a newly installed drive, run the Computer Setup
utility and try adding a POST delay under Advanced >
Power-On Options.
The device is attached to a SATA port that has been hidden
in Computer Setup.
Run the Computer Setup utility and ensure Device Available
is selected for the device's SATA port in Security > Device
Security.
Drive responds slowly immediately after power-up.
Run Computer Setup and increase the POST Delay in
Advanced > Power-On Options.
260 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Nonsystem disk/NTLDR missing message.
Cause
Solution
The system is trying to start from the hard drive but the hard
drive may have been damaged.
1.
Perform Drive Protection System (DPS) testing in
system ROM.
System files missing or not properly installed.
1.
Insert bootable media and restart the computer.
2.
Boot to the windows installation media and select the
recovery option. If only a restore kit is available, then
select the File Backup Program option, and then
restore the system.
3.
Install system files for the appropriate operating system.
Hard drive boot has been disabled in Computer Setup.
Run the Computer Setup utility and enable the hard drive
entry in the Storage > Boot Order list.
Bootable hard drive is not attached as first in a multi-hard
drive configuration.
If attempting to boot from a hard drive, ensure it is attached
to the system board dark blue SATA connector.
Bootable hard drive is not listed first in the Boot Order.
Run the Computer Setup utility and select Storage > Boot
Order and ensure the bootable hard drive is listed
immediately under the Hard Drive entry.
Computer will not boot from hard drive.
Cause
Solution
The device is attached to a SATA port that has been hidden
in Computer Setup.
1.
Check SATA cable connections.
2.
Run the Computer Setup utility and ensure Device
Available is selected for the device's SATA port in
Security > Device Security.
Boot order is not correct.
Run the Computer Setup utility and change boot sequence in
Storage > Boot Order.
Hard Drive's “Emulation Type” is set to “None.” (some
models)
Run the Computer Setup utility and change the “Emulation
Type” to “Hard Disk” in the device's details under Storage >
Device Configuration.
Hard drive is damaged.
Observe if the front panel Power LED is blinking RED and if
any beeps are heard. See Appendix A, POST Error
Messages on page 292 to determine possible causes for the
blinking red and beep codes.
See the Worldwide Limited Warranty for terms and
conditions.
Solving Hard Drive Problems 261
Computer seems to be locked up.
Cause
Solution
Program in use has stopped responding to commands.
1.
Use the task manager to close programs that do not
respond.
2.
Attempt the normal Windows “Shut Down” procedure. If
this fails, press the power button for four or more
seconds to turn off the power. To restart the computer,
press the power button again.
262 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Media Card Reader Problems
Table 10-4 Solving Media Card Reader Problems
Media card will not work in a digital camera after formatting it in Windows.
Cause
Solution
By default, Windows will format any media card with a
capacity greater than 32MB with the FAT32 format. Some
digital cameras use the FAT (FAT16 & FAT12) format and
can not operate with a FAT32 formatted card.
Either format the media card in the digital camera or select
FAT file system to format the media card in a computer with
Windows.
A write-protected or locked error occurs when attempting to write to the media card.
Cause
Solution
Media card is locked. Locking the media card is a safety
feature that prevents writing to and deleting from an SD/
Memory Stick/PRO card.
If using an SD card, make sure that the lock tab located on
the right of the SD card is not in the locked position. If using
a Memory Stick/PRO card, make sure that the lock tab
located on the bottom of the Memory Stick/PRO card is not
in the locked position.
Can not write to the media card.
Cause
Solution
The media card is a read-only memory (ROM) card.
Check the manufacturer’s documentation included with your
card to see if it writable. Refer to the previous section for a
list of compatible cards.
Media card is locked. Locking the media card is a safety
feature that prevents writing to and deleting from an SD/
Memory Stick/PRO card.
If using an SD card, make sure that the lock tab located on
the right of the SD card is not in the locked position. If using
a Memory Stick/PRO card, make sure that the lock tab
located on the bottom of the Memory Stick/PRO card is not
in the locked position.
Unable to access data on the media card after inserting it into a slot.
Cause
Solution
The media card is not inserted properly, is inserted in the
wrong slot, or is not supported.
Ensure that the card is inserted properly with the gold
contact on the correct side. The green LED will light if
inserted properly.
Solving Media Card Reader Problems 263
Do not know how to remove a media card correctly.
Cause
Solution
The computer’s software is used to safely eject the card.
In Windows 7, click Start, select Computer, right-click on the
corresponding drive icon, and then select Eject. Pull the card
out of the slot.
In Windows 8, on the Start screen, type e, and then click File
Explorer from the list of applications. Expand Computer,
right-click on the corresponding drive icon, and then select
Eject. Pull the card out of the slot.
NOTE: Never remove the card when the green LED is
flashing
After installing the media card reader and booting to Windows, the reader and the inserted cards are not recognized
by the computer.
Cause
Solution
The operating system needs time to recognize the device if
the reader was just installed into the computer and you are
turning the PC on for the first time.
Wait a few seconds so that the operating system can
recognize the reader and the available ports, and then
recognize the media inserted in the reader.
After inserting a media card in the reader, the computer attempts to boot from the media card.
Cause
Solution
The inserted media card has boot capability.
1.
If you do not want to boot from the media card, remove
it during boot or do not select the option to boot from the
inserted media card during the boot process.
2.
During POST (Power On Self-Test), press F9 to modify
the boot menu.
3.
Change the boot sequence in F10 Computer Setup.
264 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Display Problems
If you encounter display problems, see the documentation that came with the monitor and to the
common causes and solutions listed in the following table.
Table 10-5 Solving Display Problems
Blank screen (no video).
Cause
Solution
Monitor is not turned on and the monitor light is not on.
Turn on the monitor and check that the monitor light is on.
Bad monitor.
Try a different monitor.
The cable connections are not correct.
Check the cable connection from the monitor to the computer
and to the electrical outlet.
You may have a screen blanking utility installed or energy
saver features are enabled.
Press any key or click the mouse button and type your
password (if set).
System ROM is corrupted; system is running in Boot Block
Emergency Recovery Mode (indicated by eight beeps).
Reflash the system ROM with the latest BIOS image.
You are using a fixed-sync monitor and it will not sync at the
resolution chosen.
Be sure that the monitor can accept the same horizontal
scan rate as the resolution chosen.
Computer is in Sleep state.
Press the power button to resume from Sleep state.
CAUTION: When attempting to resume from Sleep state,
do not hold down the power button for more than four
seconds. Otherwise, the computer will shut down and you
will lose any unsaved data.
Monitor cable is plugged into the wrong connector.
Systems may have a monitor connection on both the
motherboard or an add-in card. Try moving the monitor
connection to a different connector on the back of the
computer
Monitor settings in the computer are not compatible with the
monitor.
1.
In Control Panel, select Category from the View by list,
then under Appearance and Personalization, select
Adjust screen resolution.
To access Control Panel in Windows 7, click Start, and
then select Control Panel.
To access Control Panel in Windows 8, from the Start
screen, type c, and then select Control Panel from the
list of applications.
2.
Monitor is configured to use an input that is not active.
Expand the Resolution box, and then use the sliding
control to reset the resolution.
Use the monitor's on-screen menu controls to select the
input that is being driven by the system. Refer to the
monitor's user documentation for more information on the onscreen controls and settings.
Solving Display Problems 265
Blank screen and the power LED flashes Red five times, once every second, followed by a two second pause, and
the computer beeps five times. (Beeps stop after fifth iteration but LEDs continue flashing.)
Cause
Solution
Pre-video memory error.
1.
Reseat DIMMs. Power on the system.
2.
Replace DIMMs one at a time to isolate the faulty
module.
3.
Replace third-party memory with HP memory.
4.
Replace the system board.
Blank screen and the power LED flashes Red six times, once every second, followed by a two second pause, and
the computer beeps six times. (Beeps stop after fifth iteration but LEDs continue flashing.)
Cause
Solution
Pre-video graphics error.
For systems with a graphics card:
1.
Reseat the graphics card (if applicable). Power on the
system.
2.
Replace the graphics card (if applicable).
3.
Replace the system board.
For systems with integrated graphics, replace the system
board.
Blank screen and the power LED flashes Red seven times, once every second, followed by a two second pause, and
the computer beeps seven times. (Beeps stop after fifth iteration but LEDs continue flashing.)
Cause
Solution
System board failure (ROM detected failure prior to video).
Replace the system board.
Monitor does not function properly when used with energy saver features.
Cause
Solution
Monitor without energy saver capabilities is being used with
energy saver features enabled.
Disable monitor energy saver feature.
Dim characters.
Cause
Solution
The brightness and contrast controls are not set properly.
Adjust the monitor brightness and contrast controls.
Cables are not properly connected.
Check that the graphics cable is securely connected to the
graphics card (if applicable) or video connector and the
monitor.
266 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Blurry video or requested resolution cannot be set.
Cause
Solution
If the graphics controller was upgraded, the correct graphics
drivers may not be loaded.
Install the video drivers included in the upgrade kit.
Monitor is not capable of displaying requested resolution.
Change requested resolution.
Graphics card is bad.
Replace the graphics card.
The picture is broken up, rolls, jitters, or flashes.
Cause
Solution
The monitor connections may be incomplete or the monitor
may be incorrectly adjusted.
1.
Be sure the monitor cable is securely connected to the
computer.
2.
In a two-monitor system or if another monitor is in close
proximity, be sure the monitors are not interfering with
each other’s electromagnetic field by moving them
apart.
3.
Fluorescent lights or fans may be too close to the
monitor.
Monitor needs to be degaussed.
Degauss the monitor. Refer to the documentation that came
with the monitor for instructions.
Image is not centered.
Cause
Solution
Position may need adjustment.
Press the monitor's Menu button to access the OSD menu.
Select ImageControl/ Horizontal Position or Vertical
Position to adjust the horizontal or vertical position of the
image.
“No Connection, Check Signal Cable” displays on screen.
Cause
Solution
Monitor video cable is disconnected.
Connect the video cable between the monitor and computer.
CAUTION: Ensure that the computer power is off while
connecting the video cable.
Solving Display Problems 267
“Out of Range” displays on screen.
Cause
Solution
Video resolution and refresh rate are set higher than what
the monitor supports.
Restart the computer and enter Safe Mode. Change the
settings to a supported setting then restart the computer so
that the new settings take effect.
To enter Safe Mode in Windows 7:
1.
Restart the computer.
2.
Press and hold the F8 key as your computer restarts,
before the Windows logo appears. If the Windows logo
appears, you must restart the computer and try again.
3.
On the Advanced Boot Options screen, use the arrow
keys to highlight the safe mode option you want, and
then press Enter.
4.
Log on to your computer with a user account that has
administrator rights.
When your computer is in safe mode, Safe Mode
displays in the corners of your monitor. To exit safe
mode, restart your computer and let Windows start
normally.
To enter Safe Mode in Windows 8:
1.
Press the Windows logo + l to open the Settings charm.
2.
Select Change PC Settings, select General, and then
under Advanced startup, click Restart now.
3.
Select Troubleshoot, select Advanced options, select
Startup Settings, and then click Restart.
4.
Use the function keys or number keys to select the safe
mode option you want.
When your computer is in safe mode, Safe Mode
displays in the corners of your monitor. To exit safe
mode, restart your computer and let Windows start
normally.
High pitched noise coming from inside a flat panel monitor.
Cause
Solution
Brightness and/or contrast settings are too high.
Lower brightness and/or contrast settings.
268 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Fuzzy focus; streaking, ghosting, or shadowing effects; horizontal scrolling lines; faint vertical bars; or unable to
center the picture on the screen (flat panel monitors using an analog VGA input connection only).
Cause
Solution
Flat panel monitor’s internal digital conversion circuits may
be unable to correctly interpret the output synchronization of
the graphics card.
1.
Select the monitor’s Auto-Adjustment option in the
monitor’s on-screen display menu.
2.
Manually synchronize the Clock and Clock Phase onscreen display functions. To download a SoftPaq that
will assist you with the synchronization, go to the
following Web site, select the appropriate monitor, and
download either SP32347 or SP32202:
http://www.hp.com/support
1.
Reseat the graphics card.
2.
Replace the graphics card.
Graphics card is not seated properly or is bad (some
models).
Certain typed symbols do not appear correct.
Cause
Solution
The font you are using does not support that particular
symbol.
Use the Character Map to locate and select the appropriate
symbol. You can copy the symbol from the Character Map
into a document.
In Windows 7, click Start, select All Programs, select
Accessories, select System Tools, and then select
Character Map.
In Windows 8, on the Start screen, type ch, and then select
Character Map from the list of applications.
Solving Display Problems 269
Solving Audio Problems
If the computer has audio features and you encounter audio problems, see the common causes and
solutions listed in the following table.
Table 10-6 Solving Audio Problems
Sound cuts in and out.
Cause
Solution
Processor resources are being used by other open
applications.
Shut down all open processor-intensive applications.
Sound does not come out of the speaker or headphones.
Cause
Solution
Software volume control is turned down or muted.
Double-click the Speaker icon on the taskbar, then make
sure that Mute is not selected and use the volume slider to
adjust the volume.
NOTE: In Windows 8, the taskbar is available at the bottom
of the Desktop screen.
Audio is hidden in Computer Setup.
Enable the audio in Computer Setup: Security >
Device Security > System Audio.
The external speakers are not turned on.
Turn on the external speakers.
The audio device may be connected to the wrong jack.
Ensure that the device is connected to the correct jack on the
computer. The rear audio jack output is the green receptacle.
The speakers should be plugged into the line-out jack and
the headphones should be plugged into the headphone jack.
External speakers plugged into the wrong audio jack on a
recently installed sound card.
See the sound card documentation for proper speaker
connection. The rear audio jack output is the green
receptacle.
Headphones or devices connected to the line-out connector
mute the internal speaker.
Turn on and use headphones or external speakers, if
connected, or disconnect headphones or external speakers.
Computer is in Sleep state.
Press the power button to resume from Sleep state.
CAUTION: When attempting to resume from Sleep state,
do not hold down the power button for more than four
seconds. Otherwise, the computer will shut down and you
will lose any unsaved data.
Internal speaker is disabled in Computer Setup.
Enable the internal speaker in Computer Setup. Select
Advanced > Device Options > Internal Speaker.
The application is set to use a different audio device than
speakers.
Some graphics cards support audio over the DisplayPort
connection (if applicable), so multiple audio devices may be
listed in Device Manager. Make sure the correct device is
being used.
To access Device Manager in Windows 7, click Start, select
Control Panel, and then select Device Manager.
To access Device Manager in Windows 8, from the Start
screen, type c, select Control Panel from the list of
applications, and then select Device Manager.
270 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Table 10-6 Solving Audio Problems (continued)
Sound does not come out of the speaker or headphones.
Cause
Solution
Some applications can select which audio output device is
used.
Make sure the application has selected the correct audio
device.
The operating system controls may be set to use a different
audio device as the default output device than what is
expected.
Set the operating system to use the correct audio device.
Sound from headphones is not clear or muffled.
Cause
Solution
Headphones are plugged into the rear audio output
connector. The rear audio output connector is for powered
audio devices and is not designed for headphone use.
Plug the headphones into the headphone connector on the
front of the computer.
Computer appears to be locked up while recording audio.
Cause
Solution
The hard disk may be full.
Before recording, make sure there is enough free space on
the hard disk. You can also try recording the audio file in a
compressed format.
Line-in jack is not functioning properly.
Cause
Solution
Jack has been reconfigured in the audio driver or application
software.
In the audio driver or application software, reconfigure the
jack or set the jack to its default value.
There is no sound or sound volume is too low.
Cause
Solution
The application is set to use a different audio device than
speakers.
Some graphics cards support audio over the DisplayPort
connection (if applicable), so multiple audio devices may be
listed in Device Manager. Make sure the correct device is
being used.
To access Device Manager in Windows 7, click Start, select
Control Panel, and then select Device Manager.
To access Device Manager in Windows 8, from the Start
screen, type c, select Control Panel from the list of
applications, and then select Device Manager.
Solving Audio Problems 271
Table 10-6 Solving Audio Problems (continued)
There is no sound or sound volume is too low.
Cause
Solution
Some applications can select which audio output device is
used.
Make sure the application has selected the correct audio
device.
The operating system controls may be set to use a different
audio device as the default output device than what is
expected.
Set the operating system to use the correct audio device.
Solving Printer Problems
If you encounter printer problems, see the documentation that came with the printer and to the
common causes and solutions listed in the following table.
Table 10-7 Solving Printer Problems
Printer will not print.
Cause
Solution
Printer is not turned on and online.
Turn the printer on and make sure it is online.
The correct printer drivers for the application are not
installed.
1.
Install the correct printer driver for the application.
2.
Try printing using the MS-DOS command:
DIR C:\ > [printer port]
where [printer port] is the address of the printer being
used. If the printer works, reload the printer driver.
To run MS-DOS commands, press the Windows key + r, type
cmd in the Open box, and then click OK.
If you are on a network, you may not have made the
connection to the printer.
Make the proper network connections to the printer.
Printer may have failed.
Run printer self-test.
Printer will not turn on.
Cause
Solution
The cables may not be connected properly.
Reconnect all cables and check the power cord and
electrical outlet.
Printer prints garbled information.
Cause
Solution
The correct printer driver for the application is not installed.
Install the correct printer driver for the application.
272 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Table 10-7 Solving Printer Problems (continued)
Printer prints garbled information.
Cause
Solution
The cables may not be connected properly.
Reconnect all cables.
Printer memory may be overloaded.
Reset the printer by turning it off for one minute, then turn it
back on.
Printer will not print.
Cause
Solution
The printer may be out of paper.
Check the paper tray and refill it if it is empty.
Solving Printer Problems 273
Solving Keyboard and Mouse Problems
If you encounter keyboard or mouse problems, see the documentation that came with the equipment
and to the common causes and solutions listed in the following table.
Table 10-8 Solving Keyboard Problems
A wireless keyboard/mouse is not working correctly. Symptoms include lagging mouse movement, jumpy mouse/
keyboard, or no function of mouse/keyboard and external drive.
Cause
Solution
If your computer is equipped with USB 3.0 ports, connected
USB 3.0 devices can interfere with the wireless keyboard
USB receiver.
Connect the wireless keyboard USB receiver to a USB 2.0
port that is separated from ports with USB 3.0 devices. If you
still experience interference, you may have to place the
connectors farther apart using an external USB hub.
Keyboard commands and typing are not recognized by the computer.
Cause
Solution
Keyboard connector is not properly connected.
Shut down the computer, reconnect the keyboard to the back
of the computer, and then restart the computer.
Program in use has stopped responding to commands.
Shut down your computer using the mouse and then restart
the computer.
Keyboard needs repairs.
See the Worldwide Limited Warranty for terms and
conditions.
Computer is in Sleep state.
Press the power button to resume from Sleep state.
CAUTION: When attempting to resume from Sleep date,
do not hold down the power button for more than four
seconds. Otherwise, the computer will shut down and you
will lose any unsaved data.
Cursor will not move using the arrow keys on the keypad.
Cause
Solution
The Num Lock key is on.
Press the Num Lock key. The Num Lock light should be off if
you want to use the arrow keys on the keypad. You can
disable or enable the Num Lock key in Computer Setup at
Advanced > Device Options.
274 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Table 10-9 Solving Mouse Problems
Mouse does not respond to movement or is too slow.
Cause
Solution
Mouse connector is not properly plugged into the back of the
computer.
Shut down the computer using the keyboard.
Windows 7:
1.
Press the Ctrl and Esc keys at the same time (or press
the Windows logo key) to display the Start menu.
2.
Use the arrow keys to select Shut Down and then
press Enter.
3.
After the shutdown is complete, plug the mouse
connector into the back of the computer (or the
keyboard) and restart.
Windows 8:
1.
Press the Windows logo + l to open the Settings charm.
2.
Use the arrow keys to select Power, and then press
Enter.
3.
Use the arrow keys to select Shut Down, and then
press Enter.
4.
After the shutdown is complete, plug the mouse
connector into the back of the computer (or the
keyboard) and restart.
Program in use has stopped responding to commands.
Shut down the computer using the keyboard then restart the
computer.
Mouse may need cleaning.
Remove the roller ball cover on the mouse and clean the
internal components.
Mouse may need repair.
See the Worldwide Limited Warranty for terms and
conditions.
Computer is in Sleep state.
Press the power button to resume from Sleep state.
CAUTION: When attempting to resume from Sleep state,
do not hold down the power button for more than four
seconds. Otherwise, the computer will shut down and you
will lose any unsaved data.
Mouse will only move vertically, horizontally, or movement is jerky.
Cause
Solution
Mouse roller ball or the rotating encoder shafts that make
contact with the ball are dirty.
Remove roller ball cover from the bottom of the mouse and
clean the internal components with a mouse cleaning kit
available from most computer stores.
Solving Keyboard and Mouse Problems 275
Solving Hardware Installation Problems
You may need to reconfigure the computer when you add or remove hardware, such as an additional
drive or expansion card. If you install a plug and play device, Windows automatically recognizes the
device and configures the computer. If you install a non-plug and play device, you must reconfigure
the computer after completing installation of the new hardware. In Windows, use the Add Hardware
Wizard and follow the instructions that appear on the screen.
To open the Add Hardware Wizard, open a Command Prompt and open hdwwiz.exe.
WARNING! When the computer is plugged into an AC power source, voltage is always applied to
the system board. To reduce the risk of personal injury from electrical shock and/or hot surfaces, be
sure to disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet and allow the internal system components to
cool before touching.
Table 10-10 Solving Hardware Installation Problems
A new device is not recognized as part of the system.
Cause
Solution
Device is not seated or connected properly.
Ensure that the device is properly and securely connected
and that pins in the connector are not bent down.
Cable(s) of new external device are loose or power cables
are unplugged.
Ensure that all cables are properly and securely connected
and that pins in the cable or connector are not bent down.
Power switch of new external device is not turned on.
Turn off the computer, turn on the external device, then turn
on the computer to integrate the device with the computer
system.
When the system advised you of changes to the
configuration, you did not accept them.
Reboot the computer and follow the instructions for
accepting the changes.
A plug and play board may not automatically configure when
added if the default configuration conflicts with other devices.
Use Windows Device Manager to deselect the automatic
settings for the board and choose a basic configuration that
does not cause a resource conflict. You can also use
Computer Setup to reconfigure or disable devices to resolve
the resource conflict.
To access Device Manager in Windows 7, click Start, select
Control Panel, and then select Device Manager.
To access Device Manager in Windows 8, from the Start
screen, type c, select Control Panel from the list of
applications, and then select Device Manager.
USB ports on the computer are disabled in Computer Setup.
276 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Run the Computer Setup utility and ensure that Device
available is selected for appropriate USB ports under
Security > USB Security.
Computer will not start.
Cause
Solution
Wrong memory modules were used in the upgrade or
memory modules were installed in the wrong location.
1.
Review the documentation that came with the system to
determine if you are using the correct memory modules
and to verify the proper installation.
NOTE: DIMM1 or XMM1 must always be installed. On
all computers except the USDT, DIMM1 must be
installed before DIMM2, and DIMM3 must be installed
before DIMM4.
2.
Observe the beeps and LED lights on the front of the
computer. Beeps and flashing LEDs are codes for
specific problems.
3.
If you still cannot resolve the issue, contact Customer
Support.
Power LED flashes Red five times, once every second, followed by a two second pause, and the computer beeps
five times. (Beeps stop after fifth iteration but LEDs continue flashing.)
Cause
Solution
Memory is installed incorrectly or is bad.
CAUTION: To avoid damage to the DIMMs or the system
board, you must unplug the computer power cord before
attempting to reseat, install, or remove a DIMM module.
1.
Reseat DIMMs. Power on the system.
2.
Replace DIMMs one at a time to isolate the faulty
module.
NOTE: DIMM1 or XMM1 must always be installed. On
all computers except the USDT, DIMM1 must be
installed before DIMM2, and DIMM3 must be installed
before DIMM4
3.
Replace third-party memory with HP memory.
4.
Replace the system board.
Power LED flashes Red six times, once every second, followed by a two second pause, and the computer beeps six
times. (Beeps stop after fifth iteration but LEDs continue flashing.)
Cause
Solution
Graphics card (some models) is not seated properly or is
bad, or system board is bad.
For systems with a graphics card:
1.
Reseat the graphics card. Power on the system.
2.
Replace the graphics card.
3.
Replace the system board.
For systems with integrated graphics, replace the system
board.
Solving Hardware Installation Problems 277
Power LED flashes Red ten times, once every second, followed by a two second pause, and the computer beeps ten
times. (Beeps stop after fifth iteration but LEDs continue flashing.)
Cause
Solution
Bad option card.
1.
Check each option card by removing the cards one at
time (if multiple cards), then power on the system to see
if fault goes away.
2.
Once bad card is identified, remove and replace bad
option card.
3.
Replace the system board.
Solving Network Problems
Some common causes and solutions for network problems are listed in the following table. These
guidelines do not discuss the process of debugging the network cabling.
Table 10-11 Solving Network Problems
Wake-on-LAN feature is not functioning.
Cause
Solution
S5 Maximum Power Saving feature is enabled.
Disable the S5 Maximum Power Saving option in Computer
Setup. Select Power > Hardware Power Management > S5
Maximum Power Savings.
S5 Wake on LAN is disabled (some models).
Enable the S5 Wake on LAN option in Computer Setup.
Select Advanced > Device Options > S5 Wake on LAN.
Wake-on-LAN is not enabled.
To enable Wake-on-LAN in Windows 7:
1.
Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Sharing
Center.
2.
Under Tasks, select Manage network connections.
3.
Click Local Area Connection.
4.
Click the Properties button.
5.
Click the Configure button.
6.
Click the Power Management tab, then select Allow
this device to wake the computer.
To enable Wake-on-LAN in Windows 8:
278 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
1.
From the Start screen, type c, and then select Control
Panel from the list of applications.
2.
Select Network and Sharing Center, and then click the
Ethernet link next to the connection.
3.
Click the Properties button.
4.
Click the Configure button.
5.
Click the Power Management tab, then enable the
appropriate Wake-on LAN option.
Network driver does not detect network controller.
Cause
Solution
Network controller is disabled.
1.
Run Computer Setup and enable network controller.
2.
Enable the network controller in the operating system
using Device Manager.
To access Device Manager in Windows 7, click Start,
select Control Panel, and then select Device
Manager.
To access Device Manager in Windows 8, from the
Start screen, type c, select Control Panel from the list
of applications, and then select Device Manager.
Incorrect network driver.
Check the network controller documentation for the correct
driver or obtain the latest driver from the manufacturer’s Web
site.
Network status link light never flashes.
NOTE: The network status light is supposed to flash when there is network activity.
Cause
Solution
No active network is detected.
Check cabling and network equipment for proper connection.
Network controller is not set up properly.
Check for the device status within Windows, such as Device
Manager for driver load and the Network Connections applet
within Windows for link status.
To access Device Manager in Windows 7, click Start, select
Control Panel, and then select Device Manager.
To access Device Manager in Windows 8, from the Start
screen, type c, select Control Panel from the list of
applications, and then select Device Manager.
Network controller is disabled.
1.
Run Computer Setup and enable network controller.
2.
Enable the network controller in the operating system
using Device Manager.
To access Device Manager in Windows 7, click Start,
select Control Panel, and then select Device
Manager.
To access Device Manager in Windows 8, from the
Start screen, type c, select Control Panel from the list
of applications, and then select Device Manager.
Network driver is not properly loaded.
Reinstall network drivers.
System cannot autosense the network.
Disable auto-sensing capabilities and force the system into
the correct operating mode.
Solving Network Problems 279
Diagnostics reports a failure.
Cause
Solution
The cable is not securely connected.
Ensure that the cable is securely attached to the network
connector and that the other end of the cable is securely
attached to the correct device.
The cable is attached to the incorrect connector.
Ensure that the cable is attached to the correct connector.
There is a problem with the cable or a device at the other
end of the cable.
Ensure that the cable and device at the other end are
operating correctly.
Network controller interrupt is shared with an expansion
board.
Under the Computer Setup Advanced menu, change the
resource settings for the board.
The network controller is defective.
Contact an authorized service provider.
Diagnostics passes, but the computer does not communicate with the network.
Cause
Solution
Network drivers are not loaded, or driver parameters do not
match current configuration.
Make sure the network drivers are loaded and that the driver
parameters match the configuration of the network controller.
Make sure the correct network client and protocol is installed.
The network controller is not configured for this computer.
Select the Network and Sharing Center icon in the Control
Panel and configure the network controller.
To access Control Panel in Windows 7, click Start, and then
select Control Panel.
To access Control Panel in Windows 8, from the Start
screen, type c, and then select Control Panel.
Network controller stopped working when an expansion board was added to the computer.
Cause
Solution
Network controller interrupt is shared with an expansion
board.
Under the Computer Setup Advanced menu, change the
resource settings for the board.
The network controller requires drivers.
Verify that the drivers were not accidentally deleted when the
drivers for a new expansion board were installed.
The expansion board installed is a network card (NIC) and
conflicts with the embedded NIC.
Under the Computer Setup Advanced menu, change the
resource settings for the board.
Network controller stops working without apparent cause.
Cause
Solution
The files containing the network drivers are corrupted.
Reinstall the network drivers using the Recovery Disc Set in
Windows 7 or Windows recovery tools in Windows 8.
If necessary, download the softpaq from the web (from a
different computer).
280 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Table 10-11 Solving Network Problems (continued)
Network controller stops working without apparent cause.
Cause
Solution
The cable is not securely connected.
Ensure that the cable is securely attached to the network
connector and that the other end of the cable is securely
attached to the correct device.
The network controller is defective.
Contact an authorized service provider.
New network card will not boot.
Cause
Solution
New network card may be defective or may not meet
industry-standard specifications.
Install a working, industry-standard NIC, or change the boot
sequence to boot from another source.
Cannot connect to network server when attempting Remote System Installation.
Cause
Solution
The network controller is not configured properly.
Verify Network Connectivity, that a DHCP Server is present,
and that the Remote System Installation Server contains the
NIC drivers for your NIC.
System setup utility reports unprogrammed EEPROM.
Cause
Solution
Unprogrammed EEPROM.
Contact an authorized service provider.
Solving Memory Problems
If you encounter memory problems, some common causes and solutions are listed in the following
table.
CAUTION: Power may still be supplied to the DIMMs when the computer is turned off (depending
on the Management Engine (ME) settings). To avoid damage to the DIMMs or the system board, you
must unplug the computer power cord before attempting to reseat, install, or remove a memory
module.
For those systems that support ECC memory, HP does not support mixing ECC and non-ECC
memory. Otherwise, the computer will not boot the operating system.
NOTE: The memory count will be affected by configurations with the Management Engine (ME)
enabled. The ME uses 8MB of system memory in single channel mode or 16MB of memory in dualchannel mode to download, decompress, and execute the ME firmware for Out-of-Band (OOB), thirdparty data storage, and other management functions.
Solving Memory Problems 281
Table 10-12 Solving Memory Problems
System will not boot or does not function properly after installing additional memory modules.
Cause
Solution
A memory module is not installed in the DIMM1 or XMM1
socket.
Ensure that a memory module is installed in the DIMM1 or
XMM1 socket on the system board. This socket must be
populated with a memory module.
Memory module is not the correct type or speed grade for
the system or the new memory module is not seated
properly.
Replace module with the correct industry-standard device for
the computer. On some models, ECC and non-ECC memory
modules cannot be mixed.
Out of memory error.
Cause
Solution
You have run out of memory to run the application.
Check the application documentation to determine the
memory requirements.
Memory count during POST is wrong.
Cause
Solution
The memory modules may not be installed correctly.
Check that the memory modules have been installed
correctly and that proper modules are used.
Integrated graphics may use system memory.
No action required.
Insufficient memory error during operation.
Cause
Solution
Too many Terminate and Stay Resident programs (TSRs)
are installed.
Delete any TSRs that you do not need.
You have run out of memory for the application.
Check the memory requirements for the application or add
more memory to the computer.
Power LED flashes Red five times, once every second, followed by a two second pause, and the computer beeps
five times. (Beeps stop after fifth iteration but LEDs continue flashing.)
Cause
Solution
Memory is installed incorrectly or is bad.
1.
Reseat DIMMs. Power on the system.
2.
Replace DIMMs one at a time to isolate the faulty
module.
3.
Replace third-party memory with HP memory.
4.
Replace the system board.
282 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Processor Problems
If you encounter processor problems, common causes and solutions are listed in the following table.
Table 10-13 Solving Processor Problems
Poor performance is experienced.
Cause
Solution
Processor is hot.
1.
Make sure the airflow to the computer is not blocked.
2.
Make sure the fans are connected and working properly
(some fans only operate when needed).
3.
Make sure the processor heat sink is installed properly.
Power LED flashes Red three times, once every second, followed by a two second pause.
Cause
Solution
Processor is not seated properly or not installed.
1.
Check to see that the processor is present.
2.
Reseat the processor.
Power LED flashes Red eleven times, once every second, followed by a two second pause.
Cause
Solution
The current processor does not support a feature previously
enabled on this system.
1.
Install a TXT (Trusted Execution Technology) capable
processor.
2.
Disable TXT in the Computer Setup (F10) utility.
3.
Reinstall the original processor.
Solving CD-ROM and DVD Problems
If you encounter CD-ROM or DVD problems, see the common causes and solutions listed in the
following table or to the documentation that came with the optional device.
Table 10-14 Solving CD-ROM and DVD Problems
System will not boot from CD-ROM or DVD drive.
Cause
Solution
The device is attached to a SATA port that has been hidden
in the Computer Setup utility.
Run the Computer Setup utility and ensure Device Available
is selected for the device's SATA port in Security > Device
Security.
Removable Media Boot is disabled in the Computer Setup
utility.
Run the Computer Setup utility and enable booting to
removable media in Storage > Storage Options. Ensure
CD-ROM is enabled in Storage > Boot Order.
Solving Processor Problems 283
Table 10-14 Solving CD-ROM and DVD Problems (continued)
System will not boot from CD-ROM or DVD drive.
Cause
Solution
Network Boot is enabled in Computer Setup.
Run the Computer Setup utility and disable Network Boot in
Security > Network Boot.
Non-bootable CD in drive.
Try a bootable CD in the drive.
Boot order not correct.
Run the Computer Setup utility and change boot sequence in
Storage > Boot Order.
Drive not found (identified).
Cause
Solution
Cable could be loose.
Check cable connections.
The system may not have automatically recognized a newly
installed device.
See reconfiguration directions in the Solving Hardware
Installation Problems on page 276 section. If the system still
does not recognize the new device, check to see if the
device is listed within Computer Setup. If it is listed, the
probable cause is a driver problem. If it is not listed, the
probable cause is a hardware problem.
If this is a newly installed drive, run the Computer Setup
utility and try adding a POST delay under Advanced >
Power-On Options.
The device is attached to a SATA port that has been hidden
in Computer Setup.
Run the Computer Setup utility and ensure Device Available
is selected for the device's SATA port in Security > Device
Security.
Drive responds slowly immediately after power-up.
Run Computer Setup and increase the POST Delay in
Advanced > Power-On Options.
CD-ROM or DVD devices are not detected or driver is not loaded.
Cause
Solution
Drive is not connected properly or not properly configured.
See the documentation that came with the optional device.
Movie will not play in the DVD drive.
Cause
Solution
Movie may be regionalized for a different country.
See the documentation that came with the DVD drive.
Decoder software is not installed.
Install decoder software.
Damaged media.
Replace media.
Movie rating locked out by parental lock.
Use DVD software to remove parental lock.
Media installed upside down.
Reinstall media.
284 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Cannot eject compact disc (tray-load unit).
Cause
Solution
Disc not properly seated in the drive.
Turn off the computer and insert a thin metal rod into the
emergency eject hole and push firmly. Slowly pull the tray
out from the drive until the tray is fully extended, then remove
the disc.
CD-ROM, CD-RW, DVD-ROM, or DVD-R/RW drive cannot read a disc or takes too long to start.
Cause
Solution
Media is corrupt.
Try different media to confirm whether media is valid.
Media has been inserted upside down.
Re-insert the media with the label facing up.
The DVD-ROM drive takes longer to start because it has to
determine the type of media played, such as audio or video.
Wait at least 30 seconds to let the DVD-ROM drive
determine the type of media being played. If the disc still
does not start, read the other solutions listed for this topic.
CD or DVD disc is dirty.
Clean CD or DVD with a CD cleaning kit, available from most
computer stores.
Windows does not detect the CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive.
1.
Use Device Manager to remove or uninstall the device.
To access Device Manager in Windows 7, click Start,
select Control Panel, and then select Device
Manager.
To access Device Manager in Windows 8, from the
Start screen, type c, select Control Panel from the list
of applications, and then select Device Manager.
2.
Restart the computer and let Windows detect the CD or
DVD driver.
Recording or copying CDs is difficult or impossible.
Cause
Solution
Wrong or poor quality media type.
1.
Try using a slower speed when recording.
2.
Verify that you are using the correct media for the drive.
3.
Try a different brand of media. Quality varies widely
between manufacturers.
Solving USB Flash Drive Problems
If you encounter USB flash drive problems, common causes and solutions are listed in the following
table.
Solving USB Flash Drive Problems 285
Table 10-15 Solving USB Flash Drive Problems
USB flash drive is not seen as a drive letter in Windows.
Cause
Solution
The drive letter after the last physical drive is not available.
Change the default drive letter for the flash drive in Windows.
USB flash drive not found (identified).
Cause
Solution
The device is attached to a USB port that has been hidden in
Computer Setup.
Run the Computer Setup utility and enable USB ports in
Security > USB Security.
The device was not properly seated before power-up.
Ensure the device is fully inserted into the USB port before
applying power to the system
System will not boot from USB flash drive.
Cause
Solution
Boot order is not correct.
Run the Computer Setup utility and change boot sequence in
Storage > Boot Order.
Removable Media Boot is disabled in the Computer Setup
utility.
Run the Computer Setup utility and enable booting to
removable media in Storage > Storage Options. Ensure
USB is enabled in Storage > Boot Order.
The computer boots to DOS after making a bootable flash drive.
Cause
Solution
Flash drive is bootable.
Install the flash drive only after the operating system boots.
Flash drive is defective.
Try a different flash drive.
286 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Front Panel Component Problems
If you encounter problems with devices connected to the front panel, refer to the common causes and
solutions listed in the following table.
A USB device, headphone, or microphone is not recognized by the computer.
Cause
Solution
Device is not properly connected.
1.
Turn off the computer.
2.
Reconnect the device to the front of the computer and
restart the computer.
The device does not have power.
If the USB device requires AC power, be sure one end is
connected to the device and one end is connected to a live
outlet.
The correct device driver is not installed.
1.
Install the correct driver for the device.
2.
You might need to reboot the computer.
1.
If possible, replace the cable.
2.
Restart the computer.
1.
Replace the device.
2.
Restart the computer.
The cable from the device to the computer does not work.
The device is not working.
USB ports on the computer are disabled in Computer Setup.
Run the Computer Setup utility and ensure that the USB
ports are set to Enabled in Security > USB Security.
Solving Internet Access Problems
If you encounter Internet access problems, consult your Internet Service Provider (ISP) or refer to the
common causes and solutions listed in the following table.
Unable to connect to the Internet.
Cause
Solution
Internet Service Provider (ISP) account is not set up
properly.
Verify Internet settings or contact your ISP for assistance.
Web browser is not set up properly.
Verify that the Web browser is installed and set up to work
with your ISP.
Cable/DSL modem is not plugged in.
Plug in cable/DSL modem. You should see a “power” LED
light on the front of the cable/DSL modem.
Cable/DSL service is not available or has been interrupted
due to bad weather.
Try connecting to the Internet at a later time or contact your
ISP. (If the cable/DSL service is connected, the “cable” LED
light on the front of the cable/DSL modem will be on.)
The CAT5 UTP cable is disconnected.
Connect the CAT5 UTP cable between the cable modem
and the computers’s RJ-45 connector. (If the connection is
good, the “PC” LED light on the front of the cable/DSL
modem will be on.)
Solving Front Panel Component Problems 287
Unable to connect to the Internet.
Cause
Solution
IP address is not configured properly.
Contact your ISP for the correct IP address.
Cookies are corrupted. (A “cookie” is a small piece of
information that a Web server can store temporarily with the
Web browser. This is useful for having the browser
remember some specific information that the Web server can
later retrieve.)
Windows 7:
1.
Select Start > Control Panel.
2.
Click Internet Options.
3.
In the Browsing history section on the General tab,
click the Delete button.
4.
Select the Cookies check box and click the Delete
button.
Windows 8:
1.
From the Start screen, type c, and then select Control
Panel from the list of applications..
2.
Click Internet Options.
3.
In the Browsing history section on the General tab,
click the Delete button.
4.
Select the Cookies check box and click the Delete
button.
Cannot automatically launch Internet programs.
Cause
Solution
You must log on to your ISP before some programs will start.
Log on to your ISP and launch the desired program.
288 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Software Problems
Most software problems occur as a result of the following:
●
The application was not installed or configured correctly.
●
There is insufficient memory available to run the application.
●
There is a conflict between applications.
●
Be sure that all the needed device drivers have been installed.
●
If you have installed an operating system other than the factory-installed operating system,
check to be sure it is supported on the system.
If you encounter software problems, see the applicable solutions listed in the following table.
Computer will not continue and the HP logo does not display.
Cause
Solution
ROM issue - POST error has occurred.
Observe the beeps and LED lights on the front of the
computer. See Appendix A, POST Error Messages
on page 292 to determine possible causes.
See the Worldwide Limited Warranty for terms and
conditions.
Solving Software Problems 289
Computer will not continue after HP logo screen displays.
Cause
Solution
System files may be damaged.
In Windows 7, use recovery media to scan hard drive for
errors, or use Windows Startup Repair to fix problems that
might prevent Windows from starting correctly. Windows
Startup Repair is one of the recovery tools in the System
Recovery Options menu. You can also create a system
repair disc that contains the System Recovery Options
menu. If the problem is severe enough that Startup Repair
doesn't start on its own and you can't access the System
Recovery Options menu on your computer's hard disk, you
can get to the menu and start Startup Repair by using the
Windows installation disc or a system repair disc that you
created earlier.
In Windows 8, use Automatic Repair to fix problems that
might prevent Windows from starting correctly.
To access Automatic Repair:
1.
Press the Windows logo + l to open the Settings charm.
2.
Select Change PC Settings, select General, and then
under Advanced startup, click Restart now.
3.
Select Troubleshoot, select Advanced options, and
then select Automatic Repair.
Windows starts Automatic Repair.
4.
Select the account to use to begin Automatic Repair,
and type the password for the account.
Windows diagnoses the computer and attempts the
repair it.
“Illegal Operation has Occurred” error message is displayed.
Cause
Solution
Software being used is not Microsoft-certified for your
version of Windows.
Verify that the software is certified by Microsoft for your
version of Windows (see program packaging for this
information).
Configuration files are corrupt.
If possible, save all data, close all programs, and restart the
computer.
290 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Contacting Customer Support
For help and service, contact an authorized reseller or dealer. To locate a reseller or dealer near you,
visit http://www.hp.com.
NOTE: If you take the computer to an authorized reseller, dealer, or service provider for service,
remember to provide the setup and power-on passwords if they are set.
Refer to the number listed in the warranty or in the Support Telephone Numbers guide for technical
assistance.
Contacting Customer Support 291
11 POST Error Messages
This appendix lists the error codes, error messages, and the various indicator light and audible
sequences that you may encounter during Power-On Self-Test (POST) or computer restart, the
probable source of the problem, and steps you can take to resolve the error condition.
POST Message Disabled suppresses most system messages during POST, such as memory count
and non-error text messages. If a POST error occurs, the screen will display the error message. To
manually switch to the POST Messages Enabled mode during POST, press any key (except F10,
F11, or F12). The default mode is POST Message Disabled.
The speed at which the computer loads the operating system and the extent to which it is tested are
determined by the POST mode selection.
Quick Boot is a fast startup process that does not run all of the system level tests, such as the
memory test. Full Boot runs all of the ROM-based system tests and takes longer to complete.
Full Boot may also be enabled to run every 1 to 30 days on a regularly scheduled basis. To establish
the schedule, reconfigure the computer to the Full Boot Every x Days mode, using Computer Setup.
NOTE:
For more information on Computer Setup, see Computer Setup (F10) Utility on page 16.
292 Chapter 11 POST Error Messages
POST Numeric Codes and Text Messages
This section covers those POST errors that have numeric codes associated with them. The section
also includes some text messages that may be encountered during POST.
NOTE:
The computer will beep once after a POST text message is displayed on the screen.
Table 11-1 Numeric Codes and Text Messages
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
101-Option ROM Checksum Error
System ROM or expansion board option
ROM checksum.
1.
Verify the correct ROM.
2.
Flash the ROM if needed.
3.
If an expansion board was recently
added, remove it to see if the problem
remains.
4.
Clear CMOS. (See Appendix B,
Password Security and Resetting
CMOS on page 305.)
5.
If the message disappears, there may
be a problem with the expansion card.
6.
Replace the system board.
1.
Clear CMOS. (See Appendix B,
Password Security and Resetting
CMOS on page 305.)
2.
Remove expansion boards.
3.
Replace the system board.
1.
If a PCI expansion card was recently
added, remove it to see if the problem
remains.
2.
In Computer Setup, set Advanced >
Device Options > NIC PXE Option
ROM Download to DISABLE to
prevent PXE option ROM for the
internal NIC from being downloaded
during POST to free more memory for
an expansion card's option ROM.
Internal PXE option ROM is used for
booting from the NIC to a PXE server.
103-System Board Failure
110-Out of Memory Space for Option ROMs
162-System Options Not Set
DMA or timers.
Recently added PCI expansion card
contains an option ROM too large to
download during POST.
Configuration incorrect.
RTC (real-time clock) battery may need to
be replaced.
Run Computer Setup and check the
configuration in Advanced > Onboard
Devices.
Reset the date and time under Control
Panel. If the problem persists, replace the
RTC battery. See the Removal and
Replacement section for instructions on
installing a new battery, or contact an
authorized dealer or reseller for RTC battery
replacement.
POST Numeric Codes and Text Messages 293
Table 11-1 Numeric Codes and Text Messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
163-Time & Date Not Set
Invalid time or date in configuration
memory.
RTC (real-time clock) battery may need to
be replaced.
Reset the date and time under Control
Panel (Computer Setup can also be used).
If the problem persists, replace the RTC
battery. See the Removal and Replacement
section for instructions on installing a new
battery, or contact an authorized dealer or
reseller for RTC battery replacement.
163-Time & Date Not Set
CMOS jumper may not be properly
installed.
Check for proper placement of the CMOS
jumper if applicable.
164-MemorySize Error
Memory amount has changed since the last
boot (memory added or removed).
Press the F1 key to save the memory
changes.
164-MemorySize Error
Memory configuration incorrect.
1.
Run Computer Setup or Windows
utilities.
2.
Make sure the memory module(s) are
installed properly.
3.
If third-party memory has been added,
test using HP-only memory.
4.
Verify proper memory module type.
1.
Ensure memory modules are correctly
installed.
2.
Verify proper memory module type.
3.
Remove and replace the identified
faulty memory module(s).
4.
If the error persists after replacing
memory modules, replace the system
board.
A memory module in memory socket
identified in the error message is missing
critical SPD information, or is incompatible
with the chipset.
1.
Verify proper memory module type.
2.
Try another memory socket.
3.
Replace DIMM with a module
conforming to the SPD standard.
214-DIMM Configuration Warning
Populated DIMM Configuration is not
optimized.
Rearrange the DIMMs so that each channel
has the same amount of memory.
219-ECC Memory Module Detected ECC
Modules not supported on this Platform
Recently added memory module(s) support
ECC memory error correction.
1.
If additional memory was recently
added, remove it to see if the problem
remains.
2.
Check product documentation for
memory support information.
1.
Reconnect keyboard with computer
turned off.
2.
Check connector for bent or missing
pins.
3.
Ensure that none of the keys are
depressed.
4.
Replace keyboard.
201-Memory Error
213-Incompatible Memory Module in
Memory Socket(s) X, X, ...
301-Keyboard Error
RAM failure.
Keyboard failure.
294 Chapter 11 POST Error Messages
Table 11-1 Numeric Codes and Text Messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
303-Keyboard Controller Error
I/O board keyboard controller.
1.
Reconnect keyboard with computer
turned off.
2.
Replace the system board.
1.
Reconnect the keyboard with computer
turned off.
2.
Ensure that none of the keys are
depressed.
3.
Replace the keyboard.
4.
Replace the system board.
1.
Reseat the graphics card
(if applicable).
2.
Clear CMOS. (See Appendix B,
Password Security and Resetting
CMOS on page 305.)
3.
Verify monitor is attached and turned
on.
4.
Replace the graphics card (if possible).
304-Keyboard or System Unit Error
501-Display Adapter Failure
Keyboard failure.
Graphics display controller.
510-Flash Screen Image Corrupted
Flash Screen image has errors.
Reflash the system ROM with the latest
BIOS image.
511-CPU, CPUA, or CPUB Fan not
Detected
CPU fan is not connected or may have
malfunctioned.
1.
Reseat CPU fan.
2.
Reseat fan cable.
3.
Replace CPU fan.
1.
Reseat chassis, rear chassis, or front
chassis fan.
2.
Reseat fan cable.
3.
Replace chassis, rear chassis, or front
chassis fan.
1.
Reseat front chassis fan.
2.
Reseat fan cable.
3.
Replace front chassis fan.
1.
Reseat CPU or chassis fan.
2.
Reseat fan cable.
3.
Replace CPU or chassis fan.
1.
Reseat power supply fan.
2.
Reseat fan cable.
3.
Replace power supply fan.
512-Chassis, Rear Chassis, or Front
Chassis Fan not Detected
513-Front Chassis fan not detected
514-CPU or Chassis Fan not Detected
515-Power Supply fan not detected
Chassis, rear chassis, or front chassis fan is
not connected or may have malfunctioned.
Front chassis fan is not connected or may
have malfunctioned.
CPU or chassis fan is not connected or may
have malfunctioned.
Power supply fan is not connected or may
have malfunctioned.
POST Numeric Codes and Text Messages 295
Table 11-1 Numeric Codes and Text Messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
601-Diskette Controller Error
Diskette controller circuitry or floppy drive
circuitry incorrect.
1.
Check and/or replace cables.
2.
Clear CMOS. (See Appendix B,
Password Security and Resetting
CMOS on page 305.)
3.
Replace diskette drive.
4.
Replace the system board.
1.
Disconnect any other diskette
controller devices (tape drives).
2.
Clear CMOS. (See Appendix B,
Password Security and Resetting
CMOS on page 305.)
605-Diskette Drive Type Error
Mismatch in drive type.
660-Display cache is detected unreliable
Integrated graphics controller display cache
is not working properly and will be disabled.
Replace system board if minimal graphics
degrading is an issue.
912-Computer Cover Has Been Removed
Since Last System Startup
Computer cover was removed since last
system startup.
No action required.
917-Front Audio Not Connected
Front audio harness has been detached or
unseated from motherboard.
Reconnect or replace front audio harness.
918-Front USB Not Connected
Front USB harness has been detached or
unseated from motherboard.
Reconnect or replace front USB harness.
921-Device in PCI Express slot failed to
initialize
There is an incompatibility/problem with this
device and the system or PCI Express Link
could not be retrained to an x1.
Try rebooting the system. If the error
reoccurs, the device may not work with this
system
1151-Serial Port A Address Conflict
Detected
Both external and internal serial ports are
assigned to COM1.
1.
Remove any serial port expansion
cards.
2.
Clear CMOS. (See Appendix B,
Password Security and Resetting
CMOS on page 305.)
3.
Reconfigure card resources and/or run
Computer Setup or Windows utilities.
1.
Remove any serial port expansion
cards.
2.
Clear CMOS. (See Appendix B,
Password Security and Resetting
CMOS on page 305.)
3.
Reconfigure card resources and/or run
Computer Setup or Windows utilities.
1.
Remove any serial port expansion
cards.
2.
Clear CMOS. (See Appendix B,
Password Security and Resetting
CMOS on page 305.)
3.
Reconfigure card resources and/or run
Computer Setup or Windows utilities.
1152-Serial Port B Address Conflict
Detected
1155-Serial Port Address Conflict Detected
Both external and internal serial ports are
assigned to COM2.
Both external and internal serial ports are
assigned to same IRQ.
296 Chapter 11 POST Error Messages
Table 11-1 Numeric Codes and Text Messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
1720-SMART Hard Drive Detects Imminent
Failure
Hard drive is about to fail. (Some hard
drives have a hard drive firmware patch that
will fix an erroneous error message.)
1.
Determine if hard drive is giving correct
error message. Enter Computer Setup
and run the Drive Protection System
test under Storage > DPS Self-test.
2.
Apply hard drive firmware patch
if applicable. (Available at
http://www.hp.com/support.)
3.
Back up contents and replace hard
drive.
1796-SATA Cabling Error
One or more SATA devices are improperly
attached. For optimal performance, the
SATA 0 and SATA 1 connectors must be
used before SATA 2 and SATA 3.
Ensure SATA connectors are used in
ascending order. For one device, use SATA
0. For two devices, use SATA 0 and SATA
1. For three devices, use SATA 0, SATA 1,
and SATA 2.
1797-SATA Drivelock is not supported in
RAID mode.
Drivelock is enabled on one or more SATA
hard drives, and they cannot be accessed
while the system is configured for RAID
mode.
Either remove the Drivelocked SATA device
or disable the Drivelock feature. To disable
the Drivelock feature, enter Computer
Setup, change Storage > Storage
Options > SATA Emulation to IDE, and
select File > Save Changes and Exit.
Reenter Computer Setup and select
Security > Drivelock Security. For each
listed Drivelock-capable SATA device,
ensure Drivelock is Disabled. Lastly,
change Storage > Storage Options >
SATA Emulation back to RAID and select
File > Save Changes and Exit.
1801-Microcode Patch Error
Processor is not supported by ROM BIOS.
1.
Upgrade BIOS to proper version.
2.
Change the processor.
1.
Reboot the computer.
2.
Unplug the power cord, re-seat the
memory modules, and reboot the
computer.
3.
If the memory configuration was
recently changed, unplug the
computer, restore the original memory
configuration, and reboot the
computer.
4.
If the error persists, replace the system
board.
2200-PMM Allocation Error during MEBx
Download
Memory error during POST execution of the
Management Engine (ME) BIOS Extensions
option ROM.
POST Numeric Codes and Text Messages 297
Table 11-1 Numeric Codes and Text Messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
2201-MEBx Module did not checksum
correctly
Memory error during POST execution of the
Management Engine (ME) BIOS Extensions
option ROM.
1.
Reboot the computer.
2.
Unplug the power cord, re-seat the
memory modules, and reboot the
computer.
3.
If the memory configuration was
recently changed, unplug the power
cord, restore the original memory
configuration, and reboot the
computer.
4.
If the error persists, replace the system
board.
1.
Reboot the computer.
2.
Unplug the power cord, re-seat the
memory modules, and reboot the
computer.
3.
If the memory configuration was
recently changed, unplug the power
cord, restore the original memory
configuration, and reboot the
computer.
4.
If the error persists, replace the system
board.
1.
Reboot the computer.
2.
Unplug the power cord, re-seat the
memory modules, and reboot the
computer.
3.
If the memory configuration was
recently changed, unplug the power
cord, restore the original memory
configuration, and reboot the
computer.
4.
If the error persists, replace the system
board.
1.
Reboot the computer.
2.
If the error persists, update to the latest
BIOS version.
3.
If the error still persists, replace the
system board.
1.
Reboot the computer.
2.
If the error persists, update to the latest
BIOS version.
3.
If the error still persists, replace the
system board.
2202-PMM Deallocation Error during MEBx
cleanup
2203-Setup error during MEBx execution
2204-Inventory error during MEBx execution
2205-Interface error during MEBx execution
Memory error during POST execution of the
Management Engine (ME) BIOS Extensions
option ROM.
MEBx selection or exit resulted in a setup
failure.
BIOS information passed to the MEBx
resulted in a failure.
MEBx operation experienced a hardware
error during communication with ME.
298 Chapter 11 POST Error Messages
Table 11-1 Numeric Codes and Text Messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
2211-Memory not configured correctly for
proper MEBx execution.
DIMM1 or XMM1 is not installed.
Make sure there is a memory module in the
black DIMM1 socket and that it is properly
seated.
2212-USB Key Provisioning failure writing to
device
USB device used for USB key provisioning
will not allow BIOS to update provision file
properly.
1.
Try a different USB key device for
provisioning.
2.
If the error persists, update to the latest
BIOS version and ME firmware
version.
3.
If the error still persists, replace the
system board.
1.
Reboot the computer.
2.
If the error persists, update to the latest
BIOS version and ME firmware
version.
3.
If the error still persists, replace the
system board.
1.
Update to the latest ME firmware
version.
2.
If the error persists and system BIOS
has been recently updated, restore
previous system BIOS version.
3.
If the error still persists, replace the
system board.
1.
Recreate the provisioning file using
third party management console
software.
2.
If the error persists and system BIOS
has been recently updated, restore
previous system BIOS version.
Otherwise, update the ME firmware
version.
3.
If the error still persists, replace the
system board.
1.
Reboot the computer.
2.
If the error persists and system BIOS
has been recently updated, restore
previous system BIOS version.
Otherwise, update the ME firmware
version.
3.
If the error still persists, replace the
system board.
2217-ME Firmware Version request failure
2218-ME Firmware Version should be
updated
2219-USB Key Provisioning file has invalid
header identifier
2220-USB Key Provisioning file has
mismatch version
ME firmware is not properly responding to
BIOS query for version information.
ME firmware must be updated to match
current functionality contained in the system
BIOS.
Provisioning file contained on the USB key
has been corrupted or is not a valid version
for the current ME firmware.
Provisioning file contained on the USB key
is not a valid version for the current ME
firmware.
POST Numeric Codes and Text Messages 299
Table 11-1 Numeric Codes and Text Messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
2230-General error during MEBx execution
Error occurred during MEBx execution
which fails into the “General” grouping.
Status information displayed along with the
error provides further clarity into the failure.
MEBx handles transference of information
between the system BIOS and ME
firmware.
1.
Reboot the computer.
2.
If the error persists, update to the latest
BIOS version and ME firmware
version.
3.
If the error still persists, replace the
system board.
Error occurred during MEBx execution
which fails into “ME” grouping.
1.
Reboot the computer.
2.
If the error persists, update to the latest
BIOS version and ME firmware
version.
3.
If the error still persists, replace the
system board.
1.
Reboot the computer.
2.
If the error persists, update to the latest
BIOS version and ME firmware
version.
3.
If the error still persists, replace the
system board.
1.
Reboot the computer.
2.
If the error persists, update to the latest
BIOS version and ME firmware
version.
3.
If the error still persists, replace the
system board.
Special system configurations with reduced
ME firmware image require BIOS control of
ME firmware upgrading. A failure has
occurred after the ME firmware update
process in which the BIOS could not relock
the ME firmware region.
1.
Reboot the computer.
2.
If the error persists, update to the latest
BIOS version and ME firmware
version.
3.
If the error still persists, replace the
system board.
Special system configurations with reduced
ME firmware image require BIOS control of
ME firmware upgrading. A failure has
occurred prior to the ME firmware update
process in which the BIOS could not unlock
the ME firmware region.
1.
Reboot the computer.
2.
If the error persists, update to the latest
BIOS version and ME firmware
version.
3.
If the error still persists, replace the
system board.
Electronic serial number is missing.
Enter the correct serial number in Computer
Setup.
2231-ME error during MEBx execution
2232-AMT error during MEBx execution
2233-HECI error during MEBx execution
2239-ME image lock failure
2240-ME image unlock failure
Invalid Electronic Serial Number
Error occurred during MEBx execution
which fails into “AMT” grouping.
Error occurred during MEBx execution
which fails into “MEI or HECI” grouping.
300 Chapter 11 POST Error Messages
Table 11-1 Numeric Codes and Text Messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
Network Server Mode Active and No
Keyboard Attached
Keyboard failure while Network Server
Mode enabled.
1.
Reconnect keyboard with computer
turned off.
2.
Check connector for bent or missing
pins.
3.
Ensure that none of the keys are
depressed.
4.
Replace keyboard.
Parity Check 2
Parity RAM failure.
Run Computer Setup and Diagnostic
utilities.
Interpreting POST Diagnostic Front Panel LEDs and
Audible Codes
This section covers the front panel LED codes as well as the audible codes that may occur before or
during POST that do not necessarily have an error code or text message associated with them.
WARNING! When the computer is plugged into an AC power source, voltage is always applied to
the system board. To reduce the risk of personal injury from electrical shock and/or hot surfaces, be
sure to disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet and allow the internal system components to
cool before touching.
NOTE: If you see flashing LEDs on a PS/2 keyboard, look for flashing LEDs on the front panel of
the computer and refer to the following table to determine the front panel LED codes.
Recommended actions in the following table are listed in the order in which they should be
performed.
Not all diagnostic lights and audible codes are available on all models.
Table 11-2 Diagnostic Front Panel LEDs and Audible Codes
Activity
Beeps
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
Green Power LED On.
None
Computer on.
None
Green Power LED flashes
every two seconds.
None
Computer in Suspend to
RAM mode (some models
only) or normal Suspend
mode.
None required. Press any key or move the
mouse to wake the computer.
Interpreting POST Diagnostic Front Panel LEDs and Audible Codes 301
Table 11-2 Diagnostic Front Panel LEDs and Audible Codes (continued)
Activity
Beeps
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
Red Power LED flashes two
times, once every second,
followed by a two second
pause. Beeps stop after fifth
iteration but LEDs continue
until problem is solved.
2
Processor thermal
protection activated:
1.
Ensure that the computer air vents are not
blocked and the processor cooling fan is
running.
2.
Open hood, press power button, and see if
the processor fan spins. If the processor fan
is not spinning, make sure the fan's cable is
plugged onto the system board header.
3.
If fan is plugged in, but is not spinning, then
replace heat sink/fan assembly.
4.
Contact an authorized reseller or service
provider.
Processor not installed
(not an indicator of bad
processor).
1.
Check to see that the processor is present.
2.
Reseat the processor.
Power failure (power
supply is overloaded).
1.
Open the hood and ensure the 4 or 6-wire
power supply cable is seated into the
connector on the system board.
2.
Check if a device is causing the problem by
removing ALL attached devices (such as
hard, diskette, or optical drives, and
expansion cards). Power on the system. If
the system enters the POST, then power off
and replace one device at a time and
repeat this procedure until failure occurs.
Replace the device that is causing the
failure. Continue adding devices one at a
time to ensure all devices are functioning
properly.
3.
Replace the power supply.
4.
Replace the system board.
A fan may be blocked or
not turning.
OR
The heat sink/fan
assembly is not properly
attached to the processor.
Red Power LED flashes three
times, once every second,
followed by a two second
pause. Beeps stop after fifth
iteration but LEDs continue
until problem is solved.
3
Red Power LED flashes four
times, once every second,
followed by a two second
pause. Beeps stop after fifth
iteration but LEDs continue
until problem is solved.
4
OR
The incorrect external
power supply adapter is
being used on the USDT.
OR
The USDT power supply adapter must be at
135W and use the Smart ID technology before
the system will power up. Replace the power
supply adapter with the HP-supplied USDT
power supply adapter.
302 Chapter 11 POST Error Messages
Table 11-2 Diagnostic Front Panel LEDs and Audible Codes (continued)
Activity
Beeps
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
Red Power LED flashes five
times, once every second,
followed by a two second
pause. Beeps stop after fifth
iteration but LEDs continue
until problem is solved.
5
Pre-video memory error.
CAUTION: To avoid damage to the DIMMs or
the system board, you must unplug the computer
power cord before attempting to reseat, install, or
remove a DIMM module.
Red Power LED flashes six
times, once every second,
followed by a two second
pause. Beeps stop after fifth
iteration but LEDs continue
until problem is solved.
6
Pre-video graphics error.
1.
Reseat DIMMs.
2.
Replace DIMMs one at a time to isolate the
faulty module.
3.
Replace third-party memory with HP
memory.
4.
Replace the system board.
For systems with a graphics card:
1.
Reseat the graphics card.
2.
Replace the graphics card.
3.
Replace the system board.
For systems with integrated graphics, replace
the system board.
Red Power LED flashes
seven times, once every
second, followed by a two
second pause. Beeps stop
after fifth iteration but LEDs
continue until problem is
solved.
7
System board failure
(ROM detected failure
prior to video).
Replace the system board.
Red Power LED flashes eight
times, once every second,
followed by a two second
pause. Beeps stop after fifth
iteration but LEDs continue
until problem is solved.
8
Invalid ROM based on
bad checksum.
1.
Reflash the system ROM with the latest
BIOS image. See the “Boot Block
Emergency Recovery Mode” section of the
Desktop Management Guide for more
information.
2.
Replace the system board.
1.
Check that the voltage selector, located on
the rear of the power supply (some
models), is set to the appropriate voltage.
Proper voltage setting depends on your
region.
2.
Unplug the AC power cord from the
computer, wait 30 seconds, then plug the
power cord back in to the computer.
3.
Replace the system board.
4.
Replace the processor.
Red Power LED flashes nine
times, once every second,
followed by a two second
pause. Beeps stop after fifth
iteration but LEDs continue
until problem is solved.
9
System powers on but is
unable to boot.
Interpreting POST Diagnostic Front Panel LEDs and Audible Codes 303
Table 11-2 Diagnostic Front Panel LEDs and Audible Codes (continued)
Activity
Beeps
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
Red Power LED flashes ten
times, once every second,
followed by a two second
pause. Beeps stop after fifth
iteration but LEDs continue
until problem is solved.
10
Bad option card.
1.
Check each option card by removing the
card (one at a time if multiple cards), then
power on the system to see if fault goes
away.
2.
Once a bad card is identified, remove and
replace the bad option card.
3.
Replace the system board.
1.
Install a TXT capable processor.
2.
Disable TXT in the Computer Setup (F10)
utility.
3.
Reinstall the original processor.
Red Power LED flashes
eleven times, once every
second, followed by a two
second pause. Beeps stop
after fifth iteration but LEDs
continue until problem is
solved.
11
System does not power on
and LEDs are not flashing.
None
The current processor
does not support a
feature previously
enabled on this system.
System unable to power
on.
Press and hold the power button for less than 4
seconds. If the hard drive LED turns green, the
power button is working correctly. Try the
following:
1.
Check that the voltage selector (some
models), located on the rear of the power
supply, is set to the appropriate voltage.
Proper voltage setting depends on your
region.
2.
Replace the system board.
OR
Press and hold the power button for less than 4
seconds. If the hard drive LED does not turn on
green then:
304 Chapter 11 POST Error Messages
1.
Check that the unit is plugged into a
working AC outlet.
2.
Open hood and check that the power button
harness is properly connected to the
system board.
3.
Check that both power supply cables are
properly connected to the system board.
4.
Check to see if the 5V_aux light on the
system board is turned on. If it is turned on,
then replace the power button harness. If
the problem persists, replace the system
board.
5.
If the 5V_aux light on the system board is
not turned on, remove the expansion cards
one at a time until the 5V_aux light on the
system board turns on. It the problem
persists, replace the power supply.
12 Password Security and Resetting
CMOS
This computer supports security password features, which can be established through the Computer
Setup Utilities menu.
This computer supports two security password features that are established through the Computer
Setup Utilities menu: setup password and power-on password. When you establish only a setup
password, any user can access all the information on the computer except Computer Setup. When
you establish only a power-on password, the power-on password is required to access Computer
Setup and any other information on the computer. When you establish both passwords, only the
setup password will give you access to Computer Setup.
When both passwords are set, the setup password can also be used in place of the power-on
password as an override to log in to the computer. This is a useful feature for a network administrator.
If you forget the password for the computer, you can clear that password so you can gain access to
the information on the computer by resetting the password jumper.
CAUTION: Pushing the CMOS button will reset CMOS values to factory defaults. It is important to
back up the computer CMOS settings before resetting them in case they are needed later. Back up is
easily done through Computer Setup. See Computer Setup (F10) Utility on page 16 for information on
backing up the CMOS settings.
305
Resetting the Password Jumper
CAUTION: If you enable the stringent security feature in Computer Setup and you forget the setup
password or the power-on password, the computer is inaccessible and can no longer be used.
Enabling the stringent password disables the ability to reset the password by moving the jumper on
the system board.
If you lose or forget the password, the system board must be replaced. This scenario is not covered
under warranty.
To prevent the computer from becoming permanently unusable, record your configured setup
password or power-on password in a safe place away from your computer. Without these passwords,
the computer cannot be unlocked.
To disable the power-on or setup password features, or to clear the power-on or setup passwords,
complete the following steps:
1.
Shut down the operating system properly, then turn off the computer and any external devices,
and disconnect the power cord from the power outlet.
2.
With the power cord disconnected, press the power button again to drain the system of any
residual power.
WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury from electrical shock and/or hot surfaces, be
sure to disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet, and allow the internal system
components to cool before touching.
CAUTION: When the computer is plugged in, the power supply always has voltage applied to
the system board even when the unit is turned off. Failure to disconnect the power cord can
result in damage to the system.
Static electricity can damage the electronic components of the computer or optional equipment.
Before beginning these procedures, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by briefly
touching a grounded metal object. See the Safety & Regulatory Information guide for more
information.
3.
Remove the computer cover or access panel.
4.
Locate the header and jumper.
NOTE: The password jumper is green so that it can be easily identified. For assistance
locating the password jumper and other system board components, see the Illustrated Parts &
Service Map (IPSM). The IPSM can be downloaded from http://www.hp.com/support.
5.
Remove the jumper from pins 1 and 2. Place the jumper on either pin 1 or 2, but not both, so
that it does not get lost.
6.
Replace the computer cover or access panel.
7.
Reconnect the external equipment.
8.
Plug in the computer and turn on power. Allow the operating system to start. This clears the
current passwords and disables the password features.
9.
To establish new passwords, repeat steps 1 through 4, replace the password jumper on pins 1
and 2, then repeat steps 6 through 8. Establish the new passwords in Computer Setup.
306 Chapter 12 Password Security and Resetting CMOS
Clearing and Resetting the CMOS
The computer’s configuration memory (CMOS) stores information about the computer’s configuration.
The CMOS button resets CMOS but does not clear the power-on and setup passwords.
Clearing CMOS will clear the Active Management Technology (AMT) settings in the Management
Engine BIOS Extension (MEBx), including the password. The password will default to “admin” and will
need to be reset. The AMT settings will also need to be reset. To access the MEBx, press Ctrl+P
during POST.
1.
Turn off the computer and any external devices, and disconnect the power cord from the power
outlet.
2.
Disconnect the keyboard, monitor, and any other external equipment connected to the computer.
WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury from electrical shock and/or hot surfaces, be
sure to disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet, and allow the internal system
components to cool before touching.
CAUTION: When the computer is plugged in, the power supply always has voltage applied to
the system board even when the unit is turned off. Failure to disconnect the power cord can
result in damage to the system.
Static electricity can damage the electronic components of the computer or optional equipment.
Before beginning these procedures, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by briefly
touching a grounded metal object. See the Safety & Regulatory Information guide for more
information.
3.
Remove the computer cover or access panel.
CAUTION: Pushing the CMOS button will reset CMOS values to factory defaults. It is
important to back up the computer CMOS settings before resetting them in case they are
needed later. Back up is easily done through Computer Setup. See Computer Setup (F10) Utility
on page 16 for information on backing up the CMOS settings.
Clearing and Resetting the CMOS 307
4.
Locate, press, and hold the CMOS button in for five seconds.
NOTE: Make sure you have disconnected the AC power cord from the wall outlet. The CMOS
button will not clear CMOS if the power cord is connected.
Figure 12-1 CMOS button
NOTE: For assistance locating the CMOS button and other system board components, see the
Illustrated Parts & Service Map (IPSM).
5.
Replace the computer cover or access panel.
6.
Reconnect the external devices.
7.
Plug in the computer and turn on power.
NOTE: You will receive POST error messages after clearing CMOS and rebooting advising
you that configuration changes have occurred. Use Computer Setup to reset any special system
setups along with the date and time.
For instructions on Computer Setup, see Computer Setup (F10) Utility on page 16.
308 Chapter 12 Password Security and Resetting CMOS
13 HP PC Hardware Diagnostics
To help troubleshoot and diagnose failures, use the UEFI-based hardware diagnostic solution that HP
includes on all products. This tool can even be used if the computer will not boot to the operating
system.
Why run HP PC Hardware Diagnostics – UEFI
The HP PC Hardware Diagnostic tools simplify the process of diagnosing hardware issues and
expedite the support process when issues are found. The tools save time by pinpointing the
component that needs to be replaced.
●
Isolate true hardware failures: The diagnostics run outside of the operating system so they
effectively isolate hardware failures from issues that may be caused by the operating system or
other software components.
●
Failure ID: When a failure is detected that requires hardware replacement, a 24-digit Failure ID
is generated. This ID can then be provided to the call agent, who will either schedule support or
provide replacement parts.
How to access and run HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI
To access the UEFI diagnostics:
1.
Restart or turn on the computer and press Esc repeatedly until the BIOS boot menu appears.
2.
Press F2 or select Diagnostics (F2).
Why run HP PC Hardware Diagnostics – UEFI 309
After pressing F2, the BIOS sequentially searches three places for the system diagnostics:
a.
First – a connected USB drive (to download the diagnostics tools to a USB drive, see the
instructions in Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics to a USB device on page 310).
b.
Second – the hard disk drive.
c.
Third – in the BIOS, a core set of diagnostics (for memory and hard disk drive) that are
accessible only if the USB or hard disk drive versions are not detected.
Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics to a USB
device
1.
Go to http://www.hp.com.
2.
Click the Support & Drivers link.
3.
Select the Drivers & Software tab.
4.
Enter the product name in the text box and click Search.
5.
Select your specific computer model.
6.
Select your operating system.
7.
In the Diagnostic section, click the HP UEFI Support Environment link. This link provides
additional information.
- or Click the Download button and select Run. The download includes instructions (in English) on
how to install the tools on the USB device.
NOTE: HP diagnostic solutions are developed to test components typically included on HP
products. They may not diagnose all third-party accessories that can be added to the system.
310 Chapter 13 HP PC Hardware Diagnostics
14 Backup and Recovery
Restoring and recovering in Windows 7
To protect from loss or damage, back up your personal data files. Refer to the operating system or
backup utility documentation for instructions on making backup copies of your data files.
To protect the software from loss or damage, keep a backup copy of all system software,
applications, and related files stored on the hard drive.
If you cannot create system recovery CDs or DVDs, you can order a recovery disk set from support.
To obtain the support telephone number for your region, see http://www.hp.com/support/contactHP.
System Restore
If you have a problem that might be due to software that you installed on your computer, use System
Restore to return the computer to a previous restore point. You can also set restore points manually.
NOTE:
Always use this System Restore procedure before you use the System Recovery feature.
NOTE: Some features might not be available on systems that are shipped without a Windows
operating system.
To start System Restore:
1.
Close all open programs.
2.
Click the Start button, right-click Computer, and then click Properties.
3.
Click System protection, System Restore, click Next, and then follow the on-screen
instructions.
To add restore points manually:
1.
Close all open programs.
2.
Click the Start button, right-click Computer, click Properties, and then click System
protection.
3.
Under Protection Settings, select the disk for which you want to create a restore point.
4.
Click Create, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
System Recovery
WARNING! This procedure will delete all user information. To prevent loss of information, be sure
to back up all user information so you can restore it after recovery.
Restoring and recovering in Windows 7 311
System Recovery completely erases and reformats the hard disk drive, deleting all data files that you
have created, and then reinstalls the operating system, programs, and drivers. However, you must
reinstall any software that was not installed on the computer at the factory. This includes software that
came on media included in the computer accessory box, and any software programs you installed
after purchase.
NOTE: Always use the System Restore procedure before you use the System Recovery program.
See System Restore on page 311.
NOTE: Some features might not be available on systems that are shipped without a Windows
operating system.
You must choose one of the following methods to perform a System Recovery:
●
Recovery image — Run System Recovery from a recovery image stored on your hard disk drive.
The recovery image is a file that contains a copy of the original factory-shipped software. To
perform a System Recovery from a recovery image, see System Recovery when Windows is
responding on page 312 or System Recovery when Windows is not responding on page 313.
●
Recovery media — Run System Recovery from recovery media that you have created from files
stored on your hard disk drive or purchased separately. To create recovery media, see System
recovery using recovery media on page 313.
System Recovery when Windows is responding
CAUTION: System Recovery deletes all data and programs you created or installed. Before you
begin, back up any important data to a CD or DVD or to a USB flash drive.
NOTE: In some cases, you must use recovery media for this procedure. To create this media, follow
the instructions in Creating recovery media on page 314.
If the computer is working and Windows 7 is responding, use these steps to perform a System
Recovery.
1.
Turn off the computer.
2.
Disconnect all peripheral devices from the computer except the monitor, keyboard, and mouse.
3.
Turn on the computer.
4.
When Windows has loaded, click the Start button, click All Programs, click Security and
Protection, click Recovery Manager, and then click Recovery Manager. If prompted, click Yes
to allow the program to continue.
5.
Under I need help immediately, click System Recovery.
6.
Select Yes, and then click Next. Your computer restarts.
NOTE: If your system does not detect a recovery partition, it prompts you to insert recovery
media that you have created. Insert the first disc or the USB flash drive, select Yes, and then
click Next to restart the computer. If you are using discs, insert the next disc when prompted.
7.
When the computer restarts, you will see the Recovery Manager welcome screen again. Under I
need help immediately, click System Recovery. If you are prompted to back up your files, and
you have not done so, select Back up your files first (recommended), and then click Next.
Otherwise, select Recover without backing up your files, and then click Next.
312 Chapter 14 Backup and Recovery
8.
System Recovery begins. After System Recovery is complete, click Finish to restart the
computer.
9.
When Windows has loaded, shut down the computer, reconnect all peripheral devices, and then
turn the computer back on.
System Recovery when Windows is not responding
CAUTION: System Recovery deletes all data and programs you created or installed.
If Windows is not responding, but the computer is working, follow these steps to perform a System
Recovery.
1.
Turn off the computer. If necessary, press and hold the power button until the computer turns off.
2.
Disconnect all peripheral devices from the computer, except the monitor, keyboard, and mouse.
3.
Press the power button to turn on the computer.
4.
As soon as you see the HP logo screen, repeatedly press the F11 key on your keyboard until the
Windows is Loading Files… message appears on the screen.
5.
Under I need help immediately, click System Recovery.
6.
If you are prompted to back up your files, and you have not done so, select Back up your files
first (recommended), and then click Next. Otherwise, select Recover without backing up
your files, and then click Next.
7.
System Recovery begins. After System Recovery is complete, click Finish to restart the
computer.
8.
When Windows has loaded, shut down the computer, reconnect all peripheral devices, and then
turn the computer back on.
System recovery using recovery media
You should create a set of recovery media, either a set of DVDs or a USB flash drive, from the
recovery image stored on your hard disk drive. This image contains the operating system and
software program files that were originally installed on your computer at the factory. You can create
only one set of recovery media for your computer, and the media can be used only with this
computer. Store the recovery media in a safe place.
NOTE: Some features might not be available on systems that are shipped without a Windows
operating system.
●
To create recovery discs, your computer must have a DVD writer, and you must use only highquality blank DVD+R or DVD-R discs.
NOTE: You cannot use DVD+RW, DVD-RW, DVD+RW DL, DVD-RW DL, DVD+R DL, or DVDR DL discs to create recovery discs.
●
You have the option of creating a recovery USB flash drive instead, using a high-quality USB
drive.
Restoring and recovering in Windows 7 313
●
If you are creating recovery discs, be sure to use high-quality discs. It is normal for the system to
reject defective discs. You will be prompted to insert a new blank disc to try again.
●
The number of discs in the recovery-disc set depends on your computer model (typically 3 to 6
DVDs). The Recovery Media Creation program tells you the specific number of blank discs
needed to make the set. If you are using a USB flash drive, the program will tell you the size of
the drive required to store all the data (minimum of 8 GB).
NOTE: The process of creating recovery media is lengthy. You can quit the process at any
time. The next time you initiate the process, it resumes where it left off.
Creating recovery media
To create recovery discs:
1.
Close all open programs.
2.
Click the Start button, click All Programs, click Security and Protection, and then click HP
Recovery Media Creation. If prompted, click Yes to allow the program to continue.
3.
Click Create recovery media using blank DVD(s), and then click Next.
4.
Follow the on-screen instructions. Label each disc as you make it (for example, Recovery 1,
Recovery 2), and then store the discs in a secure place.
To create a recovery USB flash drive:
NOTE:
You must use a flash drive with a capacity of at least 8 GB.
1.
Close all open programs.
2.
Insert the USB flash drive into a USB port on the computer.
3.
Click the Start button, click All Programs, click Security and Protection, and then click
Recovery Media Creation.
4.
Click Create recovery media with a USB flash drive, and then click Next.
5.
Select the USB flash drive from the list of media. The program will let you know how much
storage is required to create the recovery drive. If the USB flash drive does not have enough
storage capacity, it will appear grayed out, and you must replace it with a larger USB flash drive.
Click Next.
NOTE: Recovery Media Creation formats the flash drive, deleting any files on it.
6.
Follow the on-screen instructions. When the process is complete, label the USB flash drive and
store it in a secure place.
NOTE: Do not use media cards for creating recovery media. The system may not be able to boot up
from a media card and you may not be able to run system recovery.
314 Chapter 14 Backup and Recovery
Using recovery media
CAUTION: System Recovery deletes all data and programs you have created or installed. Back up
any important data to a CD or DVD or to a USB flash drive.
To create recovery media, see System recovery using recovery media on page 313.
To perform a System Recovery using recovery media:
1.
If using a set of DVDs, insert the first recovery disc into the DVD drive tray, and close the tray. If
you are using a recovery USB flash drive, insert it into a USB port.
2.
If the computer is not responding, press and hold the power button for approximately 5 seconds
or until the computer turns off.
or
Click the Start button, and then click Shut Down.
3.
Disconnect all peripheral devices from the computer except the monitor, keyboard, and mouse.
4.
Press the power button to turn on the computer.
5.
Press Esc as the computer is powering on to see the startup menu. Use the arrow keys to select
the boot menu and press Enter. Use the arrow keys to select the location where the recovery
media is inserted (USB or DVD). Press Enter to boot from that device.
6.
If Recovery Manager asks if you want to run System Recovery from Media or Hard Drive, select
Media. On the Welcome screen, under I need help immediately, click Factory Reset.
7.
If you are prompted to back up your files, and you have not done so, select Back up your files
first (recommended), and then click Next. Otherwise, select Recover without backing up
your files, and then click Next.
8.
If you are prompted to insert the next recovery disc, do so.
9.
When Recovery Manager is finished, remove the recovery disc or the recovery USB flash drive
from the system.
10. Click Finish to restart the computer.
Restoring and recovering in Windows 7 315
Backup and recovery in Windows 8
To protect your information, use Windows Backup and Restore to back up individual files and folders,
back up your entire hard drive, create system repair media, or create system restore points. In case
of system failure, you can use the backup files to restore the contents of your computer.
From the Start screen, type restore, click Settings, and then select from the list of displayed
options.
NOTE: For detailed instructions on various backup and restore options, perform a search for these
topics in Help and Support. From the Start screen, type h, and then select Help and Support.
In case of system instability, HP recommends that you print the recovery procedures and save them
for later use.
NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your
computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing
software, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Help and Support for more
information. From the Start screen, type h, and then select Help and Support.
Backing up your information
Recovery after a system failure is as good as your most recent backup. You should create system
repair media and your initial backup immediately after initial system setup. As you add new software
and data files, you should continue to back up your system on a regular basis to maintain a
reasonably current backup. The system repair media is used to start up (boot) the computer and
repair the operating system in case of system instability or failure. Your initial and subsequent
backups allow you to restore your data and settings if a failure occurs.
Type backup on the Start screen, click Settings, and then select Save backup copies of your files
with File History.
You can back up your information to an optional external hard drive, or a network drive.
Note the following when backing up:
●
Store personal files in the Documents library, and back it up regularly.
●
Back up templates that are stored in their associated programs.
●
Save customized settings that appear in a window, toolbar, or menu bar by taking a screen shot
of your settings. The screen shot can be a time-saver if you have to reset your preferences.
To create a backup using Backup and Restore:
NOTE:
Be sure that the computer is connected to AC power before you start the backup process.
NOTE: The backup process may take over an hour, depending on file size and the speed of the
computer.
1.
From the Start screen, type backup, click Settings, and then select from the list of displayed
options.
2.
Follow the on-screen instructions to set up your backup, create a system image, or create
system repair media.
316 Chapter 14 Backup and Recovery
Performing a system recovery
In case of system failure or instability, the computer provides the following tools to recover your files:
●
Windows recovery tools: You can use Windows Backup and Restore to recover information you
have previously backed up. You can also use Windows Automatic Repair to fix problems that
might prevent Windows from starting correctly.
●
f11 recovery tools: You can use the f11 recovery tools to recover your original hard drive image.
The image includes the Windows operating system and software programs installed at the
factory.
NOTE: If you are unable to boot (start up) your computer and you cannot use the system repair
media you previously created, you must purchase Windows 8 operating system media to reboot the
computer and repair the operating system. For additional information, see Using Windows 8 operating
system media (purchased separately) on page 318.
Using the Windows recovery tools
To recover information you previously backed up:
▲
From the Start screen, type h, and then select Help and Support.
To recover your information using Automatic Repair, follow these steps:
CAUTION: Some Automatic Repair options will completely erase and reformat the hard drive. For
additional information go to Help and Support. From the Start screen, type h, and then select Help
and Support.
1.
If possible, back up all personal files.
2.
If possible, check for the presence of the HP Recovery partition and the Windows partition:
From the Start screen, type e, and then click Windows Explorer.
– or –
From the Start screen, type c, and then select Computer.
NOTE: If the Windows partition and the HP Recovery partition are not listed, you must recover
your operating system and programs using the Windows 8 operating system media and the
Driver Recovery media (both purchased separately). For additional information, see Using
Windows 8 operating system media (purchased separately) on page 318.
3.
If the Windows partition and the HP Recovery partition are listed, restart the computer after
Windows has loaded, and then press and hold Shift while clicking Restart.
NOTE: If the computer fails to boot to Windows after several attempts, the system will boot to
the Windows Recovery Environment by default.
4.
Select Troubleshoot, select Advanced Options, and then select Automatic Repair.
5.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
NOTE: For additional information on recovering information using the Windows tools, perform a
search for these topics in Help and Support. From the Start screen, type h, and then select Help and
Support.
Backup and recovery in Windows 8 317
Using f11 recovery tools
CAUTION: Using f11 completely erases hard drive contents and reformats the hard drive. All files
that you have created and any software that you have installed on the computer are permanently
removed. The f11 recovery tool reinstalls the operating system and HP programs and drivers that
were installed at the factory. Software not installed at the factory must be reinstalled.
To recover the original hard drive image using f11:
1.
If possible, back up all personal files.
2.
If possible, check for the presence of the HP Recovery partition: From the Start screen, type C,
and then select Computer.
NOTE: If the HP Recovery partition is not listed, you must recover your operating system and
programs using the Windows 8 operating system media, and the Driver Recovery media (both
purchased separately). For additional information, see Using Windows 8 operating system
media (purchased separately) on page 318.
3.
If the HP Recovery partition is listed, restart the computer, and then press esc while the
company logo is displayed. The computer Startup Menu displays.
4.
Press f11 to select the System Recovery option.
5.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Using Windows 8 operating system media (purchased separately)
To order Windows 8 operating system media, go to http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or
region, and follow the on-screen instructions. You can also order the media by calling support.
CAUTION: Using Windows 8 operating system media completely erases hard drive contents and
reformats the hard drive. All files that you have created and any software that you have installed on
the computer are permanently removed. When reformatting is complete, the recovery process helps
you restore the operating system, as well as drivers, software, and utilities.
To initiate recovery using Windows 8 operating system media:
NOTE:
This process takes several minutes.
1.
If possible, back up all personal files.
2.
Restart the computer, and then follow the instructions provided with the Windows 8 operating
system media to install the operating system.
3.
When prompted, press any keyboard key.
4.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
After the repair is completed:
1.
Remove the Windows 8 operating system media, and then insert the Driver Recovery media.
2.
Install the Hardware Enabling Drivers first, and then install Recommended Applications.
318 Chapter 14 Backup and Recovery
A
Battery Replacement
The battery that comes with the computer provides power to the real-time clock. When replacing the
battery, use a battery equivalent to the battery originally installed in the computer. The computer
comes with a 3-volt lithium coin cell battery.
WARNING! The computer contains an internal lithium manganese dioxide battery. There is a risk of
fire and burns if the battery is not handled properly. To reduce the risk of personal injury:
Do not attempt to recharge the battery.
Do not expose to temperatures higher than 60°C (140ºF).
Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, or dispose of in fire or water.
Replace the battery only with the HP spare designated for this product.
CAUTION: Before replacing the battery, it is important to back up the computer CMOS settings.
When the battery is removed or replaced, the CMOS settings will be cleared.
Static electricity can damage the electronic components of the computer or optional equipment.
Before beginning these procedures, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by briefly
touching a grounded metal object.
NOTE: The lifetime of the lithium battery can be extended by plugging the computer into a live AC
wall socket. The lithium battery is only used when the computer is NOT connected to AC power.
HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and
rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, go to http://www.hp.com/
recycle.
1.
Remove/disengage any security devices that prohibit opening the computer.
2.
Remove all removable media, such as compact discs or USB flash drives, from the computer.
3.
Turn off the computer properly through the operating system, then turn off any external devices.
4.
Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet and disconnect any external devices.
CAUTION: Regardless of the power-on state, voltage is always present on the system board
as long as the system is plugged into an active AC outlet. You must disconnect the power cord
to avoid damage to the internal components of the computer.
5.
Remove the computer access panel.
6.
Locate the battery and battery holder on the system board.
NOTE: On some computer models, it may be necessary to remove an internal component to
gain access to the battery.
319
7.
Depending on the type of battery holder on the system board, complete the following instructions
to replace the battery.
Type 1
a.
Lift the battery out of its holder.
Figure A-1 Removing a Coin Cell Battery (Type 1)
b.
Slide the replacement battery into position, positive side up. The battery holder
automatically secures the battery in the proper position.
Type 2
a.
To release the battery from its holder, squeeze the metal clamp that extends above one
edge of the battery. When the battery pops up, lift it out (1).
b.
To insert the new battery, slide one edge of the replacement battery under the holder’s lip
with the positive side up. Push the other edge down until the clamp snaps over the other
edge of the battery (2).
Figure A-2 Removing and Replacing a Coin Cell Battery (Type 2)
Type 3
a.
Pull back on the clip (1) that is holding the battery in place, and remove the battery (2).
320 Appendix A Battery Replacement
b.
Insert the new battery and position the clip back into place.
Figure A-3 Removing a Coin Cell Battery (Type 3)
NOTE: After the battery has been replaced, use the following steps to complete this procedure.
8.
Replace the computer access panel.
9.
Plug in the computer and turn on power to the computer.
10. Reset the date and time, your passwords, and any special system setups using Computer
Setup.
11. Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the computer access panel was removed.
321
B
Removing and Replacing a Removable
3.5-inch SATA Hard Drive
Some models are equipped with a Removable SATA Hard Drive Enclosure in the 5.25-inch internal
drive bay. The hard drive is housed in a carrier that can be quickly and easily removed from the drive
bay. To remove and replace a drive in the carrier:
NOTE: Before you remove the old hard drive, be sure to back up the data from the old hard drive so
that you can transfer the data to the new hard drive.
1.
Unlock the hard drive carrier with the key provided and slide the carrier out of the enclosure.
2.
Remove the screw from the rear of the carrier (1) and slide the top cover off the carrier (2).
Figure B-1 Removing the Carrier Cover
322 Appendix B Removing and Replacing a Removable 3.5-inch SATA Hard Drive
3.
Remove the adhesive strip that secures the thermal sensor to the top of the hard drive (1) and
move the thermal sensor away from the carrier (2).
Figure B-2 Removing the Thermal Sensor
4.
Remove the four screws from the bottom of the hard drive carrier.
Figure B-3 Removing the Security Screws
323
5.
Slide the hard drive back to disconnect it from the carrier then lift it up and out of the carrier.
Figure B-4 Removing the Hard Drive
6.
Place the new hard drive in the carrier then slide the hard drive back so that it seats in the SATA
connector on the carrier's circuit board. Be sure the connector on the hard drive is pressed all
the way into the connector on the carrier's circuit board.
Figure B-5 Replacing the Hard Drive
324 Appendix B Removing and Replacing a Removable 3.5-inch SATA Hard Drive
7.
Replace the four screws in the bottom of the carrier to hold the drive securely in place.
Figure B-6 Replacing the Security Screws
8.
Place the thermal sensor on top of the hard drive in a position that does not cover the label (1)
and attach the thermal sensor to the top of the hard drive with the adhesive strip (2).
Figure B-7 Replacing the Thermal Sensor
325
9.
Slide the cover on the carrier (1) and replace the screw on the rear of the carrier to secure the
cover in place (2).
Figure B-8 Replacing the Carrier Cover
10. Slide the hard drive carrier into the enclosure on the computer and lock it with the key provided.
NOTE: The carrier must be locked for power to be supplied to the hard drive.
326 Appendix B Removing and Replacing a Removable 3.5-inch SATA Hard Drive
C
Unlocking the Smart Cover Lock
NOTE:
The Smart Cover Lock is an optional feature included on some models only.
The Smart Cover Lock is a software-controllable cover lock, controlled by the setup password. This
lock prevents unauthorized access to the internal components. The computer ships with the
Smart Cover Lock in the unlocked position. For more information about locking the Smart Cover Lock,
refer to the Desktop Management Guide.
Smart Cover FailSafe Key
If you enable the Smart Cover Lock and cannot enter your password to disable the lock, you will need
a Smart Cover FailSafe Key to open the computer cover. You will need the key to access the internal
computer components in any of the following circumstances:
●
Power outage
●
Startup failure
●
PC component (for example, processor or power supply) failure
●
Forgotten password
NOTE: The Smart Cover FailSafe Key is a specialized tool available from HP. Be prepared; order
this key before you need it.
To obtain a FailSafe Key:
●
Contact an authorized HP reseller or service provider. Order PN 166527-001 for the wrenchstyle key or PN 166527-002 for the screwdriver bit key.
●
Refer to the HP Web site (http://www.hp.com) for ordering information.
●
Call the appropriate number listed in the warranty or in the Support Telephone Numbers guide.
Smart Cover FailSafe Key 327
Using the Smart Cover FailSafe Key to Remove the Smart
Cover Lock
To open the access panel with the Smart Cover Lock engaged:
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly.
2.
Use the Smart Cover FailSafe Key to remove the two tamper-proof screws that secure the Smart
Cover Lock to the chassis.
Figure C-1 Removing the Smart Cover Lock Screws from the Convertible Minitower
Figure C-2 Removing the Smart Cover Lock Screws from the Microtower
328 Appendix C Unlocking the Smart Cover Lock
Figure C-3 Removing the Smart Cover Lock Screws from the Small Form Factor
You can now remove the access panel.
To reattach the Smart Cover Lock, secure the lock in place with the tamper-proof screws.
Using the Smart Cover FailSafe Key to Remove the Smart Cover Lock 329
D
Power Cord Set Requirements
The power supplies on some computers have external power switches. The voltage select switch
feature on the computer permits it to operate from any line voltage between 100-120 or 220-240 volts
AC. Power supplies on those computers that do not have external power switches are equipped with
internal switches that sense the incoming voltage and automatically switch to the proper voltage.
The power cord set received with the computer meets the requirements for use in the country where
you purchased the equipment.
Power cord sets for use in other countries must meet the requirements of the country where you use
the computer.
General Requirements
The requirements listed below are applicable to all countries:
1.
The power cord must be approved by an acceptable accredited agency responsible for
evaluation in the country where the power cord set will be installed.
2.
The power cord set must have a minimum current capacity of 10A (7A Japan only) and a
nominal voltage rating of 125 or 250 volts AC, as required by each country’s power system.
3.
The diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm2 or 18AWG, and the length of the cord
must be between 1.8 m (6 feet) and 3.6 m (12 feet).
The power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed
upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point
where the cord exits from the product.
WARNING! Do not operate this product with a damaged power cord set. If the power cord set is
damaged in any manner, replace it immediately.
Japanese Power Cord Requirements
For use in Japan, use only the power cord received with this product.
CAUTION: Do not use the power cord received with this product on any other products.
330 Appendix D Power Cord Set Requirements
Country-Specific Requirements
Additional requirements specific to a country are shown in parentheses and explained below.
Country
Accrediting Agency
Country
Accrediting Agency
Australia (1)
EANSW
Italy (1)
IMQ
Austria (1)
OVE
Japan (3)
METI
Belgium (1)
CEBC
Norway (1)
NEMKO
Canada (2)
CSA
Sweden (1)
SEMKO
Denmark (1)
DEMKO
Switzerland (1)
SEV
Finland (1)
SETI
United Kingdom (1)
BSI
France (1)
UTE
United States (2)
UL
Germany (1)
VDE
1.
The flexible cord must be Type HO5VV-F, 3-conductor, 0.75mm2 conductor size. Power cord set fittings (appliance
coupler and wall plug) must bear the certification mark of the agency responsible for evaluation in the country where it
will be used.
2.
The flexible cord must be Type SVT or equivalent, No. 18 AWG, 3-conductor. The wall plug must be a two-pole
grounding type with a NEMA 5-15P (15A, 125V) or NEMA 6-15P (15A, 250V) configuration.
3.
Appliance coupler, flexible cord, and wall plug must bear a “T” mark and registration number in accordance with the
Japanese Dentori Law. Flexible cord must be Type VCT or VCTF, 3-conductor, 0.75 mm2 conductor size. Wall plug
must be a two-pole grounding type with a Japanese Industrial Standard C8303 (7A, 125V) configuration.
Country-Specific Requirements 331
E
Specifications
CMT Specifications
Table E-1 Specifications
Chassis
Height
17.6 in
44.8 cm
Width
7.0 in
17.8 cm
Depth
18.0 in
44.5 cm
Approximate Weight
24.5 lb
11.2 kg
Weight Supported (maximum distributed load in desktop
position)
77 lb
35 kg
Operating
50° to 95°F
10° to 35°C
Nonoperating
-22° to 140°F
-30° to 60°C
Temperature Range
NOTE: Operating temperature is derated 1.0° C per 300 m (1000 ft) to 3000 m (10,000 ft) above sea level; no
direct sustained sunlight. Maximum rate of change is 10° C/Hr. The upper limit may be limited by the type and
number of options installed.
Relative Humidity (noncondensing)
Operating
10-90%
10-90%
Nonoperating (38.7°C max wet bulb)
5-95%
5-95%
Operating
10,000 ft
3048 m
Nonoperating
30,000 ft
9144 m
Maximum Altitude (unpressurized)
Power Supply
Operating Voltage Range
90-264 VAC
Rated Voltage Range1
100-240 VAC
Rated Line Frequency
50-60 Hz
Operating Line Frequency
47-63 Hz
332 Appendix E Specifications
Table E-1 Specifications (continued)
1
Standard Efficiency
320W
High Efficiency
320W active PFC; 87/90/87% efficient at
20/50/100% load
Rated Input Current
5.5A
This system utilizes an active power factor corrected power supply. This allows the system to pass the CE mark
requirements for use in the countries of the European Union. The active power factor corrected power supply also has the
added benefit of not requiring an input voltage range select switch.
MT Specifications
Table E-2 Specifications
Chassis
Height
14.9 in
37.7 cm
Width
7.0 in
17.7 cm
Depth
17.0 in
43.1 cm
Approximate Weight
20.5 lb
9.3 kg
Weight Supported (maximum distributed load in desktop
position)
77 lb
35 kg
Operating
50° to 95°F
10° to 35°C
Nonoperating
-22° to 140°F
-30° to 60°C
Temperature Range
NOTE: Operating temperature is derated 1.0° C per 300 m (1000 ft) to 3000 m (10,000 ft) above sea level; no
direct sustained sunlight. Maximum rate of change is 10° C/Hr. The upper limit may be limited by the type and
number of options installed.
Relative Humidity (noncondensing)
Operating
10-90%
10-90%
Nonoperating (38.7°C max wet bulb)
5-95%
5-95%
Operating
10,000 ft
3048 m
Nonoperating
30,000 ft
9144 m
Maximum Altitude (unpressurized)
Power Supply
Operating Voltage Range
90-264 VAC
Rated Voltage Range1
100-240 VAC
Rated Line Frequency
50-60 Hz
Operating Line Frequency
47-63 Hz
Standard Efficiency
320W
High Efficiency
320W active PFC; 87/90/87% efficient at
20/50/100% load
MT Specifications 333
Table E-2 Specifications (continued)
Rated Input Current
1
5.5A
This system utilizes an active power factor corrected power supply. This allows the system to pass the CE mark
requirements for use in the countries of the European Union. The active power factor corrected power supply also has the
added benefit of not requiring an input voltage range select switch.
334 Appendix E Specifications
SFF Specifications
Table E-3 Specifications
Chassis (in the desktop position)
Height
4.0 in
10.0 cm
Width
13.3 in
33.8 cm
Depth
14.9 in
37.9 cm
Approximate Weight
16.7 lb
7.6 kg
Weight Supported (maximum distributed load in desktop position)
77 lb
35 kg
Operating
50° to 95°F
10° to 35°C
Nonoperating
-22° to 140°F
-30° to 60°C
Temperature Range
NOTE: Operating temperature is derated 1.0° C per 300 m (1000 ft) to 3000 m (10,000 ft) above sea level; no direct
sustained sunlight. Maximum rate of change is 10° C/Hr. The upper limit may be limited by the type and number of options
installed.
Relative Humidity (noncondensing)
Operating
10-90%
10-90%
Nonoperating (38.7°C max wet bulb)
5-95%
5-95%
Operating
10,000 ft
3048 m
Nonoperating
30,000 ft
9144 m
Maximum Altitude (unpressurized)
Power Supply
1
Operating Voltage Range
90-264 VAC
Rated Voltage Range1
100-240 VAC
Rated Line Frequency
50-60 Hz
Operating Line Frequency
47-63 Hz
Standard Efficiency
240W active PFC
High Efficiency
240W active PFC; 87/90/87% efficient at
20/50/100% load
Rated Input Current
4A
This system utilizes an active power factor corrected power supply. This allows the system to pass the CE mark
requirements for use in the countries of the European Union. The active power factor corrected power supply also has the
added benefit of not requiring an input voltage range select switch.
SFF Specifications 335
USDT Specifications
Table E-4 Specifications
Chassis
Height
2.60 in
6.6 cm
Width
9.90 in
25.1 cm
Depth
10.00 in
25.4 cm
Approximate Weight
6.8 lb
3.1 kg
Weight Supported (maximum distributed load in desktop position)
77 lb
35 kg
Operating
50° to 95° F
10° to 35° C
Nonoperating
-22° to 140° F
-30° to 60° C
(depth will increase if the computer is equipped with a port security bracket)
Temperature Range (values subject to change with increasing altitude above sea
level)
NOTE: Operating temperature is derated 1.0° C per 300 m (1,000 ft) to 3,000 m (10,000 ft) above sea level, no direct
sustained sunlight. Maximum rate of change is 10° C (50° F)/Hr. The upper limit may be limited by the type and number of
options installed.
Relative Humidity (noncondensing)
Operating (28° C (82.4° F) max wet bulb)
10-90%
10-90%
Nonoperating (38.7° C (101.66° F) max wet bulb)
5-95%
5-95%
Operating
10,000 ft
3,048 m
Nonoperating
30,000 ft
9,144 m
Maximum Altitude (unpressurized)
Power Supply
1
Operating Voltage Range
90-264 VAC
Rated Voltage Range1
100-240 VAC
Rated Line Frequency
50-60 Hz
Operating Line Frequency
47-63 Hz
Rated Input Current
N/A
This system utilizes an active power factor corrected external power supply. This allows the system to pass the CE mark
requirements for use in the countries of the European Union. The active power factor corrected power supply also has the
added benefit of not requiring an input voltage range select switch.
336 Appendix E Specifications
Index
Symbols/Numerics
2.5-in drive adapter, spare part
number 34, 44, 53
A
AC adapter, USDT
spare part number 58, 64
access panel
CMT removal and
replacement 76
CMT spare part number 76
locking and unlocking 327
MT removal 123
MT spare part number 123
SFF removal and
replacement 164
SFF spare part number 164
USDT removal and
replacement 208
USDT spare part number 208
access panel, CMT
spare part number 32, 38
access panel, locked 255
access panel, MT
spare part number 40, 47
access panel, SFF
spare part number 49, 56
access panel, USDT
spare part number 58, 64
adapter, DisplayPort to DVI
spare part number 36, 46, 55
adapter, DisplayPort to DVI (not
illustrated)
spare part number 33, 42, 51,
59
adapter, DisplayPort to HDMI
spare part number 37, 46, 55
adapter, DisplayPort to HDMI (not
illustrated)
spare part number 33, 43, 51,
59
adapter, DisplayPort to VGA
spare part number 37, 46, 55
adapter, DisplayPort to VGA (not
illustrated)
spare part number 33, 42, 51,
59
antenna, spare part number 35,
44, 53, 61
antennas
USDT spare part number 244
audible codes 301
audio problems 270
B
Backup and Restore 316
battery
disposal 72
battery replacement 319
beep codes 301
bezel blank
spare part number 80, 127
bezel blank (USDT), spare part
number 58
spare part numbers 63
booting options
Full Boot 292
Quick Boot 292
C
cable management 73
cable pinouts
SATA data 73
card reader
USDT removal and
replacement 228
USDT spare part number 228
card reader, spare part number
34, 44, 53
card reader, USDT
spare part number 61
cautions
AC power 66
cables 72
cooling fan 71
electrostatic discharge 66
keyboard cleaning 70
keyboard keys 70
CD-ROM or DVD problems 283
chasis types, illustrated 66
chassis fan, CMT
spare part number 34, 38
chassis fan, MT
spare part number 47
chassis fan, SFF
spare part number 56
chassis fan, USDT
spare part number 64
chassis stand
spare part number 53
clamp lock, spare part number
34, 36, 43, 46, 53, 55, 61
cleaning
computer 69
mouse 71
safety precautions 69
CMOS
backing up 305
clearing and resetting 307
CMT
access panel removal and
replacement 76
Index 337
access panel, spare part
number 32, 38
chassis fan, spare part
number 34, 38
disassembly preparation 75
fan shroud removal and
replacement 104
fan sink, spare part number
38
fan, spare part number 34, 38
front bezel removal and
replacement 77
front bezel, spare part
number 32, 38
front I/O assembly, spare part
number 33, 38
front I/O device removal and
replacement 105
heat sink removal and
replacement 110
heat sink, spare part number
34
power supply removal and
replacement 115
power supply, spare part
number 32, 37
power switch removal and
replacement 107
power switch/LED assembly,
spare part number 33, 38
preparation for disassembly
75
processor removal and
replacement 112
rear chassis fan removal and
replacement 109
SATA hard drive cable, spare
part number 33, 38
SATA optical drive cable, spare
part number 33, 38
speaker removal and
replacement 108
speaker, spare part number
34, 38
system board removal and
replacement 116
system board, spare part
number 32, 38
338 Index
computer
changing from desktop to
tower 248
specifications 335, 336
computer cleaning 69
connecting drive cables 89
country power cord set
requirements 331
Customer Support 251, 291
D
desktop conversion
CMT 117
DIMMs. See memory
disassembly preparation
CMT 75
MT 122
SFF 163
USDT 207
DisplayPort cable
spare part number 36, 46, 55
DisplayPort cable (not illustrated)
spare part number 33, 43, 51,
59
DMS-59 to dual VGA cable
spare part number 36, 46, 55
DMS-59 to dual VGA cable (not
illustrated)
spare part number 33, 42, 51
drives
CMT cable connections 95
CMT installation 95
CMT locations 90
connecting cables 89
installing 89
MT cable connections 138
MT installation 138
MT locations 140
SFF cable connections 179
SFF installation 179
SFF locations 178
E
electrostatic discharge (ESD) 66
preventing damage 67
error
codes 292, 301
messages 293
eSATA port (expansion), spare
part number 38, 47, 56
eSATA port assembly, spare part
number 35, 44, 53
expansion card
CMT installation 85
CMT removal 85
MT installation 130
MT removal 130
SFF installation 172
SFF removal 172
expansion slot cover
CMT removal 86
MT removal 132
SFF removal 173
external USB webcam, spare part
number 35, 44, 53, 61
F
f11 recovery 318
FailSafe Key 327
fan
CMT spare part number 109
MT spare part number 43, 46,
157
fan (front), USDT
spare part number 61
fan (rear), USDT
spare part number 60
fan duct
SFF removal and
replacement 190
SFF spare part number 190
fan duct, SFF
spare part number 52, 56
fan sink
CMT removal and
replacement 110
CMT spare part number 110
fan sink, CMT
spare part number 38
fan sink, MT
spare part number 47
fan with guard, MT
spare part number 43
fan, CMT
spare part number 34, 38
fan, MT
spare part number 47
fan, power supply 71
fan, SFF
spare part number 52, 56
fan, USDT
spare part number 64
fan/baffle assembly
MT removal and replacement
147
FireWire card, spare part
number 37, 46, 56
flash drive problems 285
flashing LEDs 301
front bezel
CMT removal and
replacement 77
CMT security 78
CMT spare part number 77
MT blank removal 127
MT removal 124
MT security 125
MT spare part number 124
removing blanks 80, 168, 212
SFF removal and
replacement 165
SFF security 166
SFF spare part number 165
USDT removal and
replacement 209
USDT security 210
USDT spare part number 209
front bezel, CMT
spare part number 32, 38
front bezel, MT
spare part number 40, 48
front bezel, SFF
spare part number 49, 57
front bezel, USDT
spare part number 58, 64
front fan
SFF removal and
replacement 191
SFF spare part number 191
USDT removal and
replacement 218
USDT spare part number 218
front fan assembly
MT spare part number 147
front I/O and power switch
assembly
SFF spare part number 194
front I/O and USB assembly
CMT spare part number 105
front I/O assembly
MT spare part number 149
front I/O assembly, CMT
spare part number 33, 38
front I/O assembly, MT
spare part number 42, 47
front I/O assembly, SFF
spare part number 51
Front I/O cable and power switch
assembly, SFF
spare part number 56
front I/O device
CMT removal and
replacement 105
front I/O panel, USDT
spare part number 61
front I/O, power switch assembly
SFF removal and
replacement 194
front panel components
CMT 3
MT 4
SFF 5
USDT 6
front panel problems 287
front USB panel
MT removal and replacement
149
G
general problems 254
graphics board
USDT removal and
replacement 239
graphics card, spare part
number 36, 45, 54
grommet (hard drive isolation),
spare part number 34, 44, 53,
61
grounding methods 67
guide screws 89
CMT location 96
MT location 139
SFF location 180
H
hard drive
CMT installation 99
CMT removal 91
MT installation 144
MT removal 144
proper handling 72
SATA characteristics 73
SFF installation 187
SFF removal 187
spare part numbers 35, 44,
54, 62
USDT installation 222
USDT removal 222
hard drive problems 260
hard drive recovery 318
hardware installation problems
276
heat sink
MT removal and replacement
151
MT spare part number 151
SFF removal and
replacement 197
SFF spare part number 197
USDT removal and
replacement 231
USDT spare part number 231
heat sink, CMT
spare part number 34
heat sink, MT
spare part number 43
heat sink, SFF
spare part number 52, 56
heat sink, USDT
spare part number 60
helpful hints 252
hood sensor
CMT removal and
replacement 104
SFF removal and
replacement 193
SFF spare part number 193
spare part number 34, 37, 43,
47, 52, 56, 63, 104
USDT removal and
replacement 238
USDT spare part number 238
HP Business Digital Headset,
spare part number 35, 44, 53,
61
I
installing
battery 319
Index 339
CMT drive cables 95
CMT expansion card 85
CMT hard drive 99
CMT media card reader 97
CMT memory 82
CMT optical drive 97
drive cables 89
guide screws 89
MT drive cables 138
MT expansion card 130
MT hard drive 144
MT media card reader 142
MT memory 128
MT optical drive 142
SFF drive cables 179
SFF expansion card 172
SFF hard drive 187
SFF media card reader 185
SFF memory 169
SFF optical drive 181
USDT hard drive 222
USDT memory 214
USDT optical drive 221
Internet access problems 287
K
keyboard
cleaning 70
spare part numbers 35, 36,
37, 44, 46, 53, 55, 61, 62, 63
keyboard problems 274
L
LEDs
blinking power 301
blinking PS/2 keyboard 301
locks
CMT front bezel 78
MT front bezel 125
SFF front bezel 166
Smart Cover Lock 327
USDT front bezel 210
M
media card reader
CMT installation 97
CMT removal 91
MT installation 142
MT removal 140
SFF installation 185
SFF removal 184
340 Index
Media Card Reader problems
263
memory
CMT installation 82
CMT socket population 83
CMT specifications 82
MT installation 128
MT socket population 128
MT specifications 128
SFF installation 169
SFF socket population 169
SFF specifications 169
USDT installation 214
USDT socket population 215
USDT specifications 214
memory module
spare part number 82, 128,
169
memory module, USDT
spare part number 214
memory modules
spare part number 32, 38, 41,
47, 48, 49, 57, 59, 64
memory problems 281
monitor problems 265
mouse
cleaning 71
mouse problems 274
mouse, spare part number 34,
35, 44, 53, 61
MT
access panel, spare part
number 40, 47
disassembly preparation 122
fan sink, spare part number
47
fan with guard, spare part
number 43
fan, spare part number 47
fan/baffle assembly removal
and replacement 147
front bezel, spare part
number 40, 48
front I/O assembly, spare part
number 42, 47
front USB panel removal and
replacement 149
heat sink removal and
replacement 151
heat sink, spare part number
43
power supply removal and
replacement 159
power supply, spare part
number 40, 46
power switch/LED assembly
removal and replacement
150
power switch/LED assembly,
spare part number 42, 47
preparation for disassembly
122
processor removal and
replacement 153
rear chassis fan removal and
replacement 157
SATA cable, spare part
number 42
SATA hard drive cable, spare
part number 42, 47
SATA optical drive cable, spare
part number 42, 47
speaker removal and
replacement 156
speaker, spare part number
43, 47
system board removal and
replacement 161
system board, spare part
number 41, 47
N
network problems 278
NIC, spare part number 37, 46,
55
numeric error codes 293
O
operating guidelines 69
optical drive
CMT installation 97
CMT removal 91
MT installation 142
MT removal 140
SFF installation 181
SFF removal 180
spare part numbers 36, 38,
45, 47, 54, 56, 62, 63
USDT installation 221
USDT release latch
attachment 220
USDT removal 219
optical drive cable/connector,
USDT
spare part number 59
optical drive problems 283
optical drive rail
USDT removal and
replacement 227
optical drive rail kit
USDT spare part number 227
optical drive rail, USDT
spare part number 61
optical drive, USDT
spare part number 219
overheating, prevention 69
P
password
clearing 305
power-on 305
setup 305
port cover
USDT spare part number 249
POST error messages 292
power cord set requirements
country specific 331
power problems 258
power supply
CMT removal and
replacement 115
CMT spare part number 115
fan 71
MT removal and replacement
159
MT spare part number 159
operating voltage range 332,
333, 335, 336
SFF removal and
replacement 202
power supply, CMT
spare part number 32, 37
power supply, MT
spare part number 40, 46
power supply, SFF
spare part number 49, 55
power switch
CMT removal and
replacement 107
power switch/LED assembly
CMT spare part number 107
MT removal and replacement
150
MT spare part number 150
power switch/LED assembly, CMT
spare part number 33, 38
power switch/LED assembly, MT
spare part number 42, 47
power-on password 305
printer port
spare part number 34
printer port (expansion), spare part
number 37, 47, 56
printer port, PCI card
spare part number 52
printer port, spare part number
43
printer problems 272
problems
audio 270
CD-ROM or DVD 283
flash drive 285
front panel 287
general 254
hard drive 260
hardware installation 276
Internet access 287
keyboard 274
Media Card Reader 263
memory 281
monitor 265
mouse 274
network 278
power 258
printer 272
processor 283
software 289
processor
CMT removal and
replacement 112
MT removal and replacement
153
SFF removal and
replacement 199
spare part number 32, 38, 41,
48, 50, 57, 59
USDT removal and
replacement 233
processor problems 283
product ID locations 11
R
rear chassis fan
CMT removal and
replacement 109
CMT spare part number 109
MT removal and replacement
157
MT spare part number 43, 46,
157
rear fan
USDT removal and
replacement 243, 244
USDT spare part number 243
rear panel components
CMT 7
MT 8
SFF 9
USDT 10
rear port cover, USDT
spare part number 61
recovery partition 318
removal and replacement
CMT access panel 76
CMT fan sink 110
CMT front bezel 77
CMT front I/O device 105
CMT hood sensor 104
CMT power supply 115
CMT power switch 107
CMT processor 112
CMT rear chassis fan 109
CMT speaker 108
CMT system board 116
MT fan/baffle assembly 147
MT front USB panel 149
MT heat sink 151
MT power supply 159
MT power switch/LED
assembly 150
MT processor 153
MT rear chassis fan 157
MT speaker 156
MT system board 161
SFF fan duct 190
SFF front bezel 164, 165
SFF front fan 191
SFF front I/O, power switch
assembly 194
Index 341
SFF heat sink 197
SFF hood sensor 193
SFF power supply 202
SFF processor 199
SFF speaker 196
SFF system board 204
USDT access panel 208
USDT card reader 228
USDT front bezel 209
USDT front fan 218
USDT graphics board 239
USDT heat sink 231
USDT hood sensor 238
USDT optical drive rail 227
USDT processor 233
USDT rear fan 243, 244
USDT speaker 230
USDT system board 241
USDT WLAN tuner module
236
removing
battery 319
bezel blanks 168, 212
CMT bezel blanks 80
CMT drives 91
CMT expansion card 85
CMT expansion slot cover 86
CMT media card reader 91
MT bezel blanks 127
MT computer access panel
123
MT expansion card 130
MT expansion slot cover 132
MT front bezel 124
MT hard drive 144
MT media card reader 140
MT optical drive 140
SFF expansion card 172
SFF expansion slot cover 173
SFF hard drive 187
SFF media card reader 184
SFF optical drive 180
Smart Cover Lock 327
USDT hard drive 222
USDT optical drive 219
resetting
CMOS 305
password jumper 305
restoring the hard drive 318
342 Index
rubber foot
spare part number 53
S
safety and comfort 251
safety precautions
cleaning 69
SATA
connectors on system board
73
data cable pinouts 73
hard drive characteristics 73
SATA cable
spare part number 33
SATA cable, MT
spare part number 42
SATA cable, SFF
spare part number 51
SATA drive cable, SFF
spare part number 51
SATA hard drive cable, CMT
spare part number 33, 38
SATA hard drive cable, MT
spare part number 42, 47
SATA optical drive cable, CMT
spare part number 33, 38
SATA optical drive cable, MT
spare part number 42, 47
screws, correct size 71
security
CMT front bezel 78
MT front bezel 125
SFF front bezel 166
Smart Cover Lock 327
USDT front bezel 210
serial number locations 11
serial port (expansion), spare part
number 37, 47, 56
serial port, spare part number 34,
44, 53
service considerations 71
setup password 305
SFF
access panel, spare part
number 49, 56
chassis fan, spare part
number 56
disassembly preparation 163
fan duct removal and
replacement 190
fan duct, spare part number
52, 56
fan, spare part number 52
front bezel removal and
replacement 164, 165
front bezel, spare part
number 49, 57
front fan removal and
replacement 191
front I/O assembly, spare part
number 51
Front I/O cable and power
switch assembly, spare part
number 56
front I/O, power switch
assembly removal and
replacement 194
heat sink removal and
replacement 197
heat sink, spare part number
52, 56
hood sensor removal and
replacement 193
power supply removal and
replacement 202
power supply, spare part
number 49, 55
preparation for disassembly
163
processor removal and
replacement 199
SATA cable, spare part
number 51
SATA drive cable, spare part
number 51
solenoid lock, spare part
number 52
speaker removal and
replacement 196
speaker, spare part number
52, 56
system board removal and
replacement 204
system board, spare part
number 49, 56
Smart Cover Lock 327
software
problems 289
servicing computer 71
solenoid lock
spare part number 34, 37, 43,
47, 56
solenoid lock, SFF
spare part number 52
solid-state drive, spare part
number 36, 38, 45, 48, 54, 57,
62
spare part number
tamper-resistant wrench 71
Torx T-15 screwdriver 71
speaker
CMT removal and
replacement 108
CMT spare part number 108
MT removal and replacement
156
MT spare part number 156
SFF removal and
replacement 196
SFF spare part number 196
USDT removal and
replacement 230
USDT spare part number 230
speaker, CMT
spare part number 34, 38
speaker, MT
spare part number 43, 47
speaker, SFF
spare part number 52, 56
speaker, USDT
spare part number 61, 64
specifications
CMT memory 82
computer 332, 335, 336
MT memory 128
SFF memory 169
USDT memory 214
stand (USDT) spare part number
63
static electricity 66
system board
CMT removal and
replacement 116
CMT spare part number 116
MT removal and replacement
161
MT spare part number 161
SATA connectors 73
SFF removal and
replacement 204
SFF spare part number 204
USDT removal and
replacement 241
system board connections
CMT 81
MT 136
SFF 177
USDT 213
system board, CMT
spare part number 32, 38
system board, MT
spare part number 41, 47
system board, SFF
spare part number 49, 56
system board, USDT
spare part number 58, 63
T
tamper-proof screws
tool 71
temperature control 69
tools, servicing 71
Torx T15 screwdriver 71
tower configuration 248
tower conversion
CMT 119
tower orientation 206
U
unlocking access panel 327
USB powered speakers, spare part
number 34, 37, 44, 46, 53, 55,
61, 63
USDT
AC adapter, spare part
number 58, 64
access panel removal and
replacement 208
access panel, spare part
number 58, 64
card reader removal and
replacement 228
card reader, spare part
number 61
chassis fan, spare part
number 64
disassembly preparation 207
fan (front), spare part number
61
fan (rear), spare part number
60
front bezel removal and
replacement 209
front bezel, spare part
number 58, 64
front fan removal and
replacement 218
front I/O panel, spare part
number 61
graphics board removal and
replacement 239
heat sink removal and
replacement 231
heat sink, spare part number
60
hood sensor removal and
replacement 238
optical drive cable/connector,
spare part number 59
optical drive rail removal and
replacement 227
optical drive rail, spare part
number 61
preparation for disassembly
207
processor removal and
replacement 233
rear fan removal and
replacement 243, 244
rear port cover, spare part
number 61
speaker removal and
replacement 230
speaker, spare part number
61, 64
system board removal and
replacement 241
system board, spare part
number 58, 63
WLAN module removal and
replacement 236
V
ventilation, proper 69
W
Wake-on-LAN feature 278
Index 343
Windows 8 operating system
DVD 318
WLAN module
USDT removal and
replacement 236
USDT spare part number 236
344 Index